Page 1 K R I % 77 DIGITAL INTELLIGENT PIANO Owner`s Manual


Add to my manuals
188 Pages

advertisement

Page 1 K R I  % 77 DIGITAL INTELLIGENT PIANO Owner`s Manual | Manualzz
Roland
K R a 7 // DIGITAL INTELLIGENT PIANO
Owner’s Manual
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS” (p. 2), “USING THE UNIT SAFELY" (p. 3), and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (p.
5). These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the
unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every
feature provided by your new unit, Owner's Manual should be read in its entirety. The
manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference
Copyright © 2000 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without
the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
. product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVAIR constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of imporlani
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
RISK DO NOT OPEN presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage" within the
| INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TC A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.
NORD DON —
o
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:
Read these instructions. 10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
Keep these instructions. particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
Heed all warnings. point where they exit from the apparatus.
Follow all instructions. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
Do not use this apparatus near water. manufacturer.
Clean only with a damp cloth. 12. Never use with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in or table except as specified by the
accordance with the manufacturers instructions. manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, When a cart is used, use caution when
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including moving the cart/apparatus combination to
amplifiers) that produce heat. avoid injury from tip-over.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or 13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with unused for fong periods of time.
one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two 14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any
third prong are provided for your safety. When the provided way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,
replacement of the obsolete outlet. the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does
no! operate normaily, or has been dropped.
For the О.К —
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
BLUE: NEUTRAL
BROWN: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug.
EER CAEN
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS |
About /N WARNING and /\CAUTION Notices
About the Symbols
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
/AWARNING injury should the unit be used
improperly.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
/N CAUTION
* Material damage refers to damage or
other adverse effects caused with
respect to the home and all its
furnishings, as well to domestic
animals or pets.
A
The À symbol alerts the user to important instructions
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
The (Y symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
A WARNING |
« Before using this unit, make sure to read the instructions
below, and the Owner’s
* Do not open or perform any internal modifications on
the unit.
e Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts within
it
tions directing you to do so). Refer all servicing to your
s Manual.
(except when this manual provides specific instruc-
retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an autho-
rized Roland distributor, as listed on the “Information”
page.
* Never use or store the unit in places that are:
Subject to temperature extremes (e.g, direct sunlight
in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating duct, on top of
heat-generating equipment); or are
Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors); or are
Humid; or are
Exposed to rain; or are
Dusty; or are
Subject to high levels of vibration.
e
The O symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-
cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
* Make sure vou always have the unit placed so it is level
and sure to remain stable. Never place it on stands that
could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
* The unit should be connected to a power supply only of
the type described in the operating instructions, or as
marked on the unit.
ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING
E AA A AAA AZ RES
/A\WARNING
Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord, nor
place heavy objects on it. Doing so can damage the cord,
producing severed elements and short circuits.
Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards!
This unit, either alone or in combination with an
amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be capable
of producing sound levels that could cause permanent
hearing loss. Do not operate for a lung period of lime at a
high volume level, or at a level that is uncomfortable. If
you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears,
vou should immediately stop using the unit, and consult
an audiologist.
Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material, coins,
pins); or liquids of any kind (water, soft drinks, etc) to
penetrate the unit.
®
In households with small children, an adult should
provide supervision until the child is capable of
following all the rules essential for the sale operation of
the unit.
Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
Do not force the unit's power-supply cord to share an
outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices. Be
especially careful when using extension cords—the total
power used by all devices you have connected to the
extension cord's outlet must never exceed the power
rating (watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive
loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and
eventually melt through.
Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult with
vour retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an
authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the “Infor-
mation” page.
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
Rió re
| /\ CAUTION
does not interfere with its proper ventilation.
e The unit should be localed so that its location or position 1
» Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply cord
when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or À
this unit.
* Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming
entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be placed so
they are out of the reach of children.
unit.
e Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on the S
“ee Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet 0
hands when plugging into, or unplugging from, an ÓN
outlet or this unit.
precautions listed below. At least two persons are
required to safely lift and move the unit. It should be
handled carefully, all the while keeping it level. Make
sure to have a firm grip, to protect yourself from injury
and the instrument from damage.
* Check to make sure the knob bolts securing the unit
to the stand have not become loose. Fasten them
again securely whenever you notice any loosening.
* Disconnect the power cord.
* Disconnect all cords coming from external devices.
* Raise the adjusters on the stand (p. 14).
* Close the lid.
* Fold down the music stand.
* If vou need to move the instrument, take note of the O
e Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and unplug
the power cord from the outlet (p. 13).
* Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in
your area, pull the plug on the power cord out of the
outlet.
get vour fingers pinched (p. 13). Adult supervision is
recommended whenever small children use the unit.
+ Be careful when opening/ closing the lid so you do not 2
At Eté CCA IEEE TAACACTENT CATA TE TESTER ÁTEATETETAFTvd TENCIA TeErEddrdanuNadr, Guaca remaóTa
IMPORTANT NOTES
In addition to the items listed under “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS" and “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on pages 2,
3 and 4, please read and observe the following:
Power Supply
Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any
device that will generate line noise (such as an electric
motor or variable lighting system).
Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the
power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions
and/or damage to speakers or other devices.
Placement
Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment
containing large power transformers) may induce hum.
To alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this
unit; or move it farther away from the source of inter-
ference.
This device may interfere with radio and television
reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such
receivers.
Observe the following when using the unit's floppy disk
drive. For further details, refer to “Before Using Floppy
Disks”.
* Do not place the unit near devices that produce a
strong magnetic field (e.g., loudspeakers).
* Install the unit on a solid, level surface.
* Do not move the unit or subject it to vibration while
the drive is operating.
Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near
devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed
vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes.
Also, do not allow lighting devices that normally are
used while their light source is very close to the unit
(such as a piano light), or powerful spotlights to shine
upon the same area of the unit for extended periods of
time. Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.
To avoid possible breakdown, do not use the unit in a wet
area, such as an area exposed to rain or other moisture.
Do not allow rubber, vinyl, or similar materials to remain
on the piano for long periods of time. Such objects can
discolor or otherwise harmfully affect the finish.
Do not put anything that contains water (c.g., flower
vases) on the piano. Also, avoid the use of insecticides,
perfumes, alcohol, nail polish, spray cans, etc, near the
unit. Swiftly wipe away any liquid that spills on the unit
using a dry, soft cloth.
Maintenance
To clean the unit, use a dry, soft cloth; or one that is
slightly dampened. Try to wipe the entire surface using
an equal amount of strength, moving the cloth along with
the grain of the wood. Rubbing too hard in the same area
can damage the finish.
Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any
kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or
deformation.
Additional Precautions
Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the
contents of data that was stored on a floppy disk once it
has been lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability
concerning such loss of data.
Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit's
buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its
jacks and connectors. Rough handling can lead to
malfunctions.
Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the
connector itself—never pull on the cable. This way you
will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cable’s
internal elements.
A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during
normal operation.
To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit's
volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use
headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about
those around you {especially when it is late at night).
When you need to transport the unit, pack it in shock-
absorbent material. Transporting the unit without doing
so can cause it to become scratched or damaged, and
could lead to malfunction.
Do not pull the music stand too far forward when
setting / releasing its latches.
Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard.
This can be the cause of malfunction, such as keys ceasing
to produce sound.
Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using
some other make of connection cable, please note the
following precautions.
* Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use
cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this
unit. The use of such cables can cause the sound level
to be extremely low, or impossible to hear. For infor-
mation on cable specifications, contact the manufac-
turer of the cable.
Before Using Floppy Disks
Handling the Floppy Disk Drive
Install the unit on a solid, level surface in an area free
from vibration. If the unit must be installed at an angle,
be sure the installation does not exceed the permissible
range.
Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been moved
to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly
different than its former location. Rapid changes in the
environment can cause condensation to form inside the
drive, which will adversely affect the operation of the
drive and/or damage floppy disks. When the unit has
been moved, allow it to become accustomed to the new
environment (allow a few hours) before operating it.
To insert a disk, push it gently but firmly into the drive—
it will click into place. To remove a disk, press the EJECT
button firmly. Do not use excessive force to remove a disk
which is lodged in the drive.
The indicator light for the disk drive lights up at full
brightness when reading or writing data, and lights up at
half brightness at other times. Don’t try to eject the disk
while reading or writing is in progress (that is, when the
indicator light is lit up at full brightness). Attempting to
do so may damage the magnetic surface of the disk,
rendering it unusable.
Remove any disk from the drive before powering up or
down.
To prevent damage to the disk drive's heads, always try
to hold the floppy disk in a level position (not tilted in
any direction) while inserting it into the drive. Push it in
firmly, but gently. Never use excessive force.
To avoid the risk of malfunction and/or damage, insert
only floppy disks into the disk drive. Never insert any
other type of disk. Avoid getting paper clips, coins, or
any other foreign objects inside the drive.
Handling Floppy Disks
Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of
magnetic storage medium. Microscopic precision is
required to enable storage of large amounts of data on
such a small surface area. To preserve their integrity,
please observe the following when handling floppy disks:
* Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk.
* Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty
areas.
* Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes
(e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle). Recom-
mended temperature range: 10 to 50° C (50 to 122° F).
* Do not expose tloppy disks to strong magnetic fields,
such as those generated by loudspeakers.
Floppy disks have a “write protect” tab which can protect
the disk from accidental erasure. It is recommended that
the tab be kept in the PROTECT position, and moved to
the WRITE position only when you wish to write new
data onto the disk.
Rear side of the disk
Write
(can write new data onto disk)
Write Protect Tab | В
Protect
{prevents writing to disk)
The identification label should be firmly affixed to the
disk. Should the label come loose while the disk is in the
drive, it may be difficult to remove the disk.
Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them,
and to protect them from dust, dirt, and other hazards.
By using a dirty or dust-ridden disk, you risk damaging
the disk, as well as causing the disk drive to malfunction.
Disks containing performance data for this unit should
always be locked (have their write protect tab slid to the
“Protect” position) before you insert them into the drive
on some other unit (except the PR-300, or a product in the
HP-G, MT, KR, or Atelier families), or into a computer's
drive. Otherwise (if the write protect tab remains in the
Write” position), when you perform any disk operations
using the other device's disk drive (such as checking the
contents of the disk, or loading data), you risk rendering
the disk unreadable by this unit's disk drive.
GS (GS) is a registered trademark of Roland Corpo-
ration.
Apple is a registered trademark of Apple Computer,
Inc.
Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc.
IBM PC is a registered trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.
COMPOSER is a registered trademark of Roland
Corporation.
All product names mentioned in this document are
trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners.
Introduction
Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the Roland KR-377 Intelligent Piano.
While the KR-377 Intelligent Piano certainly allows you to achieve authentic piano
performances, it also features easy-to-use Automatic Accompaniment and numerous other
useful functions.
In order to enjoy reliable performance of your new keyboard for many years to come, please
take the time to read through this manual in its entirety.
Features
Authentic Piano Sound
The KR-377 reproduces the tones of a high-quality
grand piano, with stereo sampled sounds that capture
the true piano sound so well, you can even hear the
hammers hitting the strings. With a maximum
polyphony of 64 stereo piano tones, the KR-377 can
handle just about any kind of performance, even when
extensive pedal work is involved. In addition, the KR-
377 features a Progressive Hammer Action, with a
heavier touch in the lower keys and lighter touch in the
upper keys, for even more realistic piano keyboard
feel. All this provides you with more natural, more
authentic piano performance.
Score Display
Music files and your recordings are displayed as score
in the screen (p. 79).
You can view the score with lyrics, or view a different
performance part.
EZ Functions Let You Get Straight to
What You Want to Accomplish
The EZ (Easy) function allows even beginners to
record / playback (p. 34, p. 39) and use automatic
accompaniment (p. 29) easily and interactively.
The [Help] button lets you view an on-screen
explanation of terms or functions at any time (p. 23).
A Wide Variety of Accompaniment
Styles with the Automatic
Accompaniment Function
The KR-377 features numerous Music Styles—
approximately 162 different Styles are provided--and
an Automatic Accompaniment function. You can use
these to add the exact accompaniment you have in
mind to your own performances (p. 60).
Effects Adding Three-Dimensional
Breadth to Your Performances
(Advanced 3D)
You can select parts in Performances and add three-
dimensional breadth to them.
This provides the pleasant effect of “surrounding”
your performance within the sound (p. 33).
Convenient Functions to Support Your
Practice Efforts
Numerous functions convenient for practice are
provided, including tape recorder-style recording (p.
91), part playback for individual hands (p. 85), and a
metronome function (p. 56), making your practice
more effective in ways possible only on an electronic
piano.
Expandable Ensemble Opportunities
Using MIDI (MID! Ensemble)
You can connect this instrument's MIDI connector to
an electronic percussion instrument or other separate
instrument, allowing you to play ensemble
performances. By using “MIDI Ensemble,” you can
simply connect an instrument to the MIDI connector
and start playing using MIDI, without having to be
concerned about making a lot of MIDI settings (p. 152).
Making Use of Commercially Available
Music Files for Listening or Lessons
You can use the built-in disk drive to listen to
commercial Music File songs and save recorded tunes
on floppy disk (p. 77, p. 104).
Karaoke Enjoyment
You can connect a microphone and enjoy singing along
with songs, just like with a karaoke system (p. 41).
Introduction ~~
How to Use This Manual
This owner's manual is organized as follows.
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
For those just starting out with the KR-377, this volume explains how to make use of the
instrument’s various performance features simply and easily. We highly recommend
reading through the manual while you play the instrument, as this will allow you to more
fully grasp the kinds of things capable with the KR-377.
Chapters 1 to 9
This section explains the functions available with the KR-377 with easy-to-understand
screen shots,
Please reter to the relevant pages for the functions you wish to use.
Refer to the “Contents” when you already know what it is that you want to achieve. If you
want to learn how the KR-377's various buttons work, see “Panel Descriptions.” Also, be
sure to make use of the “Index” at the end of the volume.
Appendices
If the KR-377 does not operate as you expect, read “Troubleshooting” to make sure that your
settings are correct. If an error message appears in the display during operation, consult the
“Error Messages” section to determine the appropriate action. The appendices also provide
other information, including the Tone list, Style list, MIDI implementation chart, etc.
H Conventions Used in This Manual
* Button or knob names on the panel are enclosed in square brackets”[ 1”, as in [Function]
button.
* On screen item is enclosed in angled brackets “< >”, as in <Option>.
To choose such an item, press the corresponding button (located below or to the side of
the item).
* An asterisk (*) ora [NOTE] at the beginning of a paragraph indicates a note or
precaution. These should not be ignored.
* (p.*) refers to pages within the manual.
USING THE UNIT SAFELY ............rcconrmanuonacacaneacanronenaroonenvanenaun oe nerEnerenaeuancenanaonen Ne One reeeeroaonene 3
IMPORTANT NOTES .............e—eneececoornccacennenanenentecenanaconanavecenenenre nen cceneaennanereoneenecaneneanrecorrenanes 5
Introduction ............ e... e... RR ns enenensaanennnene mruerenannee conmassasanneues E
19/1111 E E 7
How to Use This Manual................e.... eee eee ene aereos er acacenen rare neee reee 6
Conventions Used in This Manual... e en e e 8
07) 11 1-1 41 £3 EEUU OPPOSE RRSP 9
Before You Start Playing................. eenovaneaenoreneenacanananenenen asraseausa nes cusassesneurs ... 13
Connecting the Power Cord.....................220m es 13
Raising the Music Stand ……resnseençenennnnnnenennennnennnennnnennnnnennnnnenneneünnnnnnnnmn 13
Opening and Closing the Lid a... se 13
Turning the Power On and Off .....................00ieeenee ene ee creenacees 13
Adjusting the Sound Volume …….….…eneenenenenençennnenennneneannnnenennnennnnnnnnnnnnnnn 13
About the Pedal Sasse eerste eee bares 14
Connecting Head phOnes ………isirenmententenneensennnnnnnnennennnnnnennnnnnennnennnnenûnnnnnnnnnne 15
Connecting a MiCrOphONE .……………ceerseenmmennennennennsnnnnnnnnnnnençnnnennennannennennannnnnnn 15
Basic Operation and How to Read the Display... een 16
Typographic Conventions Used in this Owner's Manual... rer 16
Basic SOT@EI cutive etter cesses cere irene ceases teen ase es eas sansa sere sharers errs es 16
How to Perform Operations Using the 5creen o.oo, 17
Panel Descriptions......... consvansaeeen nes panoncunanTenNenean ano. aesiunenonceranenceneanennecacenmmensaoe 18
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377 ........... nanennenneveeneenencar nene neenomennecene nenas. 21
Watching the Introductory KR-377 Demo (Quick TOUT) voir, 21
Playing the Games.………sermenmennmennenenennnnnnnnennennnnnnennÜennentnnennnnnnnneneannnnnnn 22
Using the [Help] BUTtON ………..….…crereerseeneesreneeneenneneneneene*ensenserssscerensentennenniensensensenneensercncnee D
—Start playing the pianoO....…...…....…...……esesserenescaseaceresenrererrrreres asc er certe cernes 24
Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano (One-touch Piano)... ne 24
Playing the Keyboard Like an Organ (One-touch Organ}) .……….…rseserierensennennennsennennnn 25
Playing a Wide Variety of Instrument SOUNAS cco EEE E HERE KG ET REED HEUTE 26
Handy Features for Selecting Tones (Tone FINder) ccc in EEE EHRE EEE GEHE 27
Sounding the Metronome... es 28
—Try playing using Automatic Accompaniment …......….……rseieseennennsnesnennens ennnrres enr 29
Enjoying Automatic Accompaniment with Ease (EZ Arranger)... 29
Playing with an Automatic Accompaniment (One-touch Arranger)... 30
Effects Adding Three-Dimensional Breadth to Your Performances (Advanced 3D)..........33
TTY reCOrdiNO ers tei ecto creer crt eae sees essere esse nan en EN SEE 34
Recording Your Playing With Ease (EZ Recorder).….….…...…...….….erenenmarenençnnnennçnesntennnnünntn 34
Recording a PerfOrmancE ……….…….….…cceeenennennenenennnsennnnnnnnnençnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnnnnn 35
Listening to the Recorded Performance... eee ers 37
—Try to use Music FIes …..…..…..…........…..….…-rercrsensrca en an en rene n tan er rare nee na r ere re cena tan rene ere 38
Using the Disk DriV@..….……rerersereennenenemnnennen as 38
Listening to Music Files ….…..ncnennnnnnnensnnnnnnnnnnnnenenenmnnnnnnnennnhnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnn 39
Using the KR-377 as a Karaoke Machine ………………….….…rersenaneenenrenscenensscnnnescenses Lensarescenencensen nes 41
Chapter 1 Playing the Keyboard.......... exrsnssnanne ceansneennsass arrennana scene n sers „неее 42
Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano (One-touch Plano)... re 42
Playing the Keyboard Like an Organ (One-touch Organ) cc... 43
Playing Drum Sounds...................e.eeeeenren ee ee eee ccareseacenecees 44
Playing Effect Sounds................. eee eee Dee es 45
Playing a Wide Variety of Instrument Sounds coon, 46
Combining the Sounds of Two Instruments (Layer Play)... eee 47
Playing Different Tones with the Left and Right Hands (Split Play) ................—..e............ 49
Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps (Octave Shift) occ 51
Adjusting the Sound Brilliance... enn e 52
Adding Reverberation to Sounds (The Reverb Effect)....……………ucererenmenennennnnennnnnnenn 52
Effects Adding Three-Dimensional Breadth to Your Performances (Advanced 3D).......... 53
Applying an Effect Only to the Layer Tone of the Keyboard]... 54
Applying Effects to the Sound (Effects)... nena arranco ree ene. 55
Sounding the Metronome... cr ees 56
Adjusting the Tempo... cere 56
Changing the Beat of Metronome.............................. ON 56
Changing the AnimAatiON..…..…..…neenenentennennnennnennnnnnnnennannnnnnannnnennnmnnnne 57
Changing How the Metronome Beat (Pattern) Sounds... IZ
Changing the Type of Sound... eines 58
Changing the Volume... e 59
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment................. .e.ese=..... auenenanannanennenneonzancas OO
Music Style and Automatic Accompaniment................... nee sree cones 60
About Chords.............enere ee ener ree cer e reee nro aereo ee eL enn arenero nenes 61
Playing Chords with Simple Fingering (Chord Intelligence)... 61
Displaying the Chord Fingering On Screen (Chord Finder) …….…………umenmenenense 62
Choosing a Music Style .................. 2.22 nene eee eee eee rene e eee nes 63
Choosing a Music Style from Data Disk.............. e... nee eii EEE EEG 64
Playing Automatic Accompaniment While Playing a Tone in the Left Hand ..................... 65
Playing Just the Rhythm Pattern... certs, 66
Adjusting the Tempo for Automatic Accompaniment......................e.. EEE RER 66
Playing a Music Style (Start/Stop)......coo cece, 67
Starting Automatic Accompaniment When You Play the Left-hand Section
(SYNC STATE) cicero reece cease nba sheers a bests eres 67
Starting at the Press of a Button... cece 67
Stopping Automatic Accompaniment ................. eee ere essere esas ens 68
Adjusting the Timing During the Accompaniment and Starting Over (Reset) I .68
Playing the Count Sound at the End of the INtro «ccc, 69
Modifying an ACCOMPANIMENT o.oo cierto II NR IR IR ORO DDR R eee eee 70
Changing the Accompaniment Pattern Within a Song (Fill-[n) res 70
Changing the Arrangement of the Accompaniment ..............= EEE EEE 71
Adding Harmony to the Right-hand Part (Melody Intelligence)... 73
Playing the Piano Along with the Automatic Accompaniment
(Piano Style ArrANgeT) ………rrercessanserieseneenerenentscantecasesersrentrenenresesa ren Are Deere eee eee 74
Changing the Volume Balance for the Accompaniment and Keyboard ......................... 75
Adjusting the Volume of Each Performance Part.................2.m2emeni ne es 75
Chapter 3 Some Handy Features.......................... euenanoneaanrenenanecenm encananenenzaeno 77
Playing Back Songs for Practice ..........................0 000 e eee e e DD Dee Dee 77
Playing All Songs Continuotsly .....................=.e.ee.eeeeee eee Dee Dee 78
Displaying the Score «oie behets sane 79
Checking Your Performance on a Graph/ Keyboard Screen ....................... ee. 80
Adjusting the Tempo ...............2. eee e e er e Nene Deer e e eee erario 82
Setting the Tempo by Pressing the Button in Time................—....m.meee eZ 82
Playing back with No Change in TEmpoO......…………rseserereeenmennçensennenennsmnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 83
Counting Down Before a Performance Starts eures EEE EEE 84
Preventing the Part to Be Practiced from Sounding................. 2... e IR ene 85
Practicing with Setting Markers in the Song .............. e... 1.000.000 DR RI RO IRC eee 86
Setting Markers in the Song/ Erasing Markers ....................006e vena, 86
Playback from a Marker Location...............——.. eee ee eee 87
Moving a Marker... eee erario ene nee nene reee 87
Playing Back the Same Passage Over and Over ................e.me..ie0e nesses cases 88
Transposing the Key of the Keyboard (Key Transpose)...............—.—.... eee 89
Changing the Key When Playing Back SONGS ..………………isersesirmerenennnnnnnnmnannnsnnnnnnnnnne 90
Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance ……..…..…..….……sesrcnes 91
Recording Your Playing with Eas®@ …………………isirenenensenensenntnennnännnenmnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnmnnn 91
Recording a Performance Using Automatic Accompaniment ...............emeneee 94
Redoing a Recording... e eee DD RR DDD Re Deere eee 96
Erasing a Recorded Song Lensénaprarensererenaaren na vnenene ren ren ane EEE R ERREGER RER RE a 97
ey
Erasing the Sound Recorded on Individual Track Buttons cece, 97
Changing How Recording SÉOPS....….cccierenemmennnenmnennnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnnnnnnnennnnben 98
Recording Songs Starting with Pickups... cena rence enr 99
Composing an Accompaniment by Entering Chords (Chord Sequencer)................mm..... 100
Creating a Rhythm Part with Ease... ni ee e 103
Saving Songs to Floppy Disks ce 104
Formatting Floppy Disks (Format)...................—...—.—-+.ernenen en ee 104
Saving Songs on Floppy Disk..….….…...….….eiememennneennnennMnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnenn 105
Changing the Tone Set When You Save (Compatibility Function) ........................ 107
Deleting Data from Floppy DisKS …………….…erserererneneenençnnnennnnmnnsnnnnsnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnn 108
Changing the Order of Songs on Floppy Disk... RER EEEE EEE EEE RREEKEENETG 109
Chapter 5 Advanced Recording Functions .......... amcrvavuensemanren sans A 110
Selecting the Recording MethO] …………….…erenenenennnnçenteünennnseneneneneennnennnnnnnne 110
Ноу Юю СТоозе Ше Кесогепе МетШодй ........енеенанненннннннннненнннененненненннненененнееннннно) 110
Recording While Erasing the Previous Recording (Replace Recording) ................. 110
Overdubbing Without Erasing the Previous Recording (Mix Recording) .............. 110
Repeatedly Recording Over the Same Location (Loop Recording) ....................... 111
Re-Recording Part of Your Performance (Punch-in Recording) ............—.—...—....em..... 112
Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)...…...….……meeneeenenennaännennnn 115
The 16-track Sequencer SCr@@En ….….….……eerermenecnçentannentençenennennnennnneûnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 113
Recording with the 16 Track Sequencer …….……….….….….…mceeenienmennençnensnnsnensnçennnnnnmnnnn 114
Changing the Settings for Each Part... 115
Composing a Song That Changes the Beat Partway ThrOugh...….…esemenmennnennnnnennnn 116
Changing a Song's Basic T@mpo ….….….….irenennenennenenenentennenensennenennnnnnnnennnnn 117
Changing the Tempo Within the Song... ene Ds 117
Adjusting the Tempo While Listening to a SONG... menes 117
Adjusting the Tempo at a Particular Measure... EEE EEE 118
Chapter 6 Editing a Song ....... cerontaeannensanes nanonionnnatenenene rrrunonacecenen nene ….…. 119
Selecting Editing FUNCtIONS.....……esenmeneenmennnnnçennennentennnnenennnnnnnnennnsnnnnnnnnnnnnûne 119
Canceling an Edit... ses 119
COPYING @ MEASUIE «ooo as 120
Copying a Rhythm Pattern... nene een eee eee eee 121
Correcting Timing Discrepancies.……….…….……......…….…nemenenmenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsne 121
Deleting a Specific MEaSure …………………eenmennençnennnennenennnntnsnnnnnnnnnnnannennnnnnen 122
Inserting a Blank Meastre.................22 2020 ee ner nen eee ne eee 122
Making a Measure BIAnk…..…….……meereenenentännnnsnnnnennennennnnçennençennennnnnsnnennnnennnnnnn 123
Transposing Individual Parts ..……………eeereenmennnenennnnnnnçneentnnnnsentnennennnnnnnennnns 123
Exchanging Parts ………cireennmennnnennnennenennnnnnnnnenenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnennnnnnnnnnnnnn 124
Correcting Notes One by On@ ……….resrsenneeemeneneenserarcensncene rersnsneseen es 124
Modifving the Tone Changes in à SONG .…………eeeenmenenennenenenestenree caresser 125
Chapter 7 Using Other Functions................ euennenanenenaneneonanenenecmn.. een... „ее... 126
Creating an Original Style (User Style) o.oo, 126
Combining Styles to Create a New Style (Style Composer). etree aes ens beaas 126
Creating a Style from a Song You Recorded Yourself (Style Converter)................. 128
Storing User Styles to the Button coo, 131
Storing the Panel Settings (User Program) .….….….….….…eiereenennsnsenensenensnnnnnnnnsnnnnÊennnnnnne 131
Calling Up User Program asus stints Ds 132
Changing How Button Settings Are Called Up.……….………..…cerericansensenesenesenennennns 132
Saving User Style Or User Program on Floppy Disk o.oo, 132
Saving User Style Or User Program on Floppy Disk... 132
Erasing User Style Or User Program Saved on Floppy Disk... 133
Calling Up Saved User Programs from Floppy Disk... rer nee nr er 133
Disabling Everything Except Piano Play (Panel Lock) …..…..….….…iirieenenennnennnnnmnnnnnenn 133
Chapter 8 Changing Various Settings....... SE EHRE I conmenenmenanonenam—. 134
Changing the Settings for One-touch Piano... ne 134
Adding Ambience from Different Venues to Songs (Ambience)... 134
11
Changing the Key Touch (Key Touch)....….……ersenecersennensesensennseneseseseneeeneac saura ce 135
Adjusting the Sensitivity of the Pedals (Pedal Mode)... 135
Adjusting RESONANCE cocina ene eee eee cre ES 135
Changing the TUning.....….……creremennennenennçnennnsnennennnnnennennnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnn 136
Fine Adjustment of the "iano Sound (Sound)... erences 137
Changing the Settings for Automatic Accompaniment... ns 137
Changing the Keyboard's Split Point............. meme ne 137
Changing How the Automatic Accompaniment Plays... 138
Changing the Sound for Chord Tone and Bass Tone ......... eter ences enna es 138
Canceling the Chord Intelligence Function... eee memes 139
Assigning a Function to Pad Buttons or Pedals.….....…...…..……mnennençnnnnnnnn 139
Keeping the Same Tone and Tempo When the Music Style Changes...................... 141
Changing the Settings for One-touch Organ... eee 141
Changing How the Automatic Accompaniment Plays While Playing the Organ .142
Changing How the Left-hand Keyhoard Section Plays..................=e.e.e een 142
Adjusting the Footage .......................—....me een ne reee eee 143
Changing the Settings for Score SCr@@N ……….…rrncenenenmençennnnnnennnnennnnnnnennnnnnbennnn 144
Changing the Tone Set To Be Used for Playback.....….….…erermnennnenttnennnnsannennenn 144
Changing the Settings for the Marker and the Count Sound .....................e eee 145
Changing the Number of Measures Counted and the Count Sound..................... 145
Playing the Count Sound at Each RepetitiOn …………rererererenençensnennnnnçennennensnennn 145
Placing a Marker in the Middle of a Measure... eee 145
Adjusting the Standard Pitch (Master Tuning)... ne 146
Changing the Type of Reverb Eff@ct......….…..….erreenmnennannennsnnnsnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 146
Changing the Type of Chorus Effect ….….…enenesnennennnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnennnnennnnnnnnn 147
Changing the Bend RANnge..…..…….….……enenenennenennnnnnnmnmnnenmnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 147
Changing the Screen SelfingS ……….….errecenaneenenentnçenençnennennnennnnennnnnnnnnûnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 148
Hiding the On-screen Lyrics...................cm inner nee e ene nee reee Tee 148
Changing the LAngUAGC .…….…rsrrreneneaenenstenennnnnennnnnMnMnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnmnbnnnnnnn 148
Adjusting the Contrast of the Screen... eme e e 148
Displaying the Screen Message When the Power Is Turned On (Opening Message)....... 148
Maintaining Settings After the Power ls Turned Off (Memory Backup).......................... 149
Restoring the Factory Settings (Factory Reset)........................ 220000 nee eee 149
Chapter 9 Connecting External Devices...................... memes 150
Names and Functions of Jacks and Connectors................. eee e e ee 150
Connecting MIDI Devices... cece eens 151
Playing in Ensemble with Other MIDI Instruments (MIDI Ensemble)... 152
MIDI SHINES «events sesso besten theses 152
Connecting to Audio Equipment... ee ee ene eee 154
Connecting to a Computer.................. mee De eee ee De eerste abana 156
AppendiCES..…...….…..….…creeensanneneneanmentanmçntnnnnnnnÛnnnnneünnnnnMnnmnnnnnnnmnmennnnnn „....... 158
Trouble Shooting... cere sersas assessor sens ennenaneanbcavernanaame 158
If this Message Appears on Screen ....................-.=mnecemeeceecanoce nee nen en e ere ee ner nanecenenee 160
Tone List............ee...e=eereneero nene eau an eceneaeeneenaene ere nenseenanneneree nene ene ruca econo reee eneea 162
Drum/SFX Set List.............em=m=emneneeerceronon sss sss ss ssss snes esnes 166
Music Style List...................-—ee....enenecenceracena or ennerineeeeeenence nen entaneae enero necenecaennasrean enano en 171
Rhythm Pattern LiSt..........e....—ee==——.eneoneorcarrreroennanenonocarnnmuenena racer reenaeren en reena Aenannanoenoneanona 173
Chord LiSt.……..ercensiançennnenneRnnannnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnennnnmnnnnnnennÛnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 174
Effects LiSt...…..........…ursnrerconenseneentenrernennareneanennenneannensaunAmDEnS sss sirens rears ss ssa 176
Data Disk Song List ..............e..e.e.esenenecenevccsarconeccanerenananeneneveren rene nennanecarranenecerer e trance 177
Music Files That the KR-377 Can Use................e.......esineneccce one nene een ee een 178
The KR-377 allows you to use the following music files... 178
About the KR-377 Sound Generator........................ eee RD IDO 178
| core reneane nena NTE EaCe nece rone reee eonenvannanenzuo ene cemeone ..... 179
MIDI Implementation Chart .............................vesceroreneacarcenniDon rece canene nes ecareo nace ee ene nene enene 180
Main Specifications ..............e...ecrreneneacercieercec eno ER IR ene Ree ene aeeea Dare neeanaere nene enae 181
Before You Start Playing
Connecting the Power Cord
Turning the Power On and Off
4
1. Connect the power cord that came with your KR-
377 to the AC Inlet socket on the bottom of the
unit.
2. Plug the other end of the power cord into a wall
outlet.
Raising the Music Stand
>
La
1. Gently raise the music stand, then secure it in
place as shown in the figure.
2. To collapse the stand, fold in the metal fittings
while supporting the stand with both hands and
gently fold down the stand.
Do not pull down the music stand.
Opening and Closing the Lid
Tú т
7 N |
T. When opening the KR-377's lid, grasp the lid with
both hands and gently lift it upwards, then slide
it towards the back of the piano.
2. When closing the lid, slowly pull it forward, then
gently lower it into place.
When opening and closing the lid, be careful not to let your
fingers get caught. Make sure an adult is on hand to provide
assistance when young children are playing the KR-377.
If you need to move the piano, make sure the lid is closed
first to prevent accidents.
Be sure to follow the steps below when turning the power on
or off. By turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk
causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and other
devices.
E Turning On the Power
1. Before you switch on the power, rotate the
[Volume] knob to “Min” (minimum).
Volume
(©
Mir Мах
2. Press the [Power] switch.
After a few seconds, the unit becomes operable and
playing the keyboard produces sound.
Lower position
„ИМ...
ON
This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief
interval (a few seconds) after power up is required before the
unit will operate normally.
(NOTE)
Be sure to use the supplied power cord.
E Turning Off the Power
1. Before you switch off the power, rotate the
[Volume] knob to “Min” (minimum) all the way.
2. Press the [Power] switch.
The power is switched off.
Upper position
a=
OFF
Adjusting the Sound Volume
You can adjust the overall volume level.
1. Rotate the [Volume] knob to the left or right.
The volume increases as the knob is rotated to “Max”
and decreases as the dial is rotated to “Min.”
Volume
13
wn
ma
о
=
2
|
2
=
e
MELO:
Before You Start Playing
About the Pedals
When you press the [Piano] button and play the piano (p.
42), these pedals will function as shown below.
Soft Pedal Damper Pedal
Sostenuto Pedal
Soft Pedal (the left)
This pedal is used to make the sound softer.
Playing the keyboard while the soft pedal is depressed
makes the sound softer than when played normally with the
same force. The degree of softness varies subtly with the
amount the pedal is pressed.
Sostenuto Pedal (the middle)
When this pedal is depressed, reverberations are applied
only to the keys being played at that time.
МЕМЬ
You can assign other functions to the sostenuto pedal and the
soft pedal. For more information, see “Assigning a Function
to Pad Buttons or Pedals” (p. 139).
Damper Pedal (the right)
Use this pedal when you want the sound to linger.
While the damper pedal is depressed, the sound from the
keyboard continues to linger /remain for an extended period,
even when you remove your fingers from the keys. The
length of time that the sound continues varies subtly with the
amount the pedal is pressed.
On acoustic pianos, when the damper pedal is depressed,
additional strings are released to resonate with the sound of
the keys that have been played, adding richness and breadth
to the sound. The damper pedal on the KR-377 recreates this
resonance (Sympathetic Resonance).
MEMD
You can change the amount of resonance applied with the
damper pedal. Refer to “Adjusting Resonance” (p. 135).
14
‚О
About the Adjuster
After moving the piano, or when the pedal feels
unstable, use the following procedure to readjust the
adjuster on the underside of the pedals.
J Lower the adjuster, and adjust it until it makes firm
contact with the floor surface. Leaving any gap
between the adjuster and the floor may result in
damage to the pedals when they are depressed.
Particularly on floors covered by carpets, or other
soft materials, be sure that the adjuster is firmly
pressed against the floor surface.
= ses
or "ша
Adjuster
a.
Connecting Headphones
The KR-377 features two headphone jacks. This allows two
people to listen through headphones simultaneously, making
it very useful for lessons and when performing piano pieces
for four hands. Additionally, this allows you to play without
having to worry about bothering others around you, even at
night.
Phones x 2
reed
| TÍA
N
Da, =
1. Connect the headphones to either of the Phones
jacks on the underside of the KR-377, on the left.
Sound will no longer be heard from the KR-377's
speakers. Sound will be heard only through the
headphones.
2. Adjust the headphone volume with the KR-377's
main [Volume] knob.
NEMD
Use Stereo headphones.
Some Notes on Using Headphones
* To avoid damaging or severing the headphone cord, be
sure to handle the headphones by holding the phones
themselves, and grasping the plug and not the cord
when pulling the headphone plug.
* The headphones may be damaged if the volume is too
high when they are plugged in. Connect the headphones
only after turning the volume down completely.
* To prevent possible auditory damage, loss of hearing, or © A
damage to the headphones, the headphones should not
be used at an excessively high volume. Listen at
appropriate levels.
Before You Start Playing
Connecting a Microphone
You can connect a microphone into the Mic In jack, and enjoy
karaoke with the KR-377.
Volume knob
a
msi
Mic Echo knob
>
==>" A
AS = Me
Mic In Jack
1. Connect a microphone (sold separately) to the
Mic In jack on the lower-right area of the
instrument.
2. Rotate the [Mic Echo] knob in front of the Mic In
jack to adjust the echo level.
3. Rotate the [Mic Volume] knob in front of the [Mic
Echo] knob to adjust the volume level for the
microphone.
MEMO
Consult your Roland dealer when purchasing a microphone
for use with the KR-377.
Some Notes on Using a Microphone
» Be careful of high volume levels when using mikes late
at night or early in the morning.
* When connecting a microphone to the KR-377, be sure to
lower the volume. If the volume control is too high when
the microphone is plugged in, noise may be produced by
the speakers.
* Howling could be produced depending on the location
of microphones relative to speakers. This can be
remedied by:
eChan ging the orientation of the microphone.
* Relocating microphone at a greater distance from
speakers. |
Lowering volume levels.
15
in
ge
Q
+
2
Q
EA
=
a
NO 9403939
Before You Start Playing
UU a ИонОЕИОлЕтАОАОЛОООнАОлннолиолОлАОАОААООлААООЛЕООНОНОЕАААНОНАЛОО ОА ООНАООНОООАОАОНОНОНООАОЛНАТО
Basic Operation and How to Read the Display
A variety of information is shown in the display. In addition, many
operations are performed using the display.
@ Typographic Conventions Used in this Owner's
Manual
This Owner's Manual uses the following typographic conventions to
indicate panel buttons and items appearing on the display.
Г]: This indicates a button or knob on the panel.
Example: Press the [Utility] button.
< >: Thisindicates an item appearing on the display. To choose such an
item, press the corresponding button (located below or to the side
of the item).
Example: Press <Layer> at the bottom of the display.
[-][+], < 4 >< MH > means that you should press one or the other button.
Example: Tempo [-] [+] buttons, Page <> <M>, Select < 4 > <p >
E Basic Screen
The following screen is called “Basic Screen.”
You can usually display this screen by pressing the [Exit] button several
times.
If pressing the [Exit] button doesn't display this screen, follow either of the
procedures described below to display it.
* Press the One Touch Program [ Arranger] button.
The basic screen appears and displays the settings for Automatic
Accompaniment.
* Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button or the One Touch Program
[Organ] button, and then press any one of the Tone buttons, then press
[Exit] button.
Tempo 1 Beat Measure
T= 50 ee) 'm a E
pr LE Ne
a
A nn a na a a PM
A eS rE TT EEE E PPP EEE
1 Such as the name of the song and Music Style appears.
The Tone names are selected appears.
2 Information about the manner in which the chords are played
is displayed when Automatic Accompaniment is being used.
16
Before You Start Playing
GLY ELIE
un
pr
Q
+
2
Le
=.
=
e
E How to Perform Operations Using the Screen
Changing Screen Pages-Page < 44 > < №№ >
Stule Select
ere 1446 E
Michael Michael sPop | an er |
< Preset A» Page
simon Z— =
aff
Some screens consist on two or more pages. Е
By pressing Page < 44 > and < M > at the bottom of the display you will
continue to the next page, and pressing Page < 44 > and < W > will return
you to the previous page.
Returning to the Previous Screen—The [Exit] Button
Press the [Exit] button when you wish to cancel the settings you are
currently making, or to exit the currently displayed screen.
You can usually display the Basic screen or the previous screen by pressing
the [Exit] button several times.
* You can adjust the contrast of the screen. Check out ” Adjusting the Contrast of
the Screen” (p. 148).
* The explanations in this manual include illustrations thal depict what should
typically be shown by the display. Note, however, that your unit may
incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system (e.g., includes newer
sounds), so what you actually see in the display may not always match what
appears in the manual.
17
Panel Descriptions
Power 1
о © o 000
Part Quick
9
®
a
т
© |
|
Music Style
Function Balance = Tour Orchestrator User Program Pop Acousitc Bali Fock Oldies = Country BgBans/Swing Latin Waltz March/Kids
Volume Brilliance Reverb Balance O O O O O O O © © ©
, + User .
O) С) 0) © Advanced 30 Untihty 1 2 - + To Vanation To Original Sync kitro Court Dawn
Min Mar TAgutiron Ergin har LT Aero Hagçlcsares J U J U u Ll u U U
Tempo Fill in Flega! Ending |
66 $
1 [Power] Switch
Pressed to switch the power on and off (p. 13).
2 [Volume] Knob
Adjusts the overall volume level (p. 13).
3 [Brilliance] Knob
Adjusts the tone brightness (p. 52).
4 [Reverb] Knob
Adjusts the amount of reverb (p. 52).
5 [Balance] Knob
Changes the volume balance for sounds played with the
keyboard and for songs and accompaniments (p. 75).
6 [Function] Button
Selects a variety of play-related functions (p. 146-p. 149).
7 [Part Balance] Button
Use this button to adjust the relative volumes of each of the
parts played in the Automatic Accompaniment, the
percussion or effects sounds played with the keyboard, and
the tones played with the keys (p. 75).
8 [Quick Tour] Button
Press this to hear a demo song of the build-in Tones and
Music Styles and to view the KR-377's main features in the
display (p. 21).
9 [Advanced 3D] Button
When performing along with the automatic accompaniment
or the internal songs, you can add three-dimensional breadth
(p. 33, p. 53).
10 [Utility] Button
Select convenient functions such as a note-guessing game,
automatic accompaniment, recording, playback, and sound
search.
18
о © 66
11 [Style Orchestrator/User] Button
®
Switch the function of the Pad buttons.
Used to change the arrangement type for automatic
accompaniment with the Pad buttons (p. 71), and used to
assign a variety of functions to the Pad buttons (p. 139).
12 Pad Buttons
There are two Pad buttons: Pad {1] and Pad [2].
The operation of each is changed using [Style Orchestrator/
User] button. (p. 71, p. 139)
13 [User Program] Button
Stores the selected functions and states of the buttons. It can
also call up settings that have been stored (p. 131).
14 Music Style Buttons
Selects a internal Music Style (p. 30, p. 63).
15 Tempo [-] [+] Buttons
Adjust the tempo (p. 28, p. 56, p. 66, p. 82).
Press the |-] and [+] buttons at the same time to return to the
basic tempo.
16 Fill In
[To Variation] Button
Inserts a fill-in in an automatic accompaniment and changes
to the Variation accompaniment pattern (p. 70).
|To Original] Button
Inserts a fill-in in an automatic accompaniment and changes
to the Original accompaniment pattern (p. 70).
Panel Descriptions
o
| >
| }
Jona
Trad | Disk /User E (C7 CI Рапо EPiano Organ Guitar/Bass Strings Sax Brass Voice
Melody
Start Score Piano Organ Arranger Drums/SFX Intelligence
у U U u
Clee OO CA O 0 J
Stop | Matronome | iy One Touch Program |
à 6 #6
17 {Sync/Reset] Button
This setting simultaneously starts the Automatic
Accompaniment when any key in the left side of the
kevboard is played (p. 67).
Additionally, by pressing this button while Automatic
Accompaniment is being played, vou can restart with the
accompaniment synchronized (p. 68).
18 Intro/Ending Button
Play an intro or ending during automatic accompaniment
(p. 67).
19 [Count Down] Button
Lets you know the end of intro with counts down (p. 69).
20 [Start/Stop] Button
Starts and stops automatic accompaniment (p. 67).
21 [Disk/User] Button
Selects a Style on the floppy disk (p. 64), or to choose a User
Style that you've made yourself (p. 126).
22 [Help] Button
Displays on-screen explanations of features (p. 23).
23 [Score] Button
Displays scores of Music files and your recordings (p. 79).
24 [Metronome] Button
Activates the built-in metronome. And you can change the
metronome settings (p. 28, p. 56).
25 Beat Indicator
This lights up in correspondence with the beat of the selected
song or accompaniment.
Г $ 65
26 Display
Displays various information relating to the current
operation (p. 16).
27 [Exit] Button
Returns you to the previous screen or makes the selected
function end.
28 One Touch Program
[Piano] Button
Changes the keyboard to a piano sound and makes the
optimal settings for a piano performance (p. 24, p. 42).
[Organ] Button
Changes the keyboard to an organ sound and makes the
optimal settings for an organ performance (p. 25, p. 43).
[Arranger] Button
Makes the optimal settings for playing with automatic
accompaniment (p. 30, p. 63).
29 [Drums/SFX] Button
Changes the keyboard to play percussion and effect sounds
(p. 44).
30 [Melody Intelligence] Button
Adds harmony to the sounds played with the keyboard
(р. 73).
31 Tone Buttons
Selects the kinds of sounds (Tone groups) played by the
kevboard (p. 26, p. 46).
19
Panel Descriptions
о!--@
© 060066 ©
Hhylhm Whole Bass/Accome Lower Upper |
R 1 2 3 4
pa я = ® В — Marker
U U U
Reset Stop Play Rac Вис Fwd Count In
200000 6
32 [Menu] Button
You can use this to choose recording and editing functions.
33 Track Buttons
Used to play back individual instrument parts of a song or to
record your own performances (p. 85, p. 91).
34 [Song] Button
Used to select a song (p. 77).
35 [Disk] Button
This can be used to make settings for the disk, such as saving
a recorded song on floppy disk.
36 Reset [ « | Button
Sets the position from which playback will begin to the start
of the song.
37 Stop[ m ] Button
Pressed to stop playback or recording.
38 Play[ » ] Button
Starts playback or recording for a song.
39 Rec[ @ ] Button
Puts the keyboard in record standby mode.
40 Bwd [ <<! Button
Rewinds the song.
41 Fwd [ »» | Button
Fast-forwards the song.
42 [Marker/Count In] Button
Places a marker in a song to mark the spot where playback
starts (p. 86).
You can also use it to sound an audible count before playing
back a song (p. 84).
20
|
J SMF
ne < 1YRICS
43 Disk Drive
You can insert a floppy disk for playing back or saving songs
(p- 38, p. 104).
44 Eject Button
Pressed to eject a floppy disk from the disk drive (p. 38).
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
Watching the Introductory KR-377 Demo
(Quick Tour)
Here you can hear the sound of the KR337's instruments, listen to demo
songs that use various Music Styles (accompaniment styles in a variety of
musical genres), and view screens that introduce features of the KR-377's
sounds and keyboard.
Press the [Quick Tour] button.
A Quick Tour screen like the one shown below appears.
Auto | Sound a Voice POS Features CJ
ooo. =. D
Press < 44 > or <p > at the upper left area of the display to
switch screens, then choose a demo.
Indication
Description
Sound
Explanation of the KR-377's piano sounds
Stereo 64 Voice
Explanation of polyphony
Explanation of the KR-377's keyboard (Progressive
Keyboard Hammer Action)
Features Introduction of the main functions
Tones Demo performance of the internal sounds
Styles Demo performance of the internal Music Styles
Press the button below the demo that you wish to see.
The demo will begin.
When you press <Auto> located at the left of the display, the “Sound,”
“Stereo 64 Voice,” “Keyboard,” and “Features” demos will be repeated
automatically.
Follow the instructions that appear in the screen.
You can proceed to the next screen by selecting the < » > button at the right
of the display.
To end the demo, press the [Exit] button.
Press the [Exit] button several times to return to the previous screen.
MEMP
For information on Music
Styles, take a look at the
“Music Style List” (p. 171).
EP
For a complete list of tone
names, please refer to the
“Tone List” (p. 162).
21
Q
0
+
3
zo
x3
oC
DE
Cd wee
NZ
“No
>
3
=
=
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
Playing the Games
The KR-377 also offers games that can help you improve your grasp of notes
and chords.
f N
1
506 5 60006 00
(TIC ССР С)
\. J
le Press the [Utility] button.
The Utility screen appears.
Utility |
2. Press <Games> at the bottom of the display.
If <Games> doesn’t appear on screen, press < «4 > <p > at the upper left
and upper right of the display to switch screens.
3. Press the button at the bottom of the display to select a game.
Choose the game wou want to play.
о ТГ o
es Guess Guess Chord
JJ y Note | | Chord | [Practice O
(Joocoo [] CO
Game Description
Guess Note You'll hear a single piano note. Try to play the same
note on the keyboard.
Guess Chord You'll hear a chord. Try to play the same chord on the
keyboard.
Chord Practice The name of a chord is displayed. Try to play the chord
on the keyboard.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed with the game.
5. When you're done the game, press the [Exit] button.
Press the [Exit] button several times to return to the previous screen.
22
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
Using the [Help] Button
The KR-377 features a Help function. You can display the explanation of
functions on the screen.
©
®
=,
=
zu
о >
A JL
a
RE
NE
чо
te
3
pt
="
When you are not sure how to proceed, use the Help function.
e Press the [Help] button, getting the indicator to light.
The following screen will appear.
Press "2/4" to scroll the screen, à |
J and press, [Exit] to return ta the
previous text.
C7 Use "<< Select >> ” to select an
| «€ Select > Menu Jum
Doocs DO OJ
Press < 4 > at the right of the display to scroll the explanation downward, -
or press < 4 > to return upward.
2. When you press <Menu> located at the bottom of the
display, a list of the explanations will appear.
(3 - Hdding three-dimensional
apaciousness 10 The sound
(9 - Listening to music data
L 4 Select » Menu Jum
(DJoooo О
You can view a detailed explanation of the underlined words or phrases.
Je Use Select < 4 > < b > located at the bottom of the display to
select the item that you wish to see.
Press < 4 > at the right of the display to scroll the explanation downward,
or press < 4 > to return upward.
4. Press <Jump> located at the bottom of the display.
An explanation for the selected item will appear.
De Toexitthe Help function, press the [Help] button,
extinguishing its indicator.
You can also return to the previous screen by pressing the [Exit] button
several times.
23
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
—Start playing the piano
Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano
(One-touch Piano)
You can make the optimal settings for a piano performance with the press
of a single button.
f N
J UE sa ms mans re raro To mane a eo ae EW m e To i a Cer 5 =
соо о O OOOOOOOO0OO00O0 O с | ПЕ о OOOGO © ©
COICO CIC CHAU wera 5 5 © о LI TTT TT 10]
A J
e Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
A Piano screen like the one shown below appears.
J=120 4/4 М: 1
+ J
+ = un
Нанте
(390000 (7) (7 a J) =
Settings are made for the following situations.
* When the keyboard has been split into upper and lower sections (p. 49),
this returns the keyboard to a single section.
* The functioning of the pedals returns the pedals to their usual functions
(p. 14).
* The Grand Piano sound is selected.
* The cffect is set to “Sympathetic Resonance.”
Changing the Piano Sound
1. Press< f | >< + > at the left of the display.
The amount by which the piano's top is opened changes, and the sound also
changes.
This simulates the sound reflections that occur when the lid of a grand piano
15 open.
24
You can change settings
related to the piano
performance by pressing
<Customize> at the bottom
of the display. For details,
refer to “Changing the
Settings for One-touch
Piano” (p. 134).
Since this instrument
faithfully reproduces real
acoustic piano action and
response, sounds in the top
one-and-one-half-octave
range continue to play,
regardless of the damper
pedal action, and the tone
in this range is audibly
different. The Key
Transpose setting (p. 89)
can also be used to change
the range that is unaffected
by the damper pedal.
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
Playing the Keyboard Like an Organ
(One-touch Organ)
You can make the optimal settings for an organ performance with the press
Q
m
=
+
=
Tr
Se
|
La ==*
NE
“o
[ой
3
ond
=
of a single button.
1. Press the One Touch Program [Organ] button.
An Organ screen like the one shown below appears.
J Choosing “Jazz Organ”
makes the keyboard divide
< Туре LJ into right- and left-hand
sections and play different
(Joooo (J CJ) O tones on the two sections.
В - This division of the
2. Press Type < 4 > and < > at the bottom of the screen to keyboard into a right-hand
choose the organ type. section and a left-hand
section is called a “Split.” If
You can select any of four types of organ. you want to know more,
* Jazz Organ take a look at “Playing
* Church Organ Different Tones with the
Left and Right Hands (Split
e Theater Organ Play)” (p. 49)
* Classic Organ
E Changing the Rotary Effect NEMD
” You can change the settings
The “Jazz Organ” sound has a rotary effect added to it. ES 5
- for an organ performance
Applying a rotary effect to the organ sound provides the same undulations
by pressing <Options> at
you get with rotating speakers. You can vary the speed at which the the bottom of the display.
speakers rotate. Also, when you've selected
Jazz Organ, you can press
1 ® Press < a > at the left of the display. <Footage> at the right of
Each time you press the button, SE] and Ea in the display will change. the display to create the
sound you want. For more
When 52] is displayed, the speed of rotation is fast. When :E2 is information, take a look at
displayed, the speed of rotation is slow. “Changing the Settings for
One-touch Organ” (p. 141).
25
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
Playing a Wide Variety of Instrument
Sounds
The KR-377 comes with a large number of built-in instrument sounds and
effects. Enjoy performing with this superb collection of sounds, designed to
accommodate almost any imaginable musical genre. The various onboard
sounds are called “Tones.”
The tones are divided into eight separate groups, each assigned to the Tone
buttons.
4.
Press one of the Tone buttons to choose a Tone Group.
The screen shows four of the Tones included in the chosen Tone Group.
Whole Mode Tone :
Bright “Piano |
Ballad Piano 23) a Rock Ptano
Options _ Audition « Page »
((Joooo []
You can switch screens by pressing Page < 44 > <b> at the
bottom of the display.
Press the button next to the Tone you want to play.
You can listen to a typical phrase for the Tone by pressing <Audition> at the
bottom of the display.
The Tone you've selected is heard when you finger the keyboard.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the basic screen.
Try choosing and playing a variety of different tones.
About <EX> Tone
26
These are tones that Roland recommends you use in order to enjoy
enhanced expressive capabilities.
Some of the EX Tones change according to the force with which the keys are
played (velocity).
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
Handy Features for Selecting Tones
(Tone Finder)
“Tone Finder” lets you use a handy features when selecting tones.
©
q
=
=
0
о >
AQ
; =
G8.
NEES
~
|+
3
fr
="
1. Press the [Utility] button.
The Utility screen appears.
Tone Firder : Chord Finder 3
>
(3 0000 Oo OD J)
If <Tone Finder> doesn’t appear on screen, press < 44 > < i > at the upper
left and upper right of the display to switch screens.
N
Press <Tone Finder> at the bottom of the display.
3. Press the button at the bottom of the display to select a
function.
Display Description
‚| You can select tones just by selecting icons for the sug-
Check It Out! gested tones, or combination of tones, displayed on the
screen.
After selecting the type of musical instrument and
Find Suitable musical genre, you can then find tones that will sound
good with your selections.
Allows searching of tones using the first letter of the
Index
tone name.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to select tones.
5. When you're done the function, press the [Exit] button.
Press the [Exit] button several times to return to the previous screen.
27
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
Sounding the Metronome
The KR-377 features a built-in metronome. You can turn the metronome
sound on and off with the press of a single button.
When turned on during playback of a song, or during a performance with
Automatic Accompaniment, the metronome sounds to the tempo and beat
of the song in progress.
Adjusting the tempo | |
550 © 6155666666
1 e Press the [Metronome] button to sound the metronome.
The Metronome screen appears.
an
2. Press the [Metronome] button again, and the metronome
will stop sounding.
3. Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen.
HB Adjusting the Tempo
You can adjust the tempo of the metronome. The tempo of the metronome
changes automatically if you use an Automatic Accompaniment or play
back a song.
1. Usethe Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to change the tempo.
| The tempo of the Metronome can be set within the range of 20 to 250.
The setting is at “120” when the piano is powered up.
You can return to the original tempo for a Music Style (p. 60) or a song by
pressing [-] and [+] at the same time.
E Changing the Beat of Metronome
1. From the Metronome screen, press < 4 > < 4 > at the right of
the screen to set the beat.
The beat displayed in the upper portion of the screen will change.
Available beat settings:
2/2, 0/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4, 7/4, 3/8, 6/8, 9/8, 12/8
28
When the Metronome
screen is displayed, you
can change the volume and
the beat. For more
information, see “Sounding
the Metronome” (p. 56).
MEMD
You can change the
animation by pressing the
button under Le Ka]
When you turn on the
power, “Metronome” is
displayed.
MEMD
о
When «& is selected,
only the upbeat will sound.
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
—Try playing using Automatic Accompaniment
Enjoying Automatic Accompaniment with
Ease (EZ Arranger)
@
Le;
+
|
A
ir
3
ol
| 4
N23
Do
fo
3
Lasa
-
Next, try playing using Automatic Accompaniment.
Automatic Accompanimentis a feature that creates an accompaniment
matched to the chords you specify with the left hand, making the
performance more impressive and enjoyable.
To use Automatic Accompaniment, you need to press some buttons and
make the settings for Automatic Accompaniment, but EZ Arranger lets you
use Automatic Accompaniment just by answering some on-screen
questions. You can also play chords automatically.
бест М + Tr id drt
1. Press the [Utility] button.
The Utility screen appears.
Utility
(Joooo
2. Press the <EZ Arranger> button at the bottom of the display.
If <EZ Arranger> doesn’t appear on screen, press < 44 > < pp > at the upper
left and upper right of the display to switch screens.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions, and answer the questions.
You can proceed to the next screen by selecting the < ¢ > button at the right
of the display. When you've answered all the questions, you can start
playing with Automatic Accompaniment right away.
Use the keyboard to try out a variety of methods of play.
You can play chords automatically
When specifying the chords you rself in a performance, specify the chords in
the left part of the keyboard, as illustrated below.
4. Press [Exit] to end the EZ Arranger.
You are returned to the Utility screen.
Spit Point ( F#3)
|
Y
The range specifyed a chord
29
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
Playing with an Automatic
Accompaniment (One-touch Arranger)
You can make the optimal settings for playing Automatic Accompaniment
with just a single press of the One Touch Program [Arranger] button. You
can completely alter the ambience of the performance by changing the
Music Style.
NEMD
For more information,
check out “Chapter 2
Automatic
Accompaniment” (p. 60).
Ш Let's Try Playing, “Little Brown Jug”
1.
2,
30
Now, let's try playing “Little Brown Jug” (you can see the score on page 32)
using Automatic Accompaniment.
In this example we'll play the song with the “Swing'in” Music Style.
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
— Sn ; NO
LJ AE o
{Joocoo [] (7 С) m a
Press the [Big Band/Swing] Music Style button.
The following screen appears.
A Cappella
4 Preset Ab»
(Joooo [] (CI
Use Page < 4 > < pp > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens, then press the button next to <Swing'in>.
Press the [Exit] button.
You are returned to the previous screen.
Use the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the tempo of the
accompaniment.
You can return to the original tempo for the selected style by pressing the
{-] and |+] buttons at the same time.
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
Finger the “C” key in the following figure to start play.
When you play the keyboard, first an intro of 8 measures is played.
Play the right-hand and left-hand parts of the score (p. 32) on the keyboard.
There's no need to hold down the key with the left hand, so you can get
ready to finger the next one.
=
1
|
ED ,
G
Press the Fill In [To Variation] button with the timing on the
РЗ
score.
The accompaniment pattern changes.
Pressing the [To Original] button returns you to the original accompaniment
pattern. Once you've familiarized yourself with the performance, try
varying the timing for the accompaniment pattern as you like.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button with the timing on the score.
After the ending plays, the accompaniment stops.
31
G>
D
+
=
A
о >
же
55
[A
Ni
“o
a
3
hana
=
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
Little Brown Jug
Play the C Key on the
+ keyboard.
||| im ниссан
— = о
Lot В
©
=
<
=
emma ант -
*
Ce
al
Qi
Ql]
3
Rill mi
nN
С Е G С
A , || |
4 0 du | E ere 1 | À ]
T= |
a” | |
Press the Fill In [To Variation] to change
the Accompaniment Pattern.
C F G С
Ñ } i |
1 > | | ! \ ] I 1 в O-——— # ——— |
| ] o © | a a a | | I nod | | |
e | i |
< нано
-, РР
— пана
Е G С
+ {р | | | | ; В
% a
= £ — a n— 49 A e .— + — Y e—
x 1 hi i 1 | 1 | | - Н
Press the [Intro/Ending]
to sound the Ending.
МАН
32
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
Effects Adding Three-Dimensional Breadth to
Your Performances (Advanced 3D)
When performing along with the Automatic Accompaniment or the internal
songs, you can add three-dimensional breadth to the accompaniment
Q
tm
=
=
=a
o B
e
* Q
сэ 3,
NE
a
9.
<,
pr
oe e
sounds.
It also provides the pleasant effect of “wrapping” your performance within
the accompaniment.
1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
2. Press the [Advanced 3D] button.
The Advanced 3D screen appears.
When you play in the left part of the keyboard, the automatic
accompaniment starts. Let's try out the Advanced 3D effect.
When set to On, three-dimensional breadth is added to the sound of the
selected accompaniment part.
4. Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen with
the Advanced 3D still in effect.
9. Press the [Advanced 3D] button once more, extinguishing
the button’s indicator, to eliminate the effect.
The Advanced 3D effect is removed from all parts.
33
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
—Try recording
Recording Your Playing With Ease
(EZ Recorder)
The KR-377 has an “EZ Recorder” function that makes it easy to record;
simply follow the directions in the screen.
yr
1
6 516
N
1.
и
34
Press the [Utility] button.
The Utility screen appears.
(7 0000
Press <EZ Recorder> at the bottom of the display.
If <EZ Recorder> doesn't appear on screen, press < “> > < > at the upper
left and upper right of the display to switch screens.
Follow the on-screen explanations to make the settings for
the tone, beat, and tempo.
You can proceed to the next screen by selecting the < w > button at the right
of the display.
Follow the on-screen instructions to record the performance.
Press [Exit] to end the EZ Arranger.
NEMD
You can save the recorded
song on a floppy disk.
Have an empty, formatted
floppy disk.
For more about formatting,
take a look at “Formatting
Floppy Disks (Format)” (p.
104).
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
Lu
Recording a Performance o
=
In this section, we'll record a performance for “Little Brown Jug” on p. 32. Е
{D
x
\ №:
7 1 | BH
e
=== = итого в <.
6 66566 d6 =
(TITI
A
Get Ready to Record
1. Press the [Song] button.
A Song screen like the one below appears.
: Sons List
CJ
Press <0: > at the left of the display, get <0: New Song> to
If a song is recorded in the
appear in the display. internal memory, the
If <0: > doesn’t appear on screen, press Page < 44 > < pp > at the bottom of message SCreen appears
the display to switch screens. | Co |. when you try to choose a
song.
Get Ready to Play Refer to “8 When the
Following Screen Is
3. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button. Displayed” (p. 36).
4. Press the Music Style button and the button next to the
display to choose the Music Style you want to play.
When playing “Little Brown Jug” (p. 32), press the [Big Band /Swing] button
to choose <Swing'in>.
и
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen.
6. Usethe Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the tempo of the
accompaniment.
Start Recording
7. Press the Rec [ @ ] button.
The Play [ » ] button’s indicator begin blinking, and the unit will be ready
for recording.
To stop recording, press the Stop [ m | button.
35
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
8. Play the first chord on the left-hand section of the keyboard.
An intro of Automatic accompaniment starts, and recording is started at the
same time.
Now begin playing.
HY
> U TA
\ Л
Stop Recording
9. Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
An ending is played, then the Automatic Accompaniment stops, and
recording is stopped at the same time.
® When the Following Screen Is Displayed
If a song is recorded in the internal memory, the screen shown below
appears when you try to choose a song.
NDA EF. =.í.. AE A So Corky E
Delete Song ОК?
Are you sure ?
OK
If you don’t want to erase the song
Press <Cancel> at the bottom of the display.
Save the song on a floppy disk.
For information on how to save your song, see “Saving Songs to Floppy
Disks” (p. 104).
Erasing a song
Press <OK> at the bottom of the display.
The recorded performance or song whose settings have been changed is
erased.
36
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
Listening to the Recorded Performance
©
®
=
3
Now listen to the performance you have recorded. = ©
о
a ar
|
E
NS
Q
- = = z
reve on rom ween Tom mel am fea eae mene сш Se ae EE o o pu
955 5 w 5555508050055 8 [|= я
ET CIO CI CIO LEDO o: 5 66 6 o
Na.
1. Press the Reset [ 1«] button. NOTE
Now you can play back the song from the beginning.
Any performance that has
2 e Press the Pl ay [ > ] button. been recorded is deleted
when the power to the KR-
The recorded performance is played back. 377 is turned off. If you
don't want to lo:
3. Press the Stop [ m | button. VOD LOT O mero
recorded performance,
Playback stops. save it on a floppy disk. For
information on how to save
your song, see “Saving
Songs to Floppy Disks” (p.
104).
If there's a recorded
performance in the KR-
377's internal memory, you
can't play back another
song. Check out “Erasing a
Recorded Song” (p. 97).
37
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
—Try to use Music Files
Using the Disk Drive
Here's where you can know how to use the disk drive to listen to
commercially available music files.
Youcanalso listen to KR-377 performance data saved on a floppy disk in the
same way.
E Inserting and Ejecting a Floppy Disk
a \
Disk Drive
EA ee Eo Aa a am E Се EE
666566 6 IN || = 55606666 6 56656 66
13 0 osos al (MO EH S
ha
1. Hold the floppy disk face up, and push it into the disk drive
until it clicks into place.
The disk drive is on the right side of the unit, above the keyboard.
| ===
Indicator
Eject Button
де
Floppy Disk
2. To removea disk, press the Eject button.
The end of the floppy disk comes out of the slot. Gently grasp the end of the
floppy disk and pull it out.
38
If youre using the disk
drive for the first time, be
sure to read the important
notes on p. 6.
Don't try to eject the disk
while reading or writing is
in progress. Attempting to
do so may damage the
magnetic surface of the
disk, rendering it unusable.
(The indicator light for the
disk drive lights up at full
brightness when reading or
writing data. Ordinally, the
indicator will be less
brightly lighted, or be
extinguished.)
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
Listening to Music Files
Here's where you can know how to use the disk drive to listen to
commercially available Music Files or a song on the Data Disk (p. 177)
included with the KR-377.
Em Playing the Song with Ease (EZ Player)
By using “EZ Player,” you can play back song data such as music data as
easily as operating a CD player.
MEMD
To learn more about Music
Files, refer to “Music Files
That the KR-377 Can Use”
(p.178).
PETE
‘ей
Pe en tree
5
Ear
1. Press the [Utility] button.
The Utility screen appears.
| Xu
Dames EXfrrangerEZ Fecarder; а ЧЕН
{_) 0000
2. Press <EZ Player> at the bottom of the display.
If <EZ Player> doesn’t appear on screen, press < 44 > < pp > at the upper left
and upper right of the display to switch screens.
3. Press the button at the bottom of the display to listen to the
songs.
Button Description
Selects the previous song. If you press this button while a
a song is playing, you will play back the previous song.
m Stops playback.
> Starts playback.
>» Selects the next song. If you press this button while a song is
playing, you will play back the next song.
4. Press the [Exit] button to end the EZ Player.
Press the [Exit] button several times to return to the previous screen.
If you're using the disk
drive for the first time, be
sure to read the important
notes on p. 6.
NEMD
If a song is recorded in the
internal memory, the
message screen appears
when you try to choose a
song.
Refer to “@® When the
Following Screen Is
Displayed” (p. 40).
МЕМЬ
You can view some
information about the
selected song by pressing
<info> at the bottom of the
Song screen.
For more about the Song
screen, refer to “Playing
Back Songs for Practice” (p.
77).
39
Q
Ly"
+
=
= @
® >
z
PE
(3 =
NE
чо
2.
z
=
=
Getting Acquainted with the KR-377
® When the Following Screen Is Displayed
If a song is recorded in the internal memory, the screen shown below
appears when you try to choose a song.
res
Ro - e...
Delete Song OK?
Are vou sure ?
If you don’t want to erase the song
Press <Cancel> at the bottom of the display.
Save the song on a floppy disk.
For information on how to save your song, see “Saving Songs to Floppy
Disks” (p. 104).
Erasing a song
Press <OK> at the bottom of the display.
The recorded performance or song whose settings have been changed is
erased.
40
Using the KR-377 as a Karaoke Machine
You can connect a microphone into the Mic jack, and enjoy karacke with the MEMD
KR-377.
Karaoke music files must
E Connecting a Microphone be purchased separately.
Check out “Music Files
That the KR-377 Can Use”
The Mic jack is located at the right of the bottom panel of the KR-377. (p. 178).
©
4
=F,
|
= ©
=,
AL
A
[A
Ni
чо
2
<
=
=
You can hook up a microphone to the KR-377.
Volume knob
|
A Mic Echo knob
A >
T=
If you're using a
Mic In Jack microphone for the first
Adjust the volume level for the microphone with the Microphone [Volume] time, be sure to read
knob, next to the Mic jack. о
Use the Microphone [Echo] knob to adjust the echo level for the fa |
microphone. ; a a
“Connecting a
Microphone” (p. 15).
N Enjoying Karaoke Performances Consult your Roland dealer
when purchasing a
1. Connect the microphone and adjust the volume and echo. microphone for use with
the KR-377.
2. Insert the floppy disk that contains music files into the disk
drive.
Refer to “Inserting and Ejecting a Floppy Disk” (p. 38).
Je Press the [Song] button.
4, Press the button next to the display to select a song.
5. If you need to, use the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to adjust
the tempo.
6. ин necessary, change the key of the song (p. 90).
7. Press the Play [ » ] button to play the song accompaniment. МЕМФ
Now, start singing! You can hide lyrics, if you
When you play back a Music File with lyrics, the lyrics appear on screen. like. Take a look at “Hiding
the On-screen Lyrics” (p.
8. Press the Stop [ m] button to stop playback of the song. 148).
41
Chapter 1 Playing the Keyboard
Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano
(One-touch Piano)
You can make the optimal settings for a piano performance with the press
of a single button.
Piano Organ
Touch Program
Arranger Drums/SFX
| |
Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
A Piano screen like the one shown below appears.
J=120 4/4 M: 1
+
+
45 © _
E € COS OO
: Male
m
Settings are made for the following situations.
* When the keyboard has been split into upper and lower sections (p. 49),
this returns the keyboard to a single section.
* The functioning of the pedals returns the pedals to their usual functions
(p. 14).
* The Grand Piano sound is selected.
* The effect is set to “Sympathetic Resonance.”
Changing the Piano Sound
1.
42
Press < + >< +| > at the left of the display.
The amount by which the piano’s top is opened changes, and the sound also
changes.
This simulates the sound reflections that occur when the lid of a grand piano
is open.
МЕМЬ
You can change settings
related to the piano
performance by pressing
<Customize> at the bottom
of the display. For details,
refer to “Adjusting
Resonance” (p. 135).
MEMP
Since this instrument
faithfully reproduces real
acoustic piano action and
response, sounds in the top
one-and-one-half-octave
range continue to play,
regardless of the damper
pedal action, and the tone
in this range is audibly
different. The Key
Transpose setting (p. 89)
can also be used to change
the range that is unaffected
by the damper pedal.
Chapter 1 Playing the Keyboard
Playing the Keyboard Like an Organ
(One-touch Organ)
1.
You can make the optimal settings for an organ performance with the press
of a single button.
Piano Organ Arranger Drums/SFX
| | (1 |
| | |
One Ta Jar |
Press the One Touch Program [Organ] button.
An Organ screen like the one shown below appears.
Options
Press Type < 4 > <> > to choose the organ type.
You can select any of four types of organ.
* Jazz Organ
* Church Organ
* Theater Organ
* Classic Organ
Changing the Rotary Effect
The “Jazz Organ” sound has a rotary effect added to it.
Applying a rotary effect to the organ sound gives the same undulations you
get with rotating speakers. You can vary the speed with which the speakers
rotate.
Press < “| > at the left of the display.
Each time you press the button, SE2] and += in the display will change.
When “E is displayed, the speed of rotation is fast. When +] is
displayed, the speed of rotation is slow.
МЕМЬ
Choosing “Jazz Organ”
makes the keyboard divide
into right- and left-hand
sections and play different
tones on the two sections.
This division of the
keyboard into a right-hand
section and a left-hand
section is called a “Split.” If
you want to know more,
take a look at “Playing
Different Tones with the
Left and Right Hands (Split
Play)” (p. 49).
MEMD
You can change the settings
for an organ performance
by pressing <Options> at
the bottom of the display.
Also, when you've selected
Jazz Organ, you can press
<Footage> to create the
sound you want. For more
information, take a look at
“Changing the Settings for
One-touch Organ” (p. 141).
43
Chapter 1 Playing the Keyboard
Playing Drum Sounds
44
You can use the keyboard to play percussion sounds or effects such as sirens
and animal sounds.
Piano Organ Arranger Drums/SFX
| U
One Touch Program
Press the [Drums/SFX] button.
The buttor's indicator lights up, and the Drum screen appears.
When you finger the keyboard now, each key plays a different percussion-
instrument sound.
Press Type < 4> <p > at the bottom of the display to change
the type of drum set.
The drum set appears in the middle of the screen.
Sets of percussion sounds, such as “STANDARD,” are called “Drum Sets.”
Each drum set contains a wide variety of percussive instrument sounds and
sound effects, and each key plays a different sound.
Press the [Drum/SFX] button once again to return to the
previous sound.
The button’s indicator is extinguished, and you are returned to the previous
screen.
The sound played with the keyboard reverts to the instrument sound used
before the [Drums /SFX] button was pressed.
MEM
The combination of sounds
assigned to the keyboard
varies according to the
drum set, Take a look at the
“Drum/SFX Set List” (p.
166).
Chapter 1 Playing the Keyboard
E Playing Effect Sounds
2.
Press the [Drums/SFX] button.
The button's indicator lights up, and the Drum screen appears.
Press <SFX> at the bottom of the display.
The following screen is called up.
When you finger the keyboard now, each key plays a different effect sound.
A set of effect sounds is called an “SFX set.”
Pressing <Drums> at the bottom of the screen displays the Drum screen and
makes it so that percussion instruments are sounded.
Press the [Drum/SFX] button once again to return to the
previous sound.
NEMD
For details of the sounds
included in the SEX set,
refer to “Drum/SFX Set
List” (p. 166).
The button’s indicator is extinguished, and you are returned to the previous |
screen. |
The sound played with the keyboard reverts to the instrument sound used
before the [Drums/SFX] button was pressed.
45
Chapter 1 Playing the Keyboard
Playing a Wide Variety of Instrument
Sounds
3.
The KR-377 comes with a large number of built-in instrument sounds and
effects. This lets you enjoy performances with sounds matched to a wide
range of musical genres. The various types of built-in sounds are called
“Tones.” The tones are divided into eight separate groups, each assigned to
one of the eight Tone buttons.
The buttons shown below are called the Tone buttons.
Piano E.Piano Organ Guitar/Bass Strings - e та Brass Voice
66666666
Press one of the Tone buttons to choose a Tone Group.
The pressed Tone button's indicator will light,
The screen shows four of the Tones included in the chosen Tone Group.
em Piano =
Options _ Audition
This screen is called the “Tone Selection” screen,
Press the button next to the display to select a Tone.
When you use Page < 44 > < pp > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens, other Tones will be displayed.
The Tone you've selected is heard when you finger the keyboard. Also, this
is the Tone that you'll hear the next time you choose this Tone button.
You can audition tones by listening to a typical phrase for the Tone by
pressing <Audition> at the bottom of the display.
Press the [Exit] button.
You are returned to the previous screen.
About <EX> Tone
46
These are tones that Roland recommends you use in order to enjoy
enhanced expressive capabilities.
Some of the EX Tones change according to the force with which the keys are
played (velocity).
МЕМЬ
By pressing <Options>
located at the bottom of the
display in the Tone
Selection screen, you can
apply effects to the sound
and make other settings.
For details, refer to
“Applying Effects to the
Sound (Effects)” (p. 55).
NEMD
For more about the names
of Tones, take a look at the
“Tone List” (p. 162).
Chapter 1 Playing the Keyboard
Combining the Sounds of Two
Instruments (Layer Play)
You can play two different sounds from a single key at the same time. This
method of performance is called “Layer Play.” For instance, it's possible to
play the Tones for both Piano and Strings in combination.
| Grand Piano 1 |
| Strings |
1. From the basic screen, press <Layer> at the bottom of the
display. NEMD
Basic Screen (p. 16)
=120 Cool A) 4/4 M: |
Split Lauer
The screen changes as shown below.
The Tone name appears at the lower-right area of the screen. This Tone is
called “Layer Tone.” MEMD
When you finger the keyboard, the sound you chose in step 1 is combined |
” ° You can adjust the volume
with the layer tone. level for each of the Tones.
2 To cancel Laver Pla ress <Laver> once again For instructions, see
e y YP y Ban “Adjusting the Volume of
When you finger the keyboard, only the sound displayed at the upper-right Each Performance Part” (p.
area of the screen is played. 75).
47
Chapter 1 Playing the Keyboard
To Change Tones
1. Press the button located beside the name of the Tone you
wish to change.
The selected Tone will be highlighted.
(Oeoeo (J CJ OO OJ
2. Press a Tone button.
The Tone Selection screen appears.
3. Use Page < w ><» > at the bottom of the display to switch - |
screens, and use the buttons located beside the display tc to a
select Tones.
4. Press the [Exit] button.
The previous screen appears.
When you finger the keyboard, the selected Tone and the other Tone are
played. о |
48
МЕМЬ
If Layer Play is turned on,
you can press <Options>
- located at the bottom of the
Tone Selection screen to
change the pitch of the
keyboard sound in octave
units. To learn more, see
“Shifting the Keyboard
Pitch in Octave Steps
(Octave Shift)” (p. 51).
Chapter 1 Playing the Keyboard
Playing Different Tones with the Left
and Right Hands (Split Play)
The Split feature allows you to split the keyboard into two zones, then play
a different sound in each zone.
Such a division of the keyboard into right- and left-hand sections is called a
rr
“Split,” and the key where the division takes place is called the “Split Point.
the keyboard is turned on, the split point is reset to “F#3.”
Split Point
Grand Piano 1 |
« Switching to Split Play directly from Layer Play
Split Point
BEI | Bass Grand Piano | |
| Strings }
From the basic screen, press <Split> at the bottom of the
display.
The tone in the right-hand part is the tone displayed on the upper right part
of the screen, and the tone in the lower part is the tone displayed on the
upper left part of the screen.
The tone in the upper part of the keyboard is called the “Upper Tone,” and
the tone in the lower part is called the “Lower Tone.”
To cancel the split function, press <Split> once again.
The tone in the upper part then is effective for the entire keyboard.
МЕМЬ
You can change the split
point. Please refer to
Split Point” (p. 137).
MEMD
e “Changing the Keyboard's
The split-point key is included in the left-hand section. Each time powerto” | с,
When you switch to Split
Play directly from Layer
Play, the two tones played
in Layer Play become the
tone of the right-hand of
the keyboard in Split mode.
MEM
Basic Screen (p. 16)
MEM
When the keyboard has
been divided into upper
and lower sections, the
damper pedal is applied
to
only the upper section. If
you want to add lingering
reverberations to the notes
of the lower section, see
“Assigning a Function to
Pad Buttons or Pedals” (p.
139).
NEMD
You can adjust the volume
level for each of the Tones.
For instructions, see
“Adjusting the Volume of
Each Performance Part”
75).
(p.
49
Chapter 1 Playing the Keyboard
Changing the Tones
1. Press the button next to the name of the Tone you want to
change.
The selected Tone will be highlighted.
2. Press one of the Tone buttons.
The Tone Selection screen appears.
3. Use Page < 44 > <p > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens, then use the button next to the display to choose the
Tone. |
4. Press the [Exit] button.
The previous screen appears.
Play the keyboard to hear the Tone you selected.
50
NEMD
Pressing <Split> to cancel
the Split Play during
Automatic Accompaniment
~ activates the “Piano Style
Arranger.” Take a look at
“Playing the Piano Along
with the Automatic
Accompaniment (Piano
| Style Arranger)” (p. 74).
If Split Play is turned on,
you can press <Options>
located at the bottom of the
Tone Selection screen to
change the pitch of the
keyboard sound in octave
units. To learn more, see
“Shifting the Keyboard
Pitch in Octave Steps
(Octave Shift)” (p. 51).
Chapter 1 Playing the Keyboard
Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave
Steps (Octave Shift)
When the keyboard has been set up so that the right-hand and left-hand
parts play different sounds (Split Play 3 p. 49), or so that the sounds for two
instruments are played in combination (Layer Play > p. 47), you can shift
the pitch of the notes you play by an octave at a time. This function is called
“Octave Shift.” You can’t use this feature
For instance, you can make the pitch of the keyboard's left-hand part match when set up so that the
, : ` , anti ard 1s slave
the pitch of the right-hand part during Split Play. Or, you could change the entire keyboard is played
as a single instrument.
pitch of each tone, and play both tones together during Layer Play.
1. Make sure the basic screen is displayed. | В MEMO |
Basic Screen (p. 16)
F120 EH Cool AL AA
2. Press <Layer> or <Split> at the bottom of the display to
select Layer play or Split play.
3. Press the button next to the Tone on which to use Octave
Shift.
The selected Tone will be highlighted.
4. Press the Tone button for the Tone you want to play.
The Tone Selection screen appears.
De Press <Options> at the bottom of the display.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Bl Octave
6. Use Octave ** < El > < E] > to adjust the pitch of the sound.
“Octave **” displays the pitch of the currently selected note.
Each time you press Octave < Ed >, the pitch will be raised one octave.
Each time you press Octave < Ed >, the pitch will be lowered one octave.
The pitch can be lowered by up to two octaves, or raised as much as two
octaves (-2 to +2).
51
Chapter 1 Playing the Keyboard
Adjusting the Sound Brilliance
1. Use the [Brilliance] knob to adjust the overall brilliance.
Rotating the knob clockwise makes the tone brighter; rotating it
counterclockwise makes the sound more mellow.
Volume Brilliance Reverb Balance
Y у
; Min Max Min Max
Adding Reverberation to Sounds
(The Reverb Effect)
Mellow right Accomp Keyboard
The KR-377 can apply a reverb effect to the notes you play on the keyboard.
Applying reverb adds pleasing reverberation to what you play, so it sounds
almost as if you were playing in a concert hall.
Volume Brilliance Reverb Balance
Y
Min Max Mellow Bright Min ax Accomp Keyboard
1. Adjust the [Reverb] knob to select the amount of reverb
effect to be applied.
Rotating the knob clockwise applies a deeper reverb, and rotating it
counterclockwise applies less reverb.
52
You can change the type of
reverb that's applied.
Please refer to “Changing
the Type of Reverb Effect”
(p. 146).
If you press the One Touch
Program [Piano] button for
the purposes of a piano
performance, settings for
the reverb effect that were
made using the [Reverb]
knob could get altered.
Chapter 1 Playing the Keyboard
Effects Adding Three-Dimensional
Breadth to Your Performances
(Advanced 3D)
When performing along with the Automatic Accompaniment or the internal
songs, you can add three-dimensional breadth to the accompaniment
sounds. It provides the pleasant effect of “surrounding” your performance
within the accompaniment.
Advanced 3D Utility
m |
1 e Press the [Advanced 3D] button.
The button's indicator lights up, and the Advanced 3D screen appears.
2. Press the button under the corresponding performance part
to turn Parts on/off.
Three-dimensional breadth is added to the performance Part which is
turned on.
Advanced Ze
PA
+
+
-
E
.
M
*
Н
н
+
E
Н
E
La
-
un В + etre ard
Y Advanced 3D ON
Advanced 3D OFF
When you press the [Exit] button you will return to the previous screen.
However if the [Advanced 3D] button's indicator is lit, the effect will apply
to the selected Part.
3. To eliminate the effect, press the [Advanced 3D] button once
more, extinguishing the button’s indicator.
The Advanced 3D effect is removed from all parts.
53
Chapter 1 Playing the Keyboard
BH Applying an Effect Only to the Layer Tone of the
Keyboard
When the Advanced 3D effect is being applied to “Keyboard,” you can
apply the effect only to the Layer tone (p. 47).
The setting is at “ALL” when the piano is powered up.
1. From the Advanced 3D screen, press <Option>.
The following screen appears.
Advanced 30 Option
ALL
Display Description
All The effect is applied to all the notes you play on the
keyboard.
The effect is applied to the Layer tones. When Layer
Layer Play is not being used, the effect is not applied to what
is played on the keyboard, even if “Keyboard” is set to
On.
2. Use< + > < + > next to the display to choose the setting.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Advanced 3D screen.
54
Chapter 1 Playing the Keyboard
Applying Effects to the Sound (Effects)
You can apply a wide range of different effects to the notes you play on the
keyboard.
Press one of the Tone buttons to choose a Tone to which you
want to apply an effect.
The Tone Selection screen appears.
From the Tone Selection screen, press <Options> at the
bottom of the display.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
This screen is called the “Effects screen.”
Be
EA
FEAR
Fs YFe
Sumpathetic
Resonance
Ed Octave © E3
Effect Off ежу
Press <Effect On> at the bottom of the display.
The optimal effect is applied for the currently selected Tone.
Use < # > < 4 > at the left of the display to choose “Type”
(the type of effect).
Use < + > < 4 > at the right of the display to adjust “Depth”
(the amount of effect applied).
To cancel the effect, press <Effect Off> at the bottom of the
display.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Tone Selection screen.
4
About the Effects
When the effects is set to ON, the optimal effect is applied for the currently
selected sound. Also you can apply effects for each tone. Although turning
off the power returns the effects to their initial settings, carrying out
Memory Backup (p. 149) allows you to save and store the effect settings even
after the power is turned off.
4
A
When you press the One
Touch Program [Piano] or
[Organ] button, you cannot
change the type of effects.
If you apply a different
effect to the Layer sound
(p. 47) or the Lower sour
(p. 49) than the effect
Ne
applied to the Upper sound
(the sound shown in the
upper right of the main
screen), the effect may not
be applied in some cases.
Select the same effect as
the Upper sound.
MEM
for
For more information on
the different types of
effects, take a look at the
“Effects List” (p. 176).
55
Chapter 1 Playing the Keyboard
Sounding the Metronome
The KR-377 features a built-in metronome.
You can start or stop the metronome sound with just a single press of the
[Metronome] button. During playback of a song, or when performing with
Automatic Accompaniment, the metronome sounds to the tempo and beat
of the song or accompaniment.
OOO
etronome
Press the [Metronome] button to sound the metronome.
The button's indicator lights up, and a Metronome screen like the one below
appears.
Cool Al
To stop the metronome's sound, press the [Metronome]
button again.
The [Metronome] button's indicator goes dark.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen.
E Adjusting the Tempo
You can adjust the tempo of the metronome. The tempo and beat of the
metronome change automatically if you use an Automatic Accompaniment
or play back a song.
Tempo
Use the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the tempo.
The tempo of the Metronome can be set within the range of 20 to 250.
The setting is at “120” when the piano is powered up.
You can return to the original tempo for a Music Style (p. 60) or a song by
pressing [-] and [+] at the same time.
E Changing the Beat of Metronome
1.
56
From the Metronome screen, press < 4 > < 4 > at the right of
the screen to set the beat.
The beat displayed in the upper portion of the screen will change.
Available beat settings:
2/2, 0/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4, 7/4, 3/8, 6/8, 9/8, 12/8
MEMP
G
When Æ is selected,
only the upbeat will sound.
Chapter 1 Playing the Keyboard
E Changing the Animation
You can change whatis normally displayed in the center of the metronome
screen.
When you turn on the power, “Metronome” is displayed.
From the Metronome screen, press the button under
The animation type will change.
B Changing How the Metronome Beat (Pattern)
Sounds
The metronome usually sounds one beat per quarter note, but you can
change the beat pattern to sound, for example, one beat for every dotted
quarter note.
From the Metronome screen, press <Options> at the bottom
of the display.
Use Select < 4 > and < Y > at the bottom of the screen to
choose <Pattern>.
The selected item will be highlighted.
Use < # > < 4 > next to the display to choose the pattern.
Display Description
Normal The metronome sounds in the ordinary way.
Counting starts at the beginning of the measure, in intervals
of dotted half-note upbeats.
Counting starts at the beginning of the measure, in intervals
of half-note upbeats.
Counting starts at the beginning of the measure, in intervals
of dotted quarter-note upbeats.
of quarter-note upbeats.
Counting starts at the beginning of the measure, in intervals
of dotted eighth-note upbeats.
Counting starts at the beginning of the measure, in intervals
of eighth-note upbeats.
| Counting starts at the beginning of the measure, in intervals
Л
Counting starts at the beginning of the measure, in intervals
of sixteenth-note upbeats.
+Doubl Plays with backbeats as the added sound.
+Triel Plays with triplets as the added sound.
+Shutl Adds a shuffle.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Metronome screen.
MEMD
With a triplet beat (6/8, 9/
8, or 12/8), added notes are
sounded as triplets.
57
Chapter 1 Playing the Keyboard
E Changing the Type of Sound
You can change the type of sound of the metronome.
* The setting 1s at “ordinary metronome sound” when the KR-377 is powered up.
1. From the Metronome screen, press <Options> at the bottom
of the display.
Pattern sound Volume
Harmal pa Г К
À Select +
2. Use Select < 4 > and < } > at the bottom of the screen to
choose <Sound>.
The selected item will be highlighted.
Je Use< + > < + > next to the display to choose the tone.
Display Description
mm |
: Ordinary metronome sound
Tri Electronic metronome sound
a es A voice counting “1, 2, 3” in Japanese.
Fl, Dil,
One, A voice counting “1, 2, 3” in English
two, & tr gst
= “ ti ,
TO. Dog and cat cries
* 3
CHE |
al Woodblock sound
‘a
Pe Triangle and castanet sounds
Zn ,
2 Clapping
№ pping
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Metronome screen
58
E Changing the Volume
You can adjust the volume of the metronome to any of ten possible levels.
»
When the piano is switched on, “ Х » (5) will be automatically selected.
From the Metronome screen, press <Options> at the bottom
of the display.
Use Select < 4 > and < P > at the bottom of the screen to
choose <Volume>.
The selected item will be highlighted.
Use < + > < + > next to the display to adjust the volume.
Ё
Choosing Х sets the volume to the lowest level, and choosing
y e,
I ») sets it to the highest level.
ore
Choose to silence the metronome sound.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Metronome screen.
59
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Music Style and Automatic Accompaniment
What's a Music Style?
A Music Style is an accompaniment pattern that has been designed to fit in
WIth a particular musical style.
There are many different varieties of music around the world, and each one
has its own unique features. What gives jazz its “jazziness” and classical
music its unmistakable classical feel is the unique combination of elements,
such as the instruments used, melody, and phrasing, which interact to create
the musical character of the genre. A Music Style makes use of such
elements to bring out the distinctive atmosphere and mood of each musical
genre.
The Makeup of a Music Style
A Music Style is made up of five performance parts: “Rhythm,
Hoi
Bass,”
Ia ir a 45
"Accompaniment 1,” “Accompaniment 2,” and “Accompaniment 3.
Also, a Music Style is made up of a set of six performance states called
“Divisions.”
Division Performance division
Intro The intro is played at the start of a song.
Ending This is played at the end of a song.
Original This is a basic accompaniment pattern.
This is a developmental accompaniment pattern. It
Variation , o .
is a variation on an Original.
This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a juncture
where the mood changes. Use this when you wish
to create more energy (shift to a variation) within
the song.
Fill in To Variation
This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a juncture
where the mood changes. Use this when you wish
to create more sedate (shift to a original) within the
song.
Fill In To Original
What is Automatic Accompaniment? |
With the KR-377, just by pressing the One Touch Program [Arranger]
button, you can select Automatic Accompaniment. Automatic MEMb
Accompaniment is a function that provides you with accompaniment in a For information on how to
variety of musical genres, played automatically, just by specifying chords in play Automatic
the left hand. Automatic Accompaniment lets you enjoy ensemble play with Accompaniment, see
orchestral backing, even when performing alone! “Choosing a Music Style”
(p. 63).
60
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
About Chords
A chord is what is produced when multiple notes are played
simultaneously. Chords are indicated by the pitch of the fundamental note
of the chord (the root) and the chord type, which is determined by the other
notes that comprise the chord.
For example, the chord C Maj is expressed with the root note “C” and the
chord type “Maj” (Major). C Maj is composed of the three notes “C,” “E,”
and “G.”
“С Ма)” appears as the chord name at the left of the basic screen.
; *—Chord Type
Root Tone
The root notes of chords are all indicated by a letter of the alphabet, §
(sharp) and } (flat), which correspond as follows.
E Playing Chords with Simple Fingering (Chord
Intelligence)
“Chord Intelligence” is a feature that intelligently decides on
accompaniment chords the moment you play some keys specifying a chord
during Automatic Accompaniment.
To play a “C Maj” chord, for example, you usually have to finger the three
keys C, E, and G; but with Chord Intelligence, you only have to press the C
key to initiate a “C Maj” chord accompaniment.
* How to play the chord in the Chord Intelligence mode
Major Minor
Ex; C Mai Ex; C min
Play the root and
Flay the chord root. nm the third key above it.
Seventh Minor Sevinth
Ex: C7 Ex: Cmin7
Play the root and Play the root,
the second key above it. the third key above it, and
: the second key below it.
Major Seventh Diminished
Ex: C Mai 7 Ex: C dim
Play the root and Play the root and
the first key below it. the sixth key above it.
MEMD
For more information
about chord fingering, refer
to the “Chord List” (p. 174).
EMP
Basic Screen (р. 16)
NEMD
You can cancel the Chord
Intelligence function. For
more information, see
“Canceling the Chord
Intelligence Function” (p.
139).
61
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
BH Displaying the Chord Fingering On Screen (Chord
Finder)
1.
62
Whenever you are not sure how a certain chord is fingered, you can have the
notes comprising the chord be shown in the screen.
Press the [Utility] button.
The Utility screen appears.
Ц tili tu
Games EE CTD a LIRE
Press <Chord Finder> at the bottom of the display.
If <Chord Finder> doesn’t appear on screen, press < 44 > < pp > at the upper
left and upper right of the display to switch screens.
Use < 4> <p > at the bottom of the display to specify the root
of the chord you want to learn about.
The chord fingering appears on screen.
L mai N Comin METEO
И Ра СП ВИ ЕСС Co? suad
€ CC»
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Utility screen,
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
MAN
Choosing a Music Style
You can choose a wide variety of Music Styles by pressing the Music Style
button, The following buttons are called Music Style buttons.
A Music Style can be broken down into 11 groups.
Music Style.
Pop — Acousitic Ballad Rock Oldies Country Big Band/Swing Latin Waltz March/Kids Trad Disk /User
OOOOOOOOOOOO
When you press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button to change the
Music Style, the played notes and tempo of the right-hand part of the
keyboard change to the optimal Music Style, and the settings that let you
play with Automatic Accompaniment are made right away.
Piano Organ Arranger Drums/SFX
U
N
One Touch res) |
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
The basic screen like the one shown below appears.
J= 80 [7 Cool À 4/4 M: 01
I a ee E LC Va a а Ча,
mt
МА А АИ?
С. Mad
ne PER AR
| Louer JS
Press the Music Style button to choose the group for the
Music Style. В
The following screen is called the “Style Selection” screen.
O 3 Style Select E
Co | Al | 4 Г Light Pop
MichaelsPop — NS * * [Latin Pop |
4 Preset A » ¢ Page mw
Use Page < 44 > < + > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens, then press the button next to the Style name to
choose the Music Style.
Use < 4 > and <p > at the bottom of the screen to choose any
one of Presets A-D.
When you change Preset type, the Music Style’s tempo, the tone of the right-
hand part, the settings of the Style Orchestrator (p. 71), and the like change.
By varying the tempo or Tone, you can enjoy performances with a totally
different ambience, even when the Music Style is the same.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the basic screen.
For more information
about the types of Music
Styles, take a look at the
“Music Style List” (p. 171).
MEMP
When you change the
Music Style, the tempo and
Tone change to match the
Music Style you ve chosen.
If you don’t want to change
the tempo and Tone, take a
look at “Keeping the Same
Tone and Tempo When
the
Music Style Changes” (p.
141).
63
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
5.
6.
Specify a chord by playing it on the left-hand keyboard
section.
The Music Style you chose plays automatically with the specified chord.
Split Point ( F#3)
Ÿ om
The range specifyed a chord
Press the [Intro/Ending] button to play an ending and stop
the accompaniment.
NH Choosing a Music Style from Data Disk
64
You can play with Music Styles on the Data Disk included with the KR-377,
as well as User Styles saved on floppy disk (p. 132).
Music Style
Pop Acousilic Ballad Rock Oldies Country Big Band/Swing Latin Waltz March/Kids
MEMP
Press the [Start/Stop]
button to stop the
accompaniment without
ending (p. 67).
Trad Disk/User
99999 GIO
Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.
For information on how to use the disk drive, see p: 38.
Press the [Disk/User] button.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
E 5 User Style
: Ocean Side
: 16Beat Pop
= 7
Use Page < 44 >< + > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens, and select a Style.
When you press Page < 4 > several times, the Styles registered in the [Disk/
User] button will be displayed.
Styles with numbers beginning with “L” are styles that are stored in internal
memory. Disk styles will be displayed following these.
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button, then
specify a chord by playing it in the lower section of the
keyboard.
The Style you ve chosen is sounded.
The Music Style you've selected from the floppy disk remains in internal
memory until you switch off the power. You can play the Music Style you
last selected just by pressing the [Disk/ User] button, even if you've taken
the floppy disk out of the disk drive.
MEMp
Multiple User Styles can be
registered in the [Disk/
User] button of the KR-377.
Refer to “Storing User
Styles to the Button” (p.
131)
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Playing Automatic Accompaniment
While Playing a Tone in the Left Hand
Normally when you play using Automatic Accompaniment, sound will not
be heard when you play the left-hand area of the keyboard. However by
selecting <Lower>, you can sound the tone played in the left hand (the
Lower Tone) at the same time as the automatic accompaniment.
1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
The basic screen will appear.
J= 80 [35 Lool Al
[Jy] oy}
TL a a AC
TANTAS ANETTE ES
CERA AAA
2. Press the <Lower> button at the bottom of the display.
The following screen will appear.
2 50 E Cool AL M: 1
LARTER ARAN SNS AAR RAE EE LARA ARR RE KES TS
o
th
VASEN VENEN AE SS Sa
Lower ON
3. Specify a chord in the left-hand keyboard area.
The Automatic Accompaniment intro will play.
When you play a chord in the left-hand keyboard area, the notes you play
will be heard, and the accompaniment chord will change. MEMD
4. ıf you no longer wish to hear the sound of the left-hand To change the Lower Tone,
refer to “Changing the
keyboard area, press <Lower> once again.
Tones” (p. 50).
65
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Playing Just the Rhythm Pattern
A Music Style can be made to sound only the Rhythm Pattern.
1. Use a Music Style button to choose a Music Style.
2. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button, then press the
[Start/Stop] button.
Only the Rhythm Pattern of the selected Music Style is played.
Adjusting the Tempo for £ Automatic
Accompaniment |
Tempo
1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
This makes the setting for Automatic Accompaniment. -
2. Usethe Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the tempo.
The tempo appears at the top-left area of the screen.
Pressing the [+] button makes the tempo faster, and pressing [-] makes the
tempo slower.
You can return to the original tempo for the style by pressing [-] and [+] at
the same time.
66
— There are other patterns in
the Music Styles that are
not included in the Rhythm
Patterns. In certain cases,
such as when such Music
Styles are selected, the
Rhythm Pattern may not
play.
-
You can change the tempo
of Automatic
Accompaniment even
while the Automatic
Accompaniment is playing.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Playing a Music Style (Start/Stop)
Pressing the One Touch Program [Arranger] button activates Sync Start for
the accompaniment (which starts the accompaniment simultaneously when
you play something in the lower section of the keyboard), and makes the
setting for automatically playing an appropriate intro for the
accompaniment. You can change how this starting and stopping works in
many different ways.
To Variation To Original Sync Intro Count Down Start
| | | || | ||
Fill In Reset Ending | Stop
E Starting Automatic Accompaniment When You
Play the Left-hand Section (Sync Start)
1. Press the [Sync/Reset] button, getting it to light up.
The [Intro/ Ending] button's indicator starts blinking.
2. Specify the chord on the lower-part of keyboard.
The intro is played and the Automatic Accompaniment starts.
Making the Intro Short and Simple
1. Press the [Sync/Reset] button, getting it to light up.
The [Intro/Ending] button’s indicator starts blinking.
2. Press the Fill In [To Original] button, getting its indicator to
blink.
3. Specify the chord on the lower-part of keyboard.
A short intro is played and the accompaniment starts.
Starting Without an Intro В
Before starting Automatic Accompaniment, you can follow the steps shown
below to silence the intro.
1. Press the [Intro/Ending] button, extinguishing the indicator.
2. Specify the chord on the lower-part of keyboard.
The Automatic Accompaniment starts without playing an intro.
E Starting at the Press of a Button
1. Press the [Sync/Reset] button, extinguishing the indicator.
The indicator for the [Intro/Ending] button also goes dark.
2. Specify the first chord on the lower-part of keyboard.
mM
x
=
+
o
Le
hae Y
>
MEMp
Pressing the Fill In [To
Original] or [To Variation]
button makes the
accompaniment pattern
change as well. For more
information, take a look at
“Changing the
Accompaniment Pattern
Within a Song (Fill-In)” (p.
70). |
67
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
3.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button or the [Start/Stop] button.
The Automatic Accompaniment starts.
Pressing the [Start/Stop] button starts the Automatic Accompaniment
without an intro.
’ The Chord Tone and Bass Tone
Fingering a key on the left-hand section of the keyboard while the [Sync/
Reset] button's indicator is dark causes a chord to be sounded. This note is
called the “Chord Tone,” and the root of the chord that is played at the same
Ч time is called the “Bass Tone.”
ME Stopping Automatic Accompaniment
Stopping with an Added Ending
1.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
An ending is played, then the Automatic Accompaniment stops.
Making the Ending Short and Simple
1.
2,
Press the Fill In [To Original] button, getting its indicator to
blink.
While the Fill In [To Original] button is blinking, press the
[Start/Stop] button.
A short ending is played and the accompaniment stops.
Stopping at the Press of a Button
1.
Press the [Start/Stop] button.
Automatic accompaniment stops as soon as you press the button.
mM Adjusting the Timing During the Accompaniment
and Starting Over (Reset)
68
[f the timing of the accompaniment is off during a performance, pressing
this button lets you start playing over from the beginning of the division (p.
60).
To Variation To Original Sync intro Count Down Start
| | | | | | | | | |]
| Fill in Reset Ending Stop
Press the [Sync/Reset] button.
The count sound begins immediately, then the accompaniment starts.
A
NEMD
You can change the sound
of the chord tone and bass
tone. Take a look at
“Changing the Sound for
Chord Tone and Bass
Tone” (p. 138).
MEMP
Pressing the Fill In {To
Original] or [To Variation]
button makes the
accompaniment pattern
change as well. For more
information, take a look at
“Changing the
Accompaniment Pattern
Within a Song (Fill-In)” (p.
70).
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Playing the Count Sound at the End of
the Intro
medi
e
If an intro is played before your performance, you can have a count-in
sound played to the end of the intro, allowing you to understand easily
where you are to start playing.
To Variation To Original Sync intro Count Down Start
| | | | MM | | ||
Fill In Reset Ending Stop
Press the [Count Down] button, getting it to light up.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
The intro will begin, and after the intro a one-measure count will sound.
If the [Sync/Reset] button’s indicator is lit, specifying a chord in the left-
hand area will cause the intro to start, and a count to sound in the same way.
Ex: 4/4 | When the Intro has finished playing,
Intro the accompaniment is played.
й |
| |
14 [| 0 2 221 Nn
1 2 3 4
Count Sound
To stop the countdown, press the [Count Down] button,
extinguishing its indicator.
69
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Modifying an Accompaniment
You can change the arrangement of Automatic Accompaniment and the
accompaniment pattern.
E Changing the Accompaniment Pattern Within a
Song (Fill-in)
There are two accompaniment patterns: the original one, and a variation. In
addition, a fill-in (a short phrase) is added at the points where the
accompaniment patterns change, which adds more variation to the song.
It can be effective to use the quieter original pattern for the first half of the
song, and the variation pattern for the second half.
To Variation To Original Sync intro Count Down Start
| | |
Fin Reset Ending Stop
1. Pressing the Fill In [To Variation] button (its indicator
should light) makes the setting for playing the variation
accompaniment pattern.
2. Pressing the Fill In [To Original] button (its indicator should
light) makes the setting for playing the original
accompaniment pattern.
Pressing these buttons during a performance inserts a one-bar fill-in in time
with when the buttons were pressed, and the accompaniment pattern
changes.
What's a Fill-In?
| Ashort improvisational phrase inserted at the bar line is called a “Fill-In.”
{The KR-377 plays the optimal phrase for the selected Music Style.
Adding a Fill-in Without Changing the Accompaniment Pattern
You can play only a fill-in without changing the accompaniment pattern by
pressing whichever of the Fill In [To Original] and [To Variation] buttons
whose indicator is lit up while a performance is in progress.
70
You can change the
accompaniment pattern
without inserting a fill-in.
In that case, assign the
function to the pedal and
use it. See "Assigning a
Function to Pad Buttons or
Pedals” (p. 139).
MEM
You can use the pedals to
change the arrangement or
accompaniment pattern or
to insert a fill-in. See
“Assigning a Function to
Pad Buttons or Pedals” (p.
139).
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
E Changing the Arrangement of the
Accompaniment
You can change the arrangement of an accompaniment during the
performance of Automatic Accompaniment or while it is stopped. This
function is called “Style Orchestrator.”
There are four arrangement types of the accompaniment for each Music
Style
Orchestrator
User —
1 2
| | |
| Pad
le Press the [Style Orchestrator/User] button, getting the
indicator light up.
The Pad [1] and Pad [2] buttons can be used to change the arrangement.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
The value of the currently selected Style Orchestrator will appear.
Style Ürches trator
MEMP
If the [Style Orchestrator/
User] button's indicator
Pad 1: Rdvanced? Pad 2: Full
goes out, you cannot
change the Style
Display Descripti on Orchestrator with the Pad
buttons. Refer to
Basic The simplest arrangement “Assigning a Function to
Pad Buttons or Pedals” (p.
Advanced 1 139).
A more elaborate arrangement
Advanced 2
Full The most elaborate arrangement
2. Press the [Exit] button. MEMD
You are returned to the previous screen. Some Music Styles don’t
change the arrangement of
3. Press the Pad [1] or Pad [2] button to change the arrangement the accompaniment when
you've followed the steps
of the accompaniment. just described.
71
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Chan
1.
3.
72
ging the Assignments for Style Orchestrator
You can change the value for the Style Orchestrator assigned to the Pad [1]
or {2].
Press the [Style Orchestrator/User] button, getting the
indicator light up.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
has i> otule Urchestrator
Pad 1: Advanced? {Fad 2: Full
Use < # > < 4 > next to the display to choose the value
assigned to the pad.
Use the buttons located at the left of the display to change the value assigned
to Padf1].
Use the buttons located at the right of the display to change the value
assigned to Pad[2].
Display Description
Basic The simplest arrangement
Advanced 1
A more elaborate arrangement
Advanced 2
Full The most elaborate arrangement
Press the [Exit] button.
Press the Pad [1] or Pad [2] button to change the arrangement of the
accompaniment.
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Adding Harmony to the Right-hand
Part (Melody Intelligence)
You can add a harmony to the notes you play with the keyboard.
While an Automatic Accompaniment is playing, a harmony matched to the
chord you designate in the lower section of the keyboard is automatically
added to the notes you play with the right hand. This function is called
“Melody Intelligence.”
Melody
Piano Organ Arranger Drums/SFX Intelligence
One Touch Program
Press the [Melody Intelligence] button, getting it to light up.
When you play something on the right-hand section of the keyboard, a
harmony is added to the notes you finger.
A Melody Intelligence screen like the one following appears.
Melody In telligence
TU TO
A
Ercaduay
PE EE EE a I Io A * CNN ADT ACC CT dE ee ANNINNN
bos pel
id Page »
Use Page < 4 >< > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens, then choose the harmony type.
When you play something on the keyboard, a harmony of the type you
selected is added to the notes you finger.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen with the Melody
Intelligence function still in effect.
To cancel the Melody Intelligence function, press the
[Melody Intelligence] button to extinguish the indicator.
n
="
Le
ge!
к
©
Li
Le
The different types of
harmonies include some
that automatically change
the Tone. Also, when vou
finger several keys at the
same time, in some cases
harmony may be added to
one note.
73
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Playing the Piano Along with the
Automatic Accompaniment
(Piano Style Arranger)
Usually, with an Automatic Accompaniment performance, the
accompaniment is sounded by the chords you specify on the left-hand
section of the keyboard, with the melody played on the right-hand section.
If you like, however, you can make the KR-377 recognize chords from the
entire keyboard, and perform without splitting the keyboard. This function
is called the “Piano Style Arranger.”
This makes it possible to add an Automatic Accompaniment as you play the
keyboard, without giving any thought to the location of a keyboard split.
1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
> 80 Es Cool AL Ad Mil
Options
2. Press <Split> at the bottom of the display to cancel the split
function. Ee
The following screen is called up.
80 Lool A1
Er EP ITT ee
mn ae
IC Maj |
TN
Lauer Options
LE
Split OFF
3. Press a Music Style button to choose a Music Style.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the basic screen.
4. Play the keyboard.
The accompaniment starts when you finger a chord.
74
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
Changing the Volume Balance for the
Accompaniment and Keyboard | M
You can change the volume balance for the song and accompaniment and 5 When the knob is all the
the notes played from the keyboard. I a SA o - ‘way to “Accomp,” no
sound is heard when you
1. Usethe [Balance] knob to change the volume balance. play the keyboard. You can
Turning the knob toward “Accomp” lowers the volume of the keyboard. usually leave the knob at
Turning the knob toward “Keyboard” lowers the volume of the song and the center position.
accompaniment.
Volume Brilliance Reverb Balance
Y
Y
Min Max Meliow Bright Min Max La
Adjusting the Volume of Each Performance Part
You can adjust the volume balance of each part of the Music Style and of
each tone when playing more than one tone with the keyboard.
Part Quick
Function Balance Tour
080
1 e Press the [Part Balance] button.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Press < 44 > от < pp > at the upper-left area of the display to switch the two
screens.
This shows the volume balance of each part of the Music Style.
Display Performance part
Rhythm Rhythm
Bass Bass, Bass tone (p. 68) MEMD
| : For more about
Accompaniment 1, Accompaniment 2, and Accompa-
Accomp . performance Parts, take a
niment 3
look at “The Makeup of a
Music Style” (p. 60).
75
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment
CT a A N АОН ОО ЛЕОН
Upper
Layer
Lower
Fe
METS
+
> a Eta
ED: | E
LP | 23
47) or Split play (p. 49), or when playing percussion or effect sounds with
the keyboard (p. 44).
Display Part
Drs/SFX | Percussion instruments/ effects played with the keyboard
Lower Tone (The Tone displayed at the upper-left area of the
Lower
basic screen)
Layer Tone (The Tone displayed at the bottom-right area of
Layer
the basic screen)
Upper Tone (The Tone displayed at the upper-right area of
Upper os
the basic screen)
2. Press the buttons located below each volume in the screen to
select the Part whose volume you wish to adjust.
3. Озе < + > < у > at the right of the display to adjust the
volume.
The volume of the selected Part is changed.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen.
76
MEMD
Basic Screen (p. 16)
Chapter 3 Some Handy Features
Playing Back Songs for Practice
6.
Here's how to practice along with commercially available Music Files or
songs that were saved on a floppy disk.
You can use rewind or fast-forward to move to the desired measure, and
play back from that point.
CT TTC
Reset Stop Play © Rec Bwd
>>
Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.
Press the [Song] button.
The Song screen appears.
Press the button next to the display to select a song.
If the disk contains four or more songs, Lise Page < 44 >< pp > at the bottom
of the display to change the songs that are displayed.
Press the [Exit] button to extinguish the [Song] button’s indicator and go
back to the previous screen.
Press the Play [ » | button.
The song will begin playing back.
Press the Bwd [ «<< ] and Fwd [| >» ] buttons to move to a bar
where you want to listen.
Pressing the button once moves your position by one measure, Hold down
the button to move forward or backward consecutively.
The measure number appears in the top-right area of the basic screen.
To stop playback of the song, press the Stop [ M] button.
To go back to the beginning of the song
1.
Press the Reset [ t< ] button.
To move to the end of the song
i.
Press the Fwd | >> ] button while holding down the Stop
[ M] button.
MEMD
To learn more about Music
Files, refer to “Music Files
That the KR-377 Can Use”
(p. 178).
Tf you're using the disk
drive for the first time, be
sure to read the important
notes on p. 6.
You can view some
information about the
selected song by pressing
<Info> at the bottom of the
nN
=
a
E
3
=
x
display.
MEM
When you play a song with
an upbeat (in other words,
a song that starts before the
first beat), the basic screen
shows “PU,” “1,” “2,” and
so on as the measure
numbers.
When you start playback of
Music Files, the measure
number on the basic screen
appears in reverse video.
While this is in reverse
video, the KR-377 is
reading data from the
floppy disk, so wait a few
moments until it finishes.
If you've used markers to
designate a passage for
repeating (p. 88), you can
only move forward and
backward within the range
specified by the A and B
markers.
77
E Playing All Songs Continuously
You can continuously repeat playback of all the songs. This function is
called “All Song Play.”
1. Fromthe Song screen, press <All Play> at the bottom of the
display.
ANA A NT
2: Gumnopedie 1 F
1: Menuet in 6 PO: MozartSonata
Ме РРР
All Play Info ¢ Page w
All songs are played back in sequence. When the last song has finished
playing, playback then repeats after returning to the first song.
2. Press <All Play> at the bottom of the display once again.
Playback stops.
You can stop playback by pressing the Stop [| M ] button.
When the Following Screen Is Displayed
If a song is recorded in the KR-377's internal memory, the screen shown
below appears when you try to choose a song.
Delete Song ОК?
Lau
Are vou sure 7
Cancel UE
If you don't want to erase the song
Press <Cancel> at the bottom of the display.
Save the song on a floppy disk.
For information on how to save your song, see “Saving Songs to Floppy
Disks” (p. 104).
Erasing a song
Press <OK> at the bottom of the display.
The recorded performance or song whose settings have been changed is
erased.
78
Chapter 3 Some Handy Features
Displaying the Score
You can have the musical score of a recorded performance or a song from
floppy disk be displayed.
When you play back a Music File with lyrics, the lyrics appear on screen.
seo NEMD
If you select a part that
does not contain
performance data, notes
CT @ - —| will not be displayed in the
1 e Press the [Song] button. В | score. Use <Options> to
В change the part that is
The Song screen appears. -
displayed. For details refer
e Press the button next to the display to select a song. to "Changing the Settings
For an explanation of how to select the song, refer to (p. 77). for Score Screen” (p. 144).
For more information
3. Press the [Score] button. about Parts, refer to
The Score screen appears. “Multitrack Recording with
16 Parts (16-Track
Sequencer)” (p. 113).
4120 |
tions
ej: Lyric
Mute Left User MEMD
Display Description If you use the buttons
a: located below the displ
Mutes the sound of the part whose score is displayed. OE ESE
Mute | | . | to change the displayed
While muting, the =}; mark changes = . -
part while the song is
Left Displays the score of the left-hand part (Part 3). playing, the song may be
played back from the
Right Displays the score of the right-hand part (Part 4).
beginning.
User Displays the score of the part you yourself recorded (Part 1).
. You can change th is displayed, or modify how the
Options an change the part that is displayed, or modify how the
score is displayed (p. 144).
Lyric Displays lyrics in the score.
4, Press the Play [ » | button. MEMD
The song will begin playing, and the score will advance along with the song. If you are playing data that
contains lyrics data and the
Some notes on a Score Screen lyrics are not displayed
* When you start playback of music files, the E marks appears. While this appears on the even though you press
score, the KR-377 is reading data from the floppy disk and making the score. Please wait until <Lyric>, the lyrics display
reading of the data is complete. setting is turned “OFF.”
* In the Score screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen, and not Turn “ON” the setting in
be displayed. “Hiding the On-screen
* The scores that are presented by the display are produced based on the music files. Viewing Lyrics” (p. 148).
case is groen priority over precise expression when dealing with complex, high-level music.
Because of this, you may find that the score shown in the display does not match what is
provided on commercially available sheet music. The score display feature is particularly
unsuitable for the display of difficult, complex musical works that demand accurate notation.
In addition, the display cannot show notes that are briefer than a sixteenth note.
79
Chapter 3 Some Handy Features
M Checking Your Performance on a Graph/
Keyboard Screen
1 es From the Score screen, press < mn > (Keyboard) or < >
(Graph) at the left of the display.
A Keyboard screen or Graph screen like the one shown below is displayed.
Keyboard Screen
J=106 New Song
When this screen is visible, you can check the pitch.
The key for the note being played is indicated.
Graph Screen
2:106_ ED) Hew Song 4/4
a
en
FARA
SONDA
When this screen is visible, you can check a note's velocity and length.
The height of the bar graph shows the note's velocity, and the width shows
the note's length.
Press < Li > ог < > at the upper-right area of the screen to switch the
two screens.
With either screen, the upper portion shows the playback of the song, and
the lower portion shows what's played on the keyboard.
2. Press the Play [ > | button to play back the song, then play
the piano along with the song.
Now let's check your performance on the screen.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen.
80
МЕМЬ
If the upper screen doesn't
change when you play back
a song, the part settings
displayed in the upper
screen do not match. Take a
look at “Specifying the Part
to Display” (p. 81) and
make the settings for the
part to display.
Chapter 3 Some Handy Features
I.
Specifying the Part to Display
You can display a different Part of the model song.
1. From the Keyboard screen or the Graph screen, press <Part>
at the right bottom of the display.
The following screen appears.
Lw Screen | Up Screen
+
¡ Keyboard Part 3 Part 4
€ Select +
2. Use Select < 4 > and < Y» > at the bottom of the screen to
choose the item you wish to set.
Setting Value
Lower Screen (Lw Screen) | Keyboard, Parts 1-16
Upper Screen (Up Screen) | Parts 1-16, OFF
3. Press < + > < 4 > next to the display to switch the part shown
in the display.
You can display two parts on the Upper Screen at the same time, so it might
be a good idea to choose the right-hand part and the left-hand part.
You can display just the part for one hand by choosing “OFF” for one or the
other.
When <Keyboard> is selected in the Lower Screen, the keyboard
performance appears.
After recording your performance, if you want to compare it with the model
performance again, all you have to do is to choose the part where you MEMD
recorded your performance.
7 For more information
about Parts, refer to
“Multitrack Recording with
button. 16 Parts (16-Track
You are returned to the Keyboard screen or Graph screen. Sequencer)” (p. 113).
4. When you're done making all the settings, press the [Exit]
81
Chapter 3 Some Handy Features
Adjusting the Tempo
You can change the tempo of a Music Style and a song.
Changing the tempo has no effect on the pitch of the notes. And you can
change the tempo even when the song is in progress.
— +
Tempo
Use the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the tempo.
* Pressing the [+] button once increases the tempo by one unit. Holding
down the button makes the tempo change (speed up) continuously.
* Pressing the [-] button once decreases the tempo by one unit. Holding
down the button makes the tempo change (slow down) continuously.
* Press |+] and [-] at the same time to return to the original tempo.
E Setting the Tempo by Pressing the Button in Time
82
You can determine the tempo by the timing with which you press the Pad
button. This feature is called “Tap Tempo.” By using the Tap Tempo
function, you can quickly set the tempo you are thinking of, without
specifying the tempo in numerical terms.
In order to use “Tap Tempo,” you need to assign the function to the Pad
buttons.
Style
Orchestrator
User
Press the [Style Orchestrator/User] button, extinguishing 1ts
indicator.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Pad 1 Pad 2
e
e
Tap Tempo Fade In; Cut | .
To assign “Tap Tempo” to Pad [1], press < + > < > located
at the left of the display. To assign it to Pad [2], press < 4 >
< 4 > located at the right of the display.
Chapter 3 Some Handy Features
Press the [Exit] button.
You are returned to the previous screen.
Tap, several times in succession, the pad button to which
you assigned “Tap Tempo.”
The tempo is set to the timing vou used when tapping the button.
Playing back with No Change in Tempo
If a song has difficult tempo changes, it can be effective to practice the song
first at an unchanging tempo. Playback of a song at a steady tempo that
doesn't change is called “Tempo Muting.”
Hold down the Stop [ M1] button and press either the Tempo
[-] or [+] button.
Now, songs are played back at an unchanging tempo.
When tempo muting is in effect, the tempo display will be highlighted.
PPT TE TEE
ETC TIN ITA НИ
ERIN RS
CL A
Laver
Again hold down the Stop [ 4] button and press either the
Tempo [-] or [+] button.
Tempo muting is canceled.
Tempo muting is also canceled if you select another song.
83
a
=
Q
o
=
®
he |
Lo
Chapter 3 Some Handy Features
Counting Down Before a Performance
Starts
84
When you're playing along with a song, you can make sure that your
playing is in time with the song by sounding a count before the song starts
playing.
This audible count before the playback of a song is called a “Count-In.”’
Press the [Marker/Count In] button.
A Marker screen like the one shown below appears.
ME 1h CA! Hew Sons
Options
К
К
5 :
г
E a EE EE a CCE EE OT
Press <Count In> at the right of the display.
The <Count In> display will be highlighted, and a two- -measure count will
be heard before the song plays back. | | |
EEE LE akan
O COL N
120
New Sono” :
ELL RAEE LEE
— Marker — B_ btions
RE EEE EEE TE te a IE ET EE EE EE
perce
Clear
To stop the count-in sound, press <Count In> at the right of
the display again.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the previous screen.
MEMO
You can change the
number of measures
counted and the type of
sound that you hear. See
“Changing the Settings for
the Marker and the Count
Sound” (p. 145).
Chapter 3 Some Handy Features
Preventing the Part to Be Practiced
from Sounding
With commercially available Music Files for piano lessons, the part for each
hand can be played back independently. This makes it easy to practice the
parts for each hand separately. For example, you could try to follow along
lightly with your right hand while you listen to that same right-hand part be
played; or you could practice the left-hand part while the right-hand part is
being played.
For instance, a Music File for piano lessons may be assigned to the five Track
buttons as shown below.
Composer.
Rhythm Whole Bass/Accomp Lower Upper
OOOO00
R 1 2 3 4
Rhythm/ Accompañi- Left-hand Right-hand
SFX ment Part Part Part a
By using these Track buttons, you can temporarily silence a specific Part.
Preventing specified Parts’ sound from being played is called “muting.”
By recording your own performances to the Track buttons in this fashion,
you can mute the Parts the same way.
Press any one of the Track buttons to make the button's
indicator light go dark.
The sound of the Track button you chose is muted out.
Press the Play [ » ] button.
The song is played back.
The sounds for the illuminated Track buttons are played, but no notes are
played for the Track button that is dark.
Press the dark Track button again to make the indicator light
come back on.
Now, you can hear the notes for the Track button that just lit up when you
pressed it.
NEMD
To learn more about Music
Files, refer to “Music Files
That the KR-377 Can Use”
(p. 178).
NEMD
If a single Track button
includes more than one
instrument, and you want
to mute out just one of
those instruments, take a
look at “Changing the
Settings for Each Part” (p.
115).
NEMD
You can change the volume
balance for the keyboard
and the song. Check out
“Changing the Volume
Balance for the
Accompaniment and
Keyboard” (p. 75).
85
Li)
o
Q
U
mp
®
-
Ww
Chapter 3 Some Handy Features
Practicing with Setting Markers in the Song
By setting markers at points in a song that you want to practice repeatedly, -
you can then easily move and repeatedly play back the selected measures.
HB Setting Markers in the Song/Erasing Markers
1.
2,
3.
4.
You can place two separate markers (Marker A and Marker B) in one song.
The marker is placed at the beginning of the bar. Placing markers is a handy
way to start playback at the same place as many times as you like.
Wait until this measure indication is no longer highlighted before setting
any markers.
Press the [Marker/Count In] button.
The Marker screen appears.
a
120
TEE
DD
rr
; у
rey YI Ne a e
AA NANA
Clear
Use the Bwd | ««] and Fwd [ »» ] buttons to move to where
you want to place the marker.
The measure number appears in the top-right area of the screen.
Press Marker <A> at the bottom of the display.
Marker A is placed at the beginning of the bar you moved to.
— in the screen will change to the number of the measure where you
placed the marker.
In the same way, move a position and press Marker <B> at
the bottom of the display. The marker B will be placed.
When you've placed a marker, the number of the measure with the marker
appears on screen.
1:120 Ба New Song
AAC PESE EEC
=
J
ry
Clear A
— Marker:
Press the [Exit] button to return to the previous screen.
Erasing a Marker
1.
86
At the Marker screen, while holding down the <Clear> at the
bottom of the screen, press the button below the marker you
wish to erase.
The marker disappears and the on-screen display changes to <—>.
The indication of the
measure number, which
appears in the upper right
of the screen, is highlighted
while a song is being
loaded.
NEMD
You can also add markers
in the same way or move to
a marker even while
playback is in progress.
(кото
You cannot place both
marker A and marker B at
the same location. Also,
you cannot place marker B
at a position earlier than
marker A.
MEMD
A marker is normally
placed at the beginning of
the measure, but you can
also place a marker at a
position part way through
a measure. Take a look at
“Placing a Marker in the
Middle of a Measure” (p.
145).
Chapter 3 Some Handy Features
E Playback from a Marker Location
1. At the Marker screen, press the button under the Marker (A
or B) you want to move.
The position from which playback will start is moved to the location where
marker A or marker B is set.
Clear AA A o Marker — EN IT] |
2. Press Play [ » | to play back the song from the Marker
location.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the previous screen.
E Moving a Marker
You can move a marker that has been placed in a song.
You can move the entire segment between Marker A and Marker B forward
a
-
Le
E
my
O
Le À
Le
or back, without changing the passage itself.
1. Atthe Marker screen, press the button below the marker (A
or B) you wish to move, and press <+>or<+>attheleftof
the display.
The measure number of the marker will change.
Simultaneously Moving Markers A and B
le Atthe Marker screen, press both buttons below markers
<A> and <B>, and then press < 4 > or < 4 > at the left of the
display. |
The passage between markers A and B will be preserved as the markers are
moved.
As an example, let's suppose that marker A is at the start of the fifth measure
and marker B is at the start of the ninth measure.
* Press < 4 > to shift marker A to the beginning of the ninth measure and
marker B to the beginning of the thirteenth measure.
Measure 1 2 3 a 5 e 7 8 Y 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
—
A. A
Marker A Marker B
* Press < + > to shift marker A to the beginning of the first measure and
marker B to the beginning of the fifth measure.
Mesure T 2 3 a 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Porn a RR EE A A
PO Ti y PAY
a ee
A A
Marker A Marker B
87
Chapter 3 Some Handy Features
Playing Back the Same Passage Over
and Over
1.
88
You can play back a particular passage repeatedly. This is convenient when
you want to practice the same passage a number of times.
Press the [Marker/Count In] button.
The Marker screen appears.
Place markers A and B to enclose the passage you want to
repeat.
For more info about placing markers, refer to p. 86.
For instance, suppose you want to play back the passage from the fifth
through eighth measures over and over. You should place marker A in the
fifth bar and marker B in the ninth bar.
Mesure 1 2 3 a 5 6 7 a 9 10 11 22 13 14 15 16
|
|
}
[ ! ! i | | l I ! I i
``”
A A
Marker A Marker B
Press <Repeat> at the right of the display.
The <Repeat> display will be highlighted, and the region from marker A to
marker B will be played back repeatedly.
J= E Е a Ne Song
Press the Play [ > ] button.
The passage from marker A to marker B is played repeatedly.
* If you don't place any markers, playback repeats from the beginning to
the end of the song.
* If you only place marker A, playback repeats from marker A to the end
of the song.
* If you only place marker B, playback repeats from the beginning of the
song to marker B.
To stop playback of the song, press the Stop [ ®] button.
To cancel the setting for repeated playback, press <Repeat> in the Marker
screen.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the previous screen.
Chapter 3 Some Handy Features
Transposing the Key of the Keyboard
(Key Transpose)
You can transpose the key of a performance without having to shift the
position of your fingers on the keyboard. This feature is called “Key
Transpose.”
This lets you take a song in a difficult key, with lots of sharps § and flats } ,
and play it in a key with fingering that’s easier for you. For instance, you can
play a tune in the key of E major with the keyboard fingering for the key of
C major.
In situations such as when providing accompaniment to a song, using the
Key Transpose function to match the singer's vocal register lets you easily
transpose the sounds without changing the score.
Display the basic screen, then press <Options> at the bottom
of the display.
The Arranger Menu screen appears.
Sa ranger Y
Split Point Pedal Setting
One Touch Setting lfrranger Config.
¢ Page №
If <Transpose> doesn’t appear on screen, press Page < 44 > < № > at the
bottom of the display to switch screens.
Press <Transpose> next to the display.
A Transpose screen like the one below appears.
0
To transpose the pitch of the keyboard, set the <Keyboard> value.
Use the < + > < # > located at the left of the display to select
the transposition value.
The available range is -6 to 0 to 5. |
As the value changes “1” unit, the pitch of the keyboard will change one
semitone.
When this is set to 0, the keyboard transposition will be
returned to the original key.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Arranger Menu screen.
Basic screen (p. 16)
NEMD
You can make the
“Transpose” settings in
<Customize> (p. 134) in the
Piano screen and
<Options> (p. 141) in the
Organ screen.
NERD
The transposition setting
returns to its original value
when you switch off the
power, or choose another
song.
89
Chapter 3 Some Handy Features
Example: Playing a song in E major with the keyboard fingering for C major
In this example, we'll consider the C note in the key of C major to be the
basic note. Counting from the tonic to the major third of C (E), there are four
keys, including the black keys, so set the value to “4.”
it will sound EG*B
ММ =
J
Changing the Key When Playing Back Songs
1.
90
You can transpose a song for playback.
Display the basic screen, then press <Options> at the bottom
of the display.
If <Transpose> doesn’t appear on screen, press Раре < «4 > < » > at the
bottom of the display to switch screens. |
Press <Transpose> next to the display.
A Transpose screen like the one below appears.
Keuboard Playback
0
To transpose the pitch of sounds for playback, set the <Playback> value.
Use < + > < 4 > at the right of the display to choose the value
by which to transpose.
The setting range is from -24 to 0 to +24.
As the value changes “1” unit, the pitch of the sound to be played back will
change one semitone.
When this is set to 0, the song transposition will be returned
to the original key.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Arranger Menu screen.
BE Basic screen (p. 16)
NEMD
You can make the
“Transpose” settings in
~ <Customize> (p. 134) in the
Piano screen and
<Options> (p. 141) in the
Organ screen.
The transposition setting
returns to its original value
when you switch off the
power, or choose another
song.
Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance
With the KR-377, you can use the five Track buttons to record a performance MEMD
easily, or use recording functions like the 16-track Sequencer to create full-
For an 10W
fledged ensemble songs. explanation of ho
to create an ensemble song,
refer to “Multitrack
® .
Recording Your Playing with Ease Recording with 16 Parts
" (16-Track Sequencer)” (p.
This records only what you play on the keyboard, without using Automatic 113).
Accompaniment.
The five buttons shown below are called Track buttons.
The recorded performance will be automatically assigned to the five Track
buttons according to the recorded part.
You can record or play back independently by specifying the desired Track
button; for example, when you wish to re-record a track.
Composer.
Rhythm Whole Bass/Accomp Lower Upper
00000
Rhythm/ Accompani- Left-hand Right-hand
SFX ment Part Part Part
A performance that does not use automatic accompaniment will be assigned
to the Track buttons as follows.
E71 [17 ie)
Track button
name
Performance recorded
[R/Rhythm] A percussion sound and SFX is recorded.
Performances without Automatic Accompaniment are
[1/Whole] normally recorded here. Layer Play (p. 47) perfor-
mance is also recorded here.
If automatic accompaniment is not used, this will not
[2/ |
be recorded. It can be recorded if you specify the track
Bass/Accomp] button for recording (p. 96).
[3/Lower] When you're using Split Play (p. 49), the Lower part is
recorded.
When you're using Split Play (p. 49), the Upper part is
[4/Upper] recorded. When Layer Play has been changed to Split
Play, Layer Tone (p. 47) is also recorded here.
A performance is normally recorded on the [1/ Whole] button, but you can
also specify a Track button to record it by pressing the track buttons.
91
Composer.
Menu Rhythm Whole Bass/Accomp Lower Upper Song Disk
R 1 2 3 4
la = > ® << >> . Marker
Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Count In
Step 1 Get ready to record
Press the [Song] button.
The Song screen appears.
Song List
CAL Play no & Page »
Press <0: > next to the display, get <0: New Song> to appear
in the display.
If <0: > doesn’t appear on screen, press Page < 44 > < HW > at the bottom of
the display to switch screens.
Press the One Touch Play [Piano] button.
Decide on the tone, tempo, and beat of the performance.
Use the Tone buttons and the buttons next to the display to choose the tone.
If necessary, press the [Metronome] button to play the metronome.
Press the Rec | € j button.
The Play [ >> ] button's indicator begin blinking, and the unit will be ready
for recording.
To stop recording, press the Stop [| M | button.
Step 2 Recording Your Performance
6.
92
Press the Play [ » ] button to start recording.
A two-bar count sound plays, then recording starts.
Recording will begin when you start playing the keyboard, even if you do
not press the Play button. In this case, the count will not be heard.
When recording begins, the Play [ » ] button's indicator changes to a
constant light.
Press the Stop [ E] button to stop recording.
МЕМЬ
For an explanation of how
to select the tempo and the
beat, refer to p. 52.
Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance
Listening to the Recorded Performance
1.
2,
3.
Press the Reset [ + ] button.
Now you can play back the song from the beginning.
Press the Play [> ] button.
The recorded performance is played back.
To stop playback, press the Stop [| M | button.
e If the following message appears
If you've recorded a tune in the internal memory, the following message
appears on the screen when you try to choose another song.
Delete Song ОК?
Cancel UR
If you don’t want to erase the song
Press <Cancel> at the bottom of the display.
Save the song on a floppy disk.
For information on how to save your song, see “Saving Songs to Floppy
Disks” (p. 104).
Erasing a song
Press <OK> at the bottom of the display.
The recorded performance or song whose settings have been changed is
erased.
Any performance that has
been recorded is deleted
when the power to the KR-
377 is turned off. If you
don’t want to lose your
recorded performance,
save it on a floppy disk. For
information on how to save
your song, see “Saving
Songs to Floppy Disks” (p.
104).
Until a recorded
performance is erased, you
can't listen to other tunes.
Check out “Erasing a
Recorded Song” (p. 97).
MN
=
=
E
=
(©
hae
H
93
Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance
Recording a Performance Using
Automatic Accompaniment
You can record the performance with Automatic Accompaniment.
A recorded performance is assigned to the Track buttons as follows.
Track butt
ack button Performance recorded
name
The rhythm part of an Automatic Accompaniment is
[R/Rhythm] recorded here. When a Tone set such as a drum set or
an SFX set has been chosen, it is also recorded here.
[1/Whole] When the Piano Style Arranger is active (p. 74), your
performance is recorded here.
[2/ The bass part of an Automatic Accompaniment and the
Bass/Accomp] | accompaniment part are recorded here.
With Automatic Accompaniment set to play along with
the sounds you play in the left part of the keyboard (p.
[3/Lower] ’ —
65), your own performance with the left hand is
recorded.
Your performance on the right-hand section of the key-
[4/Upper] board is recorded. Layer Tone (p. 47) is also recorded
here.
Composer.
Menu Rhythm Whole Bass/Accomp Lower Upper Song Disk
6 $6066 66
Ha mn > e + >> Marker
у U
Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd | Count In
Step 1 Get ready to record
1. Press the [Song] button.
The Song screen appears.
Song List
2. Press <0: > next to the display, get <0: New Song> to appear
in the display.
If <0: > doesn't appear on screen, press Page < 4 > < M > at the bottom of
the display to switch screens.
94
MEMD
A Music Style is made up
of five Parts. For more
information, see “Choosing
a Music Style” (p. 63).
Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance
Step 2 Get ready to play
3.
4,
7.
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
Press the Music Style button and the button next to the
display to choose the Music Style.
Press [Exit] button.
The Basic screen appears.
Use the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the tempo of the
accompaniment.
You can return to the original tempo of the selected style by pressing the
Tempo [-] and [+] buttons at the same time.
Press the Rec [ e] button.
The piano enters recording standby.
To stop recording, press the Stop [ M | button.
Step 3 Start recording
8.
Play a chord on the lower keyboard section.
Automatic Accompaniment starts, and recording is started at the same time.
Step 4 Stop recording
9.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
An ending is played, then the Automatic Accompaniment stops, and
recording is stopped at the same time.
Listening to the Recorded Performance
2
3.
Press the Reset [ < ] button.
Now you can play back the song from the beginning.
Press the Play [> ] button.
The recorded performance is played back.
To stop playback, press the Stop [ ® | button.
MEMp
You can change how
CM
a
e
©
=
®
р.
+
recording is stopped when
recording a performance
with Automatic
Accompaniment. To learn
how, see “Changing How
Recording Stops” (p. 98).
95
Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance
Redoing a Recording
96
Redoing a recording involves specifying a Track button you want to record
over and then recording over again.
When you select a Track button and record over a track that has already
been recorded, the newly recorded performance occupies a position
extending from the location where you started recording to where you
stopped recording.
Composer.
Menu Rhythm Whole Bass/Accomp Lower Upper Song Disk
A 1 2 3 4
Ha = > . «4 >> Marker
Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Count In
Use the Reset [ « ], BWd [ << | and Fwd [| >» | buttons to
move to the measure where you want to redoing a recording.
Press the Rec [ € ] button.
To stop recording, press the Stop [ M | button.
Press the Track button for the track you want to record over.
The indicator for the selected Track button starts blinking.
The Play [ > ] button's indicator begin blinking, and the unit will be ready
for recording.
Begin recording.
If you are re-recording a piece with Automatic Accompaniment, specify a
chord in the left-hand section of the keyboard, or press the [Start/Stop]
button. If you don’t use Automatic Accompaniment, press the [Sync/ Reset]
button to extinguish the indicator, and then press the Play | » ] button.
Press the Stop [ # ] button to stop recording.
To record the ending over again, press the [Intro/Ending] button.
МЕМЬ
If you want to erase a
previous performance
entirely before recording
over it, take a look at
“Erasing the Sound
Recorded on Individual
Track Buttons” (p. 97).
NEMD
The song's basic tempo is
determined when the song
is first recorded. Even
when each track is
recorded over with the
tempo changed, the song is
played back at the tempo
selected when the song was
first recorded. To change
the tempo of a song that
has already been recorded,
see “Changing a Song's
Basic Tempo” (p. 117).
Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance
Erasing a Recorded Song
1.
You can erase a song that’s been recorded.
While holding down the [Song] button, press the Rec [ ® ]
button. -
The following screen appears.
Ое{е!е Song OK?
Are you sure ?
Cancel
Press <OK> at the bottom of the display to erase the
recorded song.
If you press <Cancel> at the bottom of the display, the recorded song is not
erased.
E Erasing the Sound Recorded on Individual Track
Buttons
1.
You can erase the sound recorded to an individual Track button.
While holding down the Track button where the sound you
want to erase is recorded, press the Rec [ ® ] button.
The selected Track button's light goes dark, and the recorded sound is
erased.
ñ
М
Q
oO
pr
o
Бы 1
>
(NOTE)
You can't erase the settings
for the recorded song's
basic tempo or beat.
97
Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance
Changing How Recording Stops
1.
98
You can change how recording is stopped when recording a performance
with Automatic Accompaniment.
Press the [Menu] button and confirm that its indicator has
lighted.
The Composer Menu screen appears.
If <Rec Mode> doesn’t appear on screen, press Page < 44 > < br > at the
bottom of the display to switch screens.
Press <Rec Mode> next to the display.
The following screen appears.
Rec Stop
Arranger
Use < # > <¥ > at the right of the display to select <Rec
Stop> “Arranger” or “Composer.”
Indication Description
When Aut i i re i
Arranger en Automatic Accompaniment stops, recording
also stops at the same time.
Recording doesn’t end when Automatic Accompani-
Composer ment stops. Press the Stop [ M ] button to stop record-
ing.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Composer Menu screen.
Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance
Recording Songs Starting with Pickups
You can record songs that start with pickups. Songs that begin on a beat
other than the downbeat are called “songs with pickups.”
Press the [Song] button, getting the indicator to light.
The Song screen appears.
Select <0: > to display <0: New Song>.
If <0: > doesn’t appear on screen, press Page < 4 > < M > at the bottom of
the display to switch screens.
Press [Exit] button several times.
The Basic screen appears.
Press the Rec [ ® ] button, getting the button’s indicator to
light.
The piano enters recording standby.
Press the Bwd [ << ] button once.
The measure number at the top-right area of the basic screen changes to
Mili
}
}
i
J
TT
—+
Tin
++
FRE
Measure -2 PU 1
Recording begins here
To stop recording, press the Stop [| € ] button.
99
a
="
Q
Ne.
e
®
=
La
Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance
Composing an Accompaniment by
Entering Chords (Chord Sequencer)
This indicates the position
You can enter its chord progression, the places where the accompaniment
pattern changes, and so on to create an accompaniment for the song. This
feature is called “Chord Sequencer.”
Thanks to the chord sequencer, you can create an accompaniment ahead of
time and play along with this accompaniment using just your right hand.
This makes it convenient to enjoy Automatic Accompaniment.
Press the [Menu] button and confirm that its indicator has
lighted.
The Composer Menu screen appears.
Press <Chord Sequencer> next to the display.
If <Chord Sequencer> doesn’t appear on screen, press Page < #4 > <> at
the bottom of the display to switch screens.
The screen like the one shown below is called “Chord Sequencer screen.”
This is the “cursor”
The cursor shows where
the chord change or other
information is input.
where the accompaniment
pattern (Division) or the
Style Orchestrator changes.
100
Indication Description
One measure is inserted before the measure indicated by
<ins>
the cursor.
<Del> This deletes the measure indicated by the cursor.
This clears the settings in the measure where the cursor is
<Cir> es
positioned.
You can input the chord without playing the keyboard.
<Chord> For details, refer to “Inputting Chords Without Playing
the Keyboard” (p. 102).
This records the accompaniment you have composed.
<Execute> Press this button when you have finished creating all your
input.
Use the Music Style button and the button next to the
display to choose the Music Style.
Press the [Exit] button.
You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen.
This is the end of the
song. When continuing
to add input, insert
measures by touching
о <Ins>. -
5.
Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance
Enter the chord progression and the accompaniment pattern.
Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer
Change the accompaniment arrangements
Style Music Style
Orchestrator Ballad Rock Oldies Courdry Big Band /Swing Latin Waltz March/Kds Trad Disk/User
User
1 2 — Sync intro nt Down Start
U U | U у ) Ü Lu
Pad J Fil in Reset WN Ending” Stop
Select the accompaniment pattern (Division)
1. Press the Bwd [ << ] and Fwd [ »» ] buttons to move the cursor to the
position for the data to be inserted.
Press < 4 > < Y > at the bottom of the display to move the cursor half a bar.
2. Enter the chord progression and the changes in the accompaniment
pattern and arrangement.
Just as when performing with Automatic Accompaniment, press the
keys to specify a chord, and press a button to select the accompaniment
pattern (p. 70). You can change the accompaniment arrangement with
the [Style Orchestrator/ User] button (p. 71).
3. Pressing <Ins> at the left of the display once inserts a measure before
the bar where the cursor is located.
Conversely, pressing <Del> at the right of the display deletes the
measure containing the cursor and moves the cursor to the next bar.
4. To clear data you have input, move the cursor to the position for the data
to be removed, then press <Clear> at the left of the display.
This deletes the entered setting.
Check the Accompaniment You Inserted
Here's how to play back the accompaniment as far as you input it.
1. Press the Reset [ <q] button to go back the beginning of the
accompaniment.
2. Press the Play [ » ] button to play back the accompaniment.
3. Press the Stop { M ] button to stop playback.
When you have finished inputting all the data, press
<Execute> at the bottom of the display.
The accompaniment you've composed is registered at “0:New Song.”
Press the Play | » | button and try fingering the melody while the
accompaniment you've composed is played back.
EMP
Pressing the [To Variation]
button or the [To Original]
button adds a fill-in at the
cursor position and a
Variation or Original
Division at the measure
after the fill-in. If you want
— to enter a Variation or
Original Division without
inserting a fill-in, you need
to assign the function to the
pedal. See “Assigning a
Function to Pad Buttons or
Pedals” (p. 139).
МЕМЬ
To insert fractional chords
such as Fm/C, assign the
“Leading Bass function” to
a pedal. See “Assigning a
Function to Pad Buttons or
Pedals” (p. 139).
МЕМЬ
You can only insert an intro
at the beginning of a song.
When you add an intro, the
number of bars
corresponding to the length
of the intro is inserted
automatically.
NEMD
If you assign the function
to a pedal, you can insert a
break in the middle of a
song. See “Assigning a
Function to Pad Buttons or
Pedals” (p. 139).
МЕМЬ
Songs you've created are
discarded as soon as you
turn off the power. If you
don’t want to lose it, you
should save it on a floppy
disk. Take a look at “Saving
Songs to Floppy Disks” (p.
104).
101
nN
=
û
ие |
fd
®
La |
Вы)
Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance
AA A —_—"—"—"—"—"—"—"—_—_———
Inputting Chords Without Playing the Keyboard
You can use <Chord> in the Chord Sequencer screen to specify chords on
the screen.
1. Atthe Chord Sequencer screen, press <Chord> at the bottom
of the display.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
° Use Select < 4 > and < № > at the bottom of the screen to
choose the item you wish to set.
Press < + > < + > next to the display to make the setting for
the item.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to specify the chord.
ин © N
Press <Execute> at the bottom of the display to input the
chord.
You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen.
Erasing ail the accompaniment you created
1. Inthe Chord Sequencer screen, hold down <Clr> and press
<Execute>.
All the data you input will be erased.
102
Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance
Creating a Rhythm Part with Ease
The KR-377 has a large number of onboard rhythm patterns. You can use
these onboard rhythm patterns to create a rhythm part with ease.
Press the [Menu] button, getting its indicator to light.
The Composer Menu screen appears.
Press <Rhythm Pattern> next to the display.
If <Rhythm Pattern> doesn't appear on screen, press Page <q > <p > at
the bottom of the display to switch screens.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
140 a 4/4 №: т,
4 ir É Beat 3 (2)
Play « Page №
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Composer Menu screen.
Press the button next to the display to choose the rhythm
pattern.
Rhythm patterns are shown in the format “name (number of bars).”
You can switch the displayed rhythm pattern by pressing Раре < «4 > < № >
at the bottom of the display.
Press <Play> at the bottom of the display to hear the rhythm
pattern.
Make sure the rhythm pattern you hear is the one you chose.
Press <Stop> to stop playing the rhythm pattern.
Press the Rec [ 6 ] button, getting the button's indicator to
light.
The piano enters recording standby.
When the rhythm pattern is playing, performance of the rhythm pattern
stops and the KR-377 is ready for recording.
Press the Play [ > ] button.
The rhythm pattern begins to play, and at the same time, recording starts.
Record rhythm patterns for the necessary number of measures.
Press the Stop [ mM] button.
The rhythm pattern stops, and recording ends.
MEMP
For more information
about onboard rhythm
patterns, please refer to
“Rhythm Pattern List” (p.
173).
MEMP
The rhythm pattern is
recorded to the [R/
Rhythm] Track button or
Part D (10) of the 16-track
sequencer (p. 113).
Г |
-
Le
и.
„щи
4]
=
pe
MEMp
If the [R/ Rhythm] button's
indicator isn't blinking,
press the [R/ Rhythm]
button so it starts blinking.
NEMD
You can also paste a
rhythm pattern into a song
without recording
anything. Take a look at
“Copying a Rhythm
Pattern” (p. 121).
103
Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance
Saving Songs to Floppy Disks
The performance data recorded in the KR-377 will be lost when you switch
to another song or when the power is turned off.
Be sure to save unfinished performance data, as well as other important
performance data onto a floppy disk.
E Formatting Floppy Disks (Format)
104
New floppy disks or disks that have been used on another device cannot be
used with the KR-377 just as they are. The operation that readies floppy
disks for use with the KR-377 is called “Format.”
If a floppy disk is in a format that doesn’t match the format of this unit, you
won't be able to use that floppy disk.
Make sure the write-protect tab on the floppy disk is
positioned at “WRITE” (write enabled).
= 4 Rear side of the disk
O o
Write
(can write new data onto disk)
af e H |
Write Protect Tab “Protect
(prevents writing to disk)
With the label of the floppy disk facing upward, insert it
into the disk drive until it clicks into position.
Press the [Disk] button.
The Disk Menu screen appears.
ne aE
CES = OO:
is enu Re
CTN PUERTA E
K
Save User Program Е
EUser Program Load |
4 Page mw
If <Format> doesn’t appear on screen, press Page < 44 > < M4 > at the bottom
of the display to switch screens.
(NOTE
If you're using the disk
drive for the first ime, be
sure to read the important
notes on p. 6.
Formatting a disk destroys
all data previously stored
on the disk. If you're
| formatting a used floppy
CL disk for reuse, be sure to
check first to make sure the
disk doesn't contain any
data you don't want to lose.
Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance
Press <Format> next to the display.
The following screen appears.
Format |
Format disk ОК?
Cancel | ОК |
Press <Cancel> at the bottom of the display to go back to the Disk Menu
screen.
Press <OK> at the bottom of the display to start formatting.
When formatting finishes, the Disk Menu screen reappears.
Press the [Exit] button several times to go back to the previous screen.
E Saving Songs on Floppy Disk
A recorded performance is discarded when you switch off the power, or
choose another song. The process of storing data such as recorded
performances on floppy disk is called “saving.” It's a good idea to store
important songs on floppy disk.
When using a brand-new floppy disk on the unit, first you have to format it
using the KR-377. Take a look at “Formatting Floppy Disks (Format)” (p.
104).
Step 1 Insert the floppy disk in the disk drive
2,
Make sure the write-protect tab on the floppy disk is
positioned at “WRITE” (write enabled).
For details, refer to p. 104.
With the label of the floppy disk facing upward, insert it
into the disk drive until it clicks into position.
Step 2 Assign a number and name to the song
3.
Press the [Disk] button.
The Disk Menu screen appears.
If <Song Save> doesn’t appear on screen, press Page < # > <> at the
bottom of the display to switch screens.
Press <Song Save> next to the display.
Don't try to take the floppy
disk out of the disk drive
until the formatting process
is finished.
NEMO
If “Error” appears on
screen, take a look at “If
this Message Appears on
Screen” (p. 160).
MEMP
If not handled with care, a
floppy disk can get
cracked, or the data on it
can get corrupted, making
playback impossible. We
recommend saving your
0
pe:
Q
0
ho
®
=
pe
songs on two different
floppy disks. By putting
away for safekeeping an
additional copy of a floppy
disk on which your songs
are saved, you can feel
safer.
Inserting a floppy disk
containing one or more
saved data into another
device (such as a computer)
with the floppy disk's
protect tab left in the
“write” position may,
depending on the device,
render the songs on that
floppy disk permanently
unplayable (refer to the
cautions on p. 6).
Some commercially
available music files cannot
be saved because they are
copyrighted.
105
Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Song Save
I+ 1:
4 As SHE Save
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Disk Menu screen.
Press < 4> <p > to scroll the cursor sideways, and enter the
name of the song by using < + > < ¥ > at the left of the
display to choose the letters.
After you've entered the name of the song, press <+><+>
at the right of the display to choose a song number.
When you select a song number thatis already being used for another song,
the name of the song appears in the save destination column. If you then
proceed to save the new material to that song, the song previously saved in
that destination is erased, and the new song is saved in its place. If you don’t
want to erase a previously saved song, choose a number where no song
name appears in the destination column.
Step 3 Save the song
7.
106
Press <Save> or <As SMF> at the bottom of the display to
start saving.
The resulting file format will be different depending on whether <Save> or
<As SMF> is chosen, as described below.
Indication Description
Saves the song in KR-377 format. You can listen to
songs saved in this format on the Roland HP-G series
and KR series keyboards as well as on Roland MT
series devices. This formatis called “i-format”.
Save
Saves the song as a SMF (Standard MIDI File). Songs
As SMF saved in this SMF format can be listened to on many
instruments that can play SMF music files (p. 178).
Saving may take from several seconds, to several dozen seconds.
When the saving process is finished, the Disk Menu screen appears.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen.
If you save with the
Compatibility function
turned “GS,” the
performance may differ
slightly from the original
recording when played
back on the KR-377. For
more about the
Compatibility function,
please refer to “Changing
the Tone Set When You
Save (Compatibility
Function)” (p. 107).
Depending on the playback
instrument, some notes
may drop out or sound
different.
You can only save songs in
one format on a single
floppy disk. And a song
recorded using commercial
music files can't be saved in
“Save As SMF” format for
reasons of copyright
protection.
Don't take the floppy disk
out of the disk drive until
the saving process is
finished,
MEMD
It's a good idea to get into
the habit of moving the
write-protect tab on the
floppy disk to the “Protect”
position when you've
finished saving your data.
Keeping the tab at
“Protect” prevents
operations that could erase
your songs by mistake.
Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance
E Changing the Tone Set When You Save
(Compatibility Function)
For maximum richness and realism, some of the Tones are unique to the KR-
377. Data that is recorded using these tones may not play back correctly on
other devices. If you wish to save the data in a form that can be played back
on other GS instruments, turn Compatibility “GS” when you save the data.
1 e Press the [Disk] button.
2. Press <Compatibility> located at the side of the display.
If <Compatibility> is not displayed, press Page < #1 > < M > located below
the display to switch screens.
The following screen will appear.
OMPatibility®
Saves the data using sounds
A
exclusive to the KR377,for rich,
fexpressive performances.
Compatible Explanation
Data is saved in a form that can also be played on GS
GS instruments other than the KR-377.
Data is saved in a form that will reproduce the perfor-
KR mance using expressive tones found only on the KR-
377.
3. Use the button at the left of the display to choose <GS> or
<KR>.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Disk Menu screen.
0
-
Q
v
a
К
-
da
(чот
If the Compatibility
function is “GS” when you
save the data, the
performance may differ
slightly from the original
recording when played
back on the KR-377.
107
Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance
Deleting Data from Floppy Disks
108
You can erase songs, User Styles, or User Programs saved on the floppy disk
(p. 132).
Make sure the write-protect tab on the floppy disk is
positioned at “WRITE” (write enabled).
Refer to p. 104.
Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.
Press the [Disk] button.
The Disk Menu screen appears.
If <Delete Disk File> doesn’t appear on screen, press Page < 4 > <M > at the
bottom of the display to switch screens. a
Select <Delete Disk File>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
= Disk File Delete
1: Mew Song |
| Stule UserProa. Execute
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Disk Menu screen.
Mona
Press any one of the <Song>, <Style> or <User Program>
buttons to select the type of data to be deleted.
Use < # > <# > at the left of the display to choose the data to
be deleted.
Press <Execute> at the bottom of the display to display a
message like the one shown below.
Delete file OK?
“x
Are you sure 7
Cancel OK
Press <OK>.
The file selected is deleted.
Pressing <Cancel> cancels deleting the file.
Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance
Changing the Order of Songs on Floppy Disk
Here's how you can change the order of songs saved on a floppy disk. МЕМФ
1. Have ready an empty, formatted floppy disk. For more about formatting,
take a look at “Formatting
2 . e. niega Floppy Disks (Formaty” (p.
e Insert the floppy disk containing the saved songs into the 104)
disk drive.
Je Press the [Song] button.
4. Press the button next to the display to choose the song you NOTE
want to make song number 1. The measure number of the
screen appears highlighted
5 e When you select the song, press the [Exit] button some times while the KR-377 reads the
to display the Basic screen (p. 16). song data from floppy disk.
Don't take the floppy disk
Display the screen where the measure number appears in the top-right area
out of the drive until the
of the screen. . :
display returns to its
original state.
e Press the Play [ » ] button.
The measure number on the screen appears highlighted.
+ When the measure number display returns to its original
N
="
2
ke]
зади
o
-
iY
appearance, press the Stop [ ®] button.
Take the floppy disk out of the disk drive.
Insert a blank floppy disk.
= ON ©
O. Save the song in the usual way (p. 104).
Repeat these steps to save the song you want to have song number 2, the
song you want to have song number 3, and so on to the blank floppy disk in
the desired song sequence.
109
Chapter 5 Advanced Recording Functions
In addition to the functions introduced in “Chapter 4
Recording and Saving Performances,” the KR-377 features a
variety of other recording functions that allow you to record
more advanced performance data with even greater
efficiency.
Selecting the Recording Method
You can use any of the four methods below to record with
the KR-377.
Although you will normally be using “Replace Recording,”
whereby previously recorded material is erased when new
sounds are recorded, you'll find that you can record songs
easily by using this method in combination with other
recording methods.
* Replace Recording
This is the normal method for recording. New material is
recorded as previously recorded material is erased.
+ Mix Recording (p. 110)
New notes are recorded on top of notes previously
recorded.
This convenient feature makes it easy for you to record
the melodies you play over prerecorded accompaniment.
« Loop Recording (p. 111)
Specified measures are recorded repeatedly, with new
notes being combined with existing ones.
À convenient feature for creating rhythm parts, Loop
Recording allows you to record over and over within a
selected segment, with a different percussion sound
added with each pass.
< Punch-in Recording (p. 112)
You can re-record only a specified passage as you listen
to a recorded performance.
* Immediately after the power is turned on, Replace Recording is
selected.
E How to Choose the Recording
Method
1. Press the [Menu] button.
The Composer Menu screen appears.
‘Rhuthm Pattern
[If <Rec Mode> doesn’t appear on screen, press Page
< 44 > < bb > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens.
2. Press <Rec Mode> next to the display.
110
A Recording Mode screen like the one shown below
appears.
Rec Mode Rec Stop
| Replace | Arranger
3. Press < + > < 4 > at the left of the display to
choose the recording type of <Rec Mode>.
Display Recording Method
Replace Replace Recording
Mx Mix Recording
Loop Loop Recording
LS. JC CO
Punch In Recording at the passage
between the markers.
EOL A EEE OO NOOO OE O O Ww MW om om BBW mW mm A A AO O BO OO AO EN
Manual Punch In/Out Punch In Recording starts at the
place where you depress the pedal
or press the button.
Tempo You can add tempo changes to a
recorded composition. See p. 117.
E Recording While Erasing the
Previous Recording
(Replace Recording)
Recording whereby you erase previously recorded material
as you record something new is called “Replace Recording.’
This setting is in effect when you turn on the power.
1. From the Recording Mode screen, choose
“Replace.”
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen.
The piano enters Replace Recording mode. |
Follow the recording method in Chapter 4 (p. 91) or the
procedures described in “Multitrack Recording with 16
Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 113) to record the
performance.
HB Overdubbing Without Erasing
the Previous Recording
(Mix Recording)
You can record a performance layered over a previously
recorded performance. This method is called “Mix
Recording.” |
1. From the Recording Mode screen, choose “Mix.”
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen.
The recording method changes to mixing recording.
Record the performance, following the procedures
described in “Redoing a Recording” (p. 96) or
“Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts (16-Track
Sequencer)” (p. 113).
* After you have finished with mix recording, return to the
usual replace recording mode.
Chapter 5 Advanced Recording Functions
|
NM Repeatedly Recording Over
the Same Location (Loop
Recording)
You can record a specified passage over and over again as
many times as you like, layering the sound with each pass.
This method is called “Loop Recording.” This is handy when
recording a Rhythm Part.
For example, use this method to make a Loop Recording of a
four-measure segment.
First record the bass drum, the snare drum next, then the hi-
hat after that, and so on, repeatedly layering a different
instrument onto the same four measures. After you have
finished recording the four-measure rhythm pattern, you can
then just use the procedure in “Copying a Measure” (p. 120)
to create as many copies of the four measures as you need,
making completion of the Rhythm Part very simple.
1. Place A and B markers at the beginning and end
of the passage you want to record.
Take a look at “Setting Markers in the Song /Erasing
Markers” (p. 86).
If you haven't recorded anything yet, then perform
“Blank Recording” for the necessary number of
measures before placing the markers.
What is Blank Recording? a
Blank Recording is the recording of blank measures, that
is, measures with no performance recorded to them.
1. Set the basic tempo and beat of the song.
2. Hold down the Rec [ @ ] button, then press the
Play [ > ] button.
The indicators for the Rec [ ® ] and Play [> ]
buttons light up, and recording starts.
3. Without actually playing anything, record the
necessary number of measures, then press the
Stop [ H ] button.
The indicators for the Rec [ 6 ] and Play [ » |
No buttons go dark, and recording stops. A
2. From the Recording Mode screen (p. 110), choose
“Loop.”
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen.
The recording method changes to loop recording.
3. Press the Rec [ @ ] button.
The piano enters recording standby.
4. Press the Play [ » ] button to start recording.
Recording starts from the measure in which Marker A
was placed.
When the song advances to Marker B, it then returns to
Marker A, where recording continues.
Each time the recording is looped, the sounds being
played are layered over the sounds recorded on previous
passes.
5. Press the Stop [ M ] button to stop recording.
* When you're finished with Loop Recording, return to the
ordinary Replace Recording mode at the Recording Mode
screen (p. 110).
Loop Recording Shortcut \
You can also use the method described below to make
the setting for Loop Recording.
1. Place A and B markers at the beginning and end
of the passage you want to record.
Take a look at “Setting Markers in the Song /Erasing
Markers” (p. 56).
If you haven't recorded anything yet, then perform
“Blank Recording” for the necessary number of
measures before placing the markers.
2. From the Marker screen (p. 86), press <Repeat>
at the right of the display.
This sets the loop recording mode.
Start a recording.
* When Loop Recording is finished, remember to press the
button at the right of <Repeat> in the “Marker screen”
once more to return to the usual Replace Recording mode.
N A
111
Chapter 5 Advanced Recording Functions
E Re-Recording Part of Your
Performance (Punch-in
Recording)
You can re-record only a specified passage as you listen to a
recorded performance.
This recording method is called “Punch-in Recording.”
This function lets you record over only a specified pointina
part, as you listen to a prerecorded performance in another
section. This is a very convenient feature to have in situations
such as when you want to record over only one part of the
melody.
Punch-In Recording offers the foliowing two methods.
* Recording the passage specified by markers A and B
(Auto Punch In/Out)
Before you start recording, place markers A and B to
define the passage you want to record over. Make the
setting for punch-in recording, and carry out recording.
You can re-record just the passage between markers A
and B.
* Beginning recording at the point where either the
button or the pedal is pressed (Manual Punch In/Out)
You can play back a recorded performance and depress
the pedal at the desired place to start recording.
Depressing the pedal a second time cancels recording
and returns you to playback. |
If using the buttons, press the Pad button or the Rec
[ @ ] button when you reach the designated point in the
song to begin recording.
Pressing the Pad button or the Rec | @ ] button a second
time cancels recording and returns you to playback.
* To use this method, first you need to change how the pad
button or pedal works. See “Assigning a Function to Pad
Buttons or Pedals” (p. 139),
Recording a Passage specified by
markers
1. Before you start recording, place markers A and B
to define the passage you want to record over.
Following the procedures described in “Setting Markers
in a Song,” use Markers A and B to specify the passage.
2. From the Recording Mode screen (p. 110), choose
“Auto Punch In/Out.”
Rec Mode Rec Stop
o
rre
Auto _ |
| Punch In/Qut | Arranger
112
This changes the recording mode to “Punch-In
Recording.”
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen.
3. Begin recording.
Start recording as described in “Redoing a Recording”
(p. 9%).
Up until the specified passage, the performance as
already recorded is played back.
When you reach the specified passage, sounds are erased
as recording starts; begin playing now.
When the end of the specified passage is passed,
recording stops, and the KR-377 returns to playback of
the performance already recorded.
4. Press the Stop [ M] button to stop playback.
Starting Recording from the Measure
Specified by Buttons and Pedals
* First you need to assign the “Punch In/Out” function to pad
buttons or pedals.
See “Assigning a Function to Pad Buttons or Pedals” (p. 139).
—
т
From the Recording Mode screen (p. 110), choose
“Manual Punch In/Out.”
This changes the recording mode to “Punch-In
Recording.”
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen.
2. Begin recording.
Start recording as described in “Redoing a Recording”
(p. 96).
The performance that you recorded will be played back.
Press the Rec [ € ] button or the Pad button to which the
function has been assigned, or depress the pedal and
recording will start. Start playing the music you are
recording.
Pressing the Rec [ @ | button or the Pad button or the
pedal once more stops the recording, and previously
recorded material is played back.
3. Press the Stop [ M ] button to stop playback.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen.
* When you're finished with Punch In Recording, return to the
ordinary Replace Recording mode at the Recording Mode
screen (p. 110).
* When you press the One Touch Program [Piano] button, the
functioning of the pedals returns the pedals to their usual
functions (p. 14). If you record the piano performance using
the One Touch Program [Piano] button, use the button for the
punch in recording.
Chapter 5 Advanced Recording Functions
Multitrack Recording with 16
Parts (16-Track Sequencer)
Multitrack recording is a method of recording whereby you
listen to previously recorded material while continuing to
add performances of other parts.
The KR-377 is capable of multitrack recording of up to
sixteen parts. Since each part's performance is recorded
using one tone, you can layer performances, using up to
sixteen tones for the data in one song.
The function used to layer these sixteen parts one at a time is
called the “16 Track Sequencer.”
16 Track Sequencer and Track Buttons
In addition to the “16 Track Sequencer” function, the “Track
Buttons” are another of the unit's recording functions.
These “Track buttons” comprise five buttons used for
organizing the 16 Track Sequencer’s sixteen parts. This
allows you to use the 16 Track Sequencer to add even more
sounds to performances recorded with the Track buttons,
and make even more detailed edits of the songs.
Additionally, you can easily play back the original song data
with the 16 Track Sequencer, mute parts just by pressing the
Track buttons, and more.
The track buttons correspond to 16-track sequencer parts as
shown below.
Track button Part
[R/Rhythm] __ D(0), SAT)
CC are ee ee eeen
[2/Bass/Accomp] 2,5 to 9,12 to 16 LS
[town 3 nn
[4/Upper] д
Since the 16 Track Sequencer records one tone to one part,
you cannot use Layer Play (p. 47), Split Play (p. 49), or other
such functions to record two or more tones simultaneously.
Also, you can’t record the performance with Automatic
Accompaniment.
When vou want to record with Automatic Accompaniment,
then you should use the Track buttons for recording. (Refer
to “Recording a Performance Using Automatic
Accompaniment” (p. 94).
Commercially Available Music Files
Commercially available song data recorded in Roland's SMF
format is also composed of sixteen parts.
By loading the song data from the floppy disk and using the
16 Track Sequencer, vou can then also edit the song data.
* Although Part 11 on commercial Roland SMF music data 1s
included in Hie [2/Bass/Accomp] Track button, the
correspondence between all other parts and the Track buttons
remains unchanged.
* With some commercially available music files, you cannot edit
the data.
B The 16-track Sequencer Screen
When recording with 16-track Sequencer, display the 16-
track Sequencer screen.
1. Press the [Menu] button.
If <16Tr Sequencer> doesn’t appear on screen, press
Page < 44 > < pp > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens.
2. Press <16Tr Sequencer>.
A screen like the one shown below appears. This is
called the “16-track Sequencer screen.”
‚ Piano 3 474 M: i
J TET) e
“Сеск > В Options :
Indication Description
Use Select < 4 > < p > located below the
display to choose the part that you wish to
<1>-<16>
record or whose settings you wish to
change. The selected Part will be enclosed
by a heavy square.
O AN A AR O OO OOO 6 6 A A O A Wm OR Wm BW EM Bm WM TE Wm MM ew
DOM tr a We N WE UNO NO ONO NOEL AA O OOO E OE O UU UU
E)... meratiobepiedraco
=o The Part not to be played back (Muted Part)
[1] Parts that do not have performance data
een recorded to em, ean.
So. Only the selected Part is played back
<Clear> ___ Erases the performance data for the Part.
<Mute> This allows you to prevent the sound for the
ean selected part from playing. LL...
<Options> Displays the Part Settings screen, in which
you can make detailed settings for each
part. For details, refer to p. 115.
113
Chapter 5 Advanced Recording Functions
E Recording with the 16 Track
Sequencer
Step 1 Get ready to record
1. Press the [Song] button.
2. Select the song number to which you want to
record.
To record a new song, select <0: > to display <0: New
Song>.
If <0: > doesn’t appear on screen, press Page < 44 >
< pp > at the bottom of the display to switch screens.
If you have recorded a song or changed a song's settings,
the message “Delete Song OK?” appears on the screen
when you press <0:New Song>. For more information,
take a look at “e If the following message appears” (p.
93).
3. Press the [Metronome] button to choose the beat
(p. 57).
If you don't need the metronome sound, press the
[Metronome] button a second time.
4. Press the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to set the
basic tempo of the song.
* This procedure cannot be used to change the tempo when
prerecorded song data is used.
To change the basic tempo of a song, please refer to "Changing
a Song's Basic Tempo” (p. 117).
You cannot make changes to the beat of a song after it has been
recorded.
* You can’t change a song's beat once it's been recorded. If you
want to compose a song whose beat changes partway through
the song, take a look at “Composing a Song That Changes the
Beat Partway Through” (p. 116).
Step 2 Start recording
If necessary, choose a recording method.
For more information, take a look at p. 110 through p. 112.
If you record for the first time, there's no need to select the
recording method.
1. Display the 16-track Sequencer screen.
Follow the procedure described in “16 Track Sequencer
Screen” above.
2. Press Select < 4 > and < P > at the bottom of the
display to choose the number of the Part to which
you wish to record.
The selected Part will be enclosed by a heavy square.
You can only record drum sounds or effect sounds on
Part D (10) or Part $ (11).
114
3. Use the Tone buttons to choose a Tone to play.
To record a drum sound or effect sound, press the
[Drums /SFX] button (p. 44).
After you've chosen a Tone, press the [Exit] button to
display the 16-track Seguencer screen.
4. Press the Reset [ H ] button.
This makes it so that recording starts at the beginning of
the song.
When you want to start recording from a point in the
song other than the beginning, use the Bwd [ «q | or
Fwd [ »»> | button to select the measure from which to
start.
5. Press the Rec [ 6 ] button, getting the button's
indicator to light.
The piano enters recording standby.
6. Press the Play [ > ] button.
A two-bar count-in sounds, then recording starts.
Start a recording.
7. Press the Stop [ M ] button.
Recording stops.
When the recording of one part is finished, select another
part and continue by recording that part.
Record the parts you need, layering each additional part,
to complete the song.
* You only need to follow the procedure described in “Step 1 Get
ready to record” when you're recording the first Part. For the
second Part and after, you can skip step 1 and proceed from
“Step 2 Start recording.”
* The song you ve recorded disappears when you switch off the
power. Save the song on a floppy disk. For more information,
see “Saving Songs to Floppy Disks” (p. 104).
Chapter 5 Advanced Recording Functions
Changing the Settings for
Each Part
When you ve recorded a song with the 16-track sequencer,
you can change the volume level, Tone, or set to mute out the
sound for a single Part.
* Because commercially available Roland SMF Music Data is
also made up of 16 Parts for sounding the notes of individual
instruments, you can change the settings for the individual
Parts and play them back in the same way.
1. Press the [Song] button, then choose the song
with the button next to the display.
2. Press the [Menu] button.
If <16Tr Sequencer> doesn’t appear on screen, press
Page < 44 > < pp > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens.
3. Press <li AE -
A 16-track Sequencer screen like the one shown below
appears.
AAA AA
4 Select » Options
4. Press Select < 4 > and < p > at the bottom of the
display to choose the Part you want to set.
5. Change the settings for the selected Part.
Display Function
Sl. Only the selected Part is played back.
Mute Toggles playback of the selected Part on or
UE SR
Clear Erases the performance information for the
Part. Pressing <Clear> displays the Message
for confirm. To erase the recorded sound,
Press <OK>. If you don’t want to erase the
recorded sound, press <Cancel>. Once a
performance has been erased, it can’t be
restored.
* Making it so that a single Part is not played 15 called "Minus
One.” Using Minus One, you can mute out a particular
instrument and play the part yourself.
6. You can make detailed settings for the selected
Part by pressing <Options> at the bottom of the
display.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Sn Reverb | Lhorus | Panpot
100 0 | 10 | 20
$ Select + 4 Part 2 »
You can change the Tone for the selected Part by
pressing a [Tone] button to change the Tone while this
screen is displaved.
7. Press Select < 4 > and < p > at the bottom of the
display to choose the item you wish to set.
Indication Description
Volume Changes the volume level.
Reverb Changes the depth of the reverb effect.
Chorus Changes the amount of chorus applied.
Panpot Shifts the direction from which the sound is
heard between left and right. When you
press < 4 > located beside the display, the
sound will move toward the right. When
you press < + >, the sound will move
toward the left.
What's Panpot?
Panpotis the contro! that determines the placement of the
sound in the stereo sound field between left and right
speakers. By altering the Panpot setting, you can change the
perceived location of the sound between the left and right
speakers.
8. Use < + > < + > next to the display to change the
value.
9. Press the Play [ > ] button to play back the song
with the changed settings.
Monitor the effect by actually listening to the song.
Press the Stop [ M ] button to stop playback.
10.Press Part < 4 > < }+ > at the bottom of the display
to change the settings for other Parts as well.
11.While holding down the Rec [ 6 ] button, press
the Reset [ I ] button.
This operation set the changes in the settings.
The song with the changed settings can then be saved to
a floppy disk.
If you don’t want to lose the song whose settings for
individual Parts you've changed, you should save iton a
floppy disk (p. 104).
* The setting that determines whether an individual Part 15
played or not can't be saved to floppy disk.
115
Chapter 5 Advanced Recording Functions
e If the following message appears | Composing a Song That
If you try to display another screen after you've changed the C h h B + p |
song's settings for each Part, a message like the one below a nges the bea ar ay
may appear. Through
Song setup was modified You can create songs that have beat changes during the
change original setup? course of the song.
Cance e * You can’t change a song's beat once it's been recorded. Before
recording the performance, determine the beat to be used.
Press <OK> to change the song's settings.
Press <Cancel> to discard the changes in settings. 1. Press the [Menu] button.
if <Beat Map> doesn't appear on screen, press Page
< 44 > < pp > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens.
2. Press <Beat Map>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
= IY New Sons 4/4 M: 1
— Execute
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen.
3. Use the Fwd [ >> ] button to move to the bar
where you want to change the beat.
The measure number appears in the top-right area of the
screen.
4. Press < 4 >< 4 > next to the display to choose the
beat.
The beat displayed on the screen will change.
53. Press <Execute> at the bottom of the display.
The beat change starting with the measure where you
moved to.
6. Press the [Exit] button twice.
The screen displayed before you pressed the [Menu]
button appears.
7. Press the Reset [ IH ] button to return the measure
number to “1.”
8. Start a recording.
Follow the recording method in Chapter 4 (p. 91) or the
procedures described in “Multitrack Recording with 16
Parts (16-Track Sequencer)” (p. 113}to record the
performance.
116
Chapter 5 Advanced Recording Functions
Changing a Song's Basic Changing the Tempo Within
Tempo the Song | |
You can change the basic tempo of a composition. The basic You can add tempo changes to a recorded composition.
tempo is that was initially set when the song was recorded. The KR-377 stores song tempo information and performance
data separately. Therefore, when making changes to the
1. Press the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to choose a tempo in a song, you must record the changes in the tempo
tempo. information independently of the performance data.
, , This recording of the tempo is called “Tempo Recording.”
2. While holding down the Rec [ € ] button, press |
the Reset [ t« | button.
The song's basic tempo changes. Save the song on a
floppy disk. B Adjusting the Tempo While
* During tempo recording, the tempo display in the upper left of
the screen will be highlighted.
The changed setting for the basic tempo is discarded Li stening to a Song
when you turn off the power or choose a different song. You can add ritardando and other such gradual tempo
* Tf the song you're working on has tempo changes in it, press changes.
the Reset { 14 | button to co back to the beginning of the song
EE $ 1. Press the [Menu] button.
before you carry out this operation. Changing the tempo |
| If <Rec Mode> doesn’t appear on screen, press Page
without returning to the start of the song causes the het ea |
; . o < 44 > < pp > at the bottom of the display to switc
proportion by which the tempo is altered at the location of the « ” o
Зы screens.
tempo change to affect the overall tempo of the composition.
2. Press <Rec Mode> next to the display.
The Recording Mode screen appears.
Rec Mode UR Rec Stor
| Tempo | Arranger |
3. Use < 4 >< # > at the left of the display to choose
“Tempo.”
This makes the setting for tempo recording.
Press the [Exit] button several times to go back to the
screen that shows the measure number in the top-right
area of the screen.
4. Press the Bwd [ <<] and Fwd [ >» ] buttons to
move to a place a little earlier than the bar where
you want to change the tempo.
5. Press the Rec [ € ] button and confirm that its
indicator blinking.
The piano enters recording standby.
6. Press the Play [ > ] button to start recording.
7. When you get to the place where you want to
change the tempo, use the Tempo [-] and [+]
buttons to vary the tempo as desired.
8. Press the Stop [ M ] button to stop recording.
The song's tempo changes.
You canviot record performances while in Tempo Recording
mode. When you're finished tempo recording, go back to the
ordinary Replace Recording. Take a look at “How to Choose
the Recording Method” (p. 110).
117
Chapter 5 Advanced Recording Functions
a UO
EH Adjusting the Tempo at a
Particular Measure
You can have the tempo change at the beginning of a
measure where you moved to. This is handy when you want
to make a sudden change in tempo.
1. Make the setting for Tempo Recording at the
Recording Mode screen.
The steps are the same as the steps 1 to 3 in “Adjusting
the Tempo While Listening to a Song” (p. 117).
When you're done making the setting, press the [Exit]
button several times to go back to the screen that shows
the measure number in the top-right area of the screen.
2. Use the Bwd [ <<] and Fwd [ »» ] buttons to
move to the bar where you want to change the
tempo.
The measure number appears in the top-right area of the
basic screen.
3. Press the Rec [ € ] button and confirm that its
indicator blinking.
The piano enters recording standby.
4. Use the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to change the
tempo.
5. Press the Rec [ 6 ] button.
The song's tempo changes starting with the measure
where you moved to.
6. Press the Stop [ M ] button to end recording.
* You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording
mode. When you're finished tempo recording, go back to the
ordinary Replace Recording. Take a look at “How to Choose
the Recording Method” (p. 110).
* If you want to restore the previous tempo, delete the tempo
data at the place where the tempo was recorded. For an
explanation of how to delete the information of tempo settings,
refer to the “Making a Measure Blank” (p. 123).
(Tempo Recording Shortcut
You can also enter the Tempo Recording mode by
holding down the Rec [ @ ] button and pressing the
Tempo [-] or [+] button.
Record tempo information.
In this case, tempo recording is canceled when recording
ends.
\. J
118
Chapter 6 Editing a Song
Selecting Editing Functions
There is a variety of ways you can edit performances
recorded using the KR-377 Track button or 16-track
sequencer.
1. Press the Composer [Menu] button.
The Composer Menu screen appears.
* Composer Menu |
fee
ry" me iii
PERENNE ETT ATIENDE
Ahuthm Pattern [Beat
¢¢ Page wn
If <Song Edit> doesn’t appear on screen, press Page
< dé > < pp > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens,
2. Press <Song Edit>.
An Edit screen like the one shown below appears.
ve Song Edit N— ;
[insert :
¢ Pace »
3.
Press the button to choose the edit function.
After you make your choice, follow the steps on the page
for the selected function to carry out the operation.
Sonte edits can’t be undone, not even by choosing “Undo.” We
recommend saving your song on a floppy disk before you edit
it. For information on how to save your song, see “Saving
Songs to Floppy Disks” (p. 104).
Canceling an Edit
Indication Description
Undo Cancels an editing operating.
Copy Copies a measure or onboard rhythm
eee. pattern (p. 120, p. 121). ~~...
Quantize Corrects discrepancies in the timing of notes
ИИ in a recorded performance (p. 121)...
Delete __.... Deletes a measure (p. 122). 122200.
insert... Adds a blank measure (122). |
Transpose || Transposes a l'art (p.123). 11.1...
Erase Makes a measure blank (p. 123).
a Wm Om wm Em OW Wm Wm WW sk dm A EB EB = = = = N mw a ow
+ Wm om = + WOE 4% OB OW OB = = # WW RB WR a WW Ww sw BF Rom om Ww Om oa EE BW Ww
Used to correct individual notes one at a
time (p. 124).
Foe de Em Em Om OW MWY Ww mm We Mr ME EW WW We EA WR Wm Om Rm Wm OW om mow mW мо мо о
PC* Edit Used to correct changes in Tones during the
course of a song (p. 125).
* What's “PC”?
“PC” is an abbreviation for Program Change, which is a
command that means “Change the Tone.” In a song that
changes Tones partway through, a “PC” is inserted at the
place where the Tone changes.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Composer Menu
screen.
You can cancel an editing operation that you've just carried
out. This is handy when you want to undo an edit and
restore it to the way it was before.
*
1.
There are some edits that can’t be restored to their previous
state.
Follow the steps in “Choosing an Editing
Function” to choose <Undo> at the bottom of the
display.
Editing functions that can be undone appear on screen.
a Undo
You are undoing the last editing.
Copy :
Cancel ОК ]
Pressing <Cancel> takes you back to the Edit screen
without the undo operation.
Press <OK> to cancel the editing function shown
on screen.
You are returned to the Edit screen.
С
-
|
v
pa
®
—
O
119
Copying a Measure
You can copy a portion of a performance to a different bar in
the same Part or to a measure in another Part. This is handy
when you're composing a song that repeats a similar phrase.
Ex. To copy measure 5-7 to measure 8.
[+2 [э [а [5 [6 [7]
~ .
- -
“ чл
- hd
- -~
" Ч =.
- x.
-
[1 [2 [ з [а [ 5 [ 6 [ 7 [ 8 [ 9 [10]
1. Follow the steps in “Choosing an Editing
Function” (p. 119) to choose <Copy>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
5 To: Тез;
For: 3 Mode: Replace
+ Src AL Ost: ---
d Select » Execute |
Display Description
From The first measure in the passage you want
to copy
For The number of measures to copy
Src Track button or Part number of the copy
source
Choosing “All” copies all Parts. When you
do this, <Dst> changes to “—.”
Choosing “R.Pattern” copies the KR-377's
built-in Rhythm Patterns. For more
information, take a look at “Copying a
Rhythm Pattern” (p. 121).
If you choose a Track button, you can only
copy to the selected Track button.
BOE MM Em om EM aE mM We dr WW Ww om mB Om OW MEW OW NW Om Em Om Em OEE Em MM Mh ome om
To The measure number of the copy
destination
Choosing “End” copies to the end of the
song
Times The number of times to copy
Mode Copy type
There are three types of copying, which are
described below.
Replace
When a recorded performance exists at the
copy destination, the previous recording is
deleted and replaced with the copied
passage.
120
Mix
When a recorded performance exists at the
copy destination, the newly copied passage
is mixed with the previous recording. When
the Tones of the copy source and
destination are different, the Tone of the
destination is used.
Insert
When a recorded performance exists at the
copy destination, the newly copied passage
is inserted without deleting the previous
recording. This makes the song longer by an
amount equal to the number of inserted
measures.
4 HW 6 mM km M3 Wom WM We Ww We Ww FW Wm A Em Em Em Ww WM OS Em SM Ww OB EB BE = = = Em = ”m mm #* =
Dst Part number of the copy destination
2. Use Select < 4 > and < P > at the bottom of the
screen to choose the item you wish to set.
3. Use <4 > <4 > next to the display to make the
setting for the item. ©
To stop copying, press the [Exit] button.
The copy is canceled, then you are returned to the Edit
screen.
4. When you're done making all the settings, press
<Execute>.
Copying starts.
When copying is finished, you are returned to the Edit
Screen.
Chapter 6 Editing a Song
Copying a Rhythm Pattern
The KR-377 has a large number of onboard rhythm patterns.
You can copy these rhythm patterns to create a rhythm part.
For more information about the kind of Rhythm Patterns,
please refer to “Rhythm Pattern List” (p. 173).
1. Follow the steps in “Choosing an Editing
Function” (p. 119) to choose <Copy>.
For more about ordinary copying, please refer to
“Copying : a Measure” (p. 120).
2. Use Select < 4 > and < № > at + the bottom of the
screen to choose <Src>.
3. Use < + > < 4 > next to the display to choose
“R.Pattern.”
A screen like the one shown below appears, and the
settings for copying the built-in Rhythm Pattern are
made.
Cory
+ Fron: E Bea TT Tor End Times:
— Mode: Replace
For
+ Spo: EEE Ost: Part 10 |
4 es Execute |
es The <From> column displays the Rhythm Pattern's
name and number of bars.
e <Dst> is fixed at “Part 10 (D),” and can't be changed.
e Switching <Src> to something other than “R.Pattern”
makes the setting for ordinary copying.
4. Use Select < 4 > and < P > at the bottom of the
screen to choose the item you wish to set.
5. Use < # > < 4 > next to the display to make the
setting for the item.
You can hear the rhythm pattern by pressing the Play
[> | button. Press the Stop [ M } button to stop playing
the rhythm pattern.
Pressing the [Exit] button returns you to the Edit screen,
without the copy being executed.
6. When you're done making all the settings, press
<Execute>.
Copying starts.
When copying is finished, you are returned to the Edit
screen.
You can also record the rhythm pattern. Take a look at
"Creating a Riythm Part with Ease” (p. 103).
Correcting Timing Discrepancies
You can correct for timing discrepancies in a recorded
performance by having the music be aligned with a timing
you specify. This is called “Quantizing.”
As an example, let's say that the timing of some quarter-
notes in a performance is a little off. In this case, you can
quantize the performance with quarter-note timing, thus
making the timing accurate.
Example: Quarter-note resolution
Actual note data | J J J
| |
1 2 3 4
Nota data after quantization J J J |
Example: Sixteenth-note resolution
уг
Actual note data E a: ; |
ii o :
E J ЛИ
1. Follow the steps in “Choosing an Editing
Function” (p. 119) to choose <Quantize>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Note data after quantization
=n tize
Fron: a Fe solutions 1/16
or:
Tr/Pt: A
Æ Select » Execute
Display Description
From The first measure in the passage you want to
quantize ; | О
Рог The number of measures you want to quantize
Tr/Pt Track button or Part number to quantize
Choosing “All” quantizes the same passage in
all Parts.
BOE OE OE Er WW WM Wm OW Om Em om ow MW fm Wm Om om mw oN WR mm som Eom MW RR OE Ww
Resolution Timing of quantizing
Select one of the following values.
1/2 (half note), 1/4 (quarter note),
1/6 (quarter-note triplet), 1/8 (eighth note),
1/12 (eighth-note triplet), 1/16 (sixteenth note),
1/24 (sixteenth-note triplet),
1/32 (thirty-second note)
a
-
o
"О
me
a
"a
©
2. Use Select < 4 > and < Y > at the bottom of the
screen to choose the item you wish to set.
3. Use < 4 > < 4 > next to the display to make the
setting for the item.
If you want to cancel quantizing, press the [Exit] button.
The Quantize operation will be canceled, and the Edit
screen will reappear.
4. When you're done making all the settings, press
<Execute>. |
Quantizing starts.
When the quantization 1s finished, you are returned to
the Edit screen.
121
Chapter 6 Editing a Song
Deleting a Specific Measure
You can delete a part of a performance measure by measure,
When you erase a measure, the measures that follow it are
shifted to the left. Deleting measures in a specified passage is
called “deleting.”
Ex. To delete measures (bars) 5-8
[+ [2 [з Га [5 [6 [7 [ з | 9 [10|
-
-
- -
- -
- -
“ -
- .
-
121314757671
1. Follow the steps in “Choosing an Editing
Function” (p. 119) to choose <Delete>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
a . Delete
+ From: 9
For: a
+ Tr¿Pt: AU
4 Select > Execute |
Display Description
From The first measure in the passage you want
to delete
For The number of measures to delete
Tr/Pt Track button or Part number to delete
Choosing “All” deletes the same location in
all Parts.
2. Use Select < 4 > and < Y > at the bottom of the
screen to choose the item you wish to set.
3. Use < + >< $ > next to the display to make the
setting for the item.
If you want to cancel deleting the measure, press the
[Exit] button.
The deletion is canceled and the KR-377 goes back to the
Edit screen.
4. When you're done making all the settings, press
<Execute>.
The deletion process starts.
When the deletion is finished, you are returned to the
Edit screen.
122
Inserting a Blank Measure
You can add a blank measure at a location you specify. This
addition of a blank measure is called “Insertion.”
1.
Ex. To insert measures (bars) 5-7
HEHE
+
-
1 Ч
1 >.
1 - Te,
+ > -
+ Te, "=,
| 10
Follow the steps in “Choosing an Editing
“
-
-
~
Function” (p. 119) to choose <Insert>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
: Insert
From:
Execute |
Display Description
From The first measure in the passage you want
to insert o
For The number of measures to insert
Tr/Pt Track button or Part number to insert
Choosing “All” inserts the blank measures
at the same location in all Parts.
2. Use Select < 4 > and < № > at the bottom of the
3.
screen to choose the item you wish to set.
Use < # > < 4 > next to the display to make the
setting for the item.
If you want to cancel inserting measures, press the [Exit]
button.
The insertion is canceled and the KR-377 goes back to the
Edit screen.
When you're done making all the settings, press
<Execute>.
Insertion of a blank measure starts.
When insertion is finished, you are returned to the Edit
screen.
Chapter 6 Editing a Song
Making a Measure Blank
You can erase the performance data in the specified block of
measures, making these blank measures. This process of
making certain measures blank is called “Erasing.”
Ex. To erase measures (bars) 5-8
aa
KNENENEE == 17: NED
о
Blank measures
1. Follow the steps in “Choosing an Editing
Function” (p. 119) to choose <Erase>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Execute |
Display Description
From The first measure in the passage you want to
blank out
For The number of measures to blank out
Tr/Pt Track button or Part number to blank out
Choosing “All” blanks out the same location in
all Parts.
Event Performance information to erase
Select from the following settings.
All
Erases all performance messages, such as the
notes, tempo, tone changes, and volume-level
changes.
Tempo
Erases tempo information. By erasing the tempo
information for all bars, the song will change
with a uniform tempo. In this case, please
choose “All” for <Tr/Pt>.
Program Change
Erases Program Change messages (p. 119).
Note
Erases only notes.
Except Note
Erases performance information for everything
but notes.
Expression
Erases Expression (volume change) information.
2. Use Select < 4 > and < } > at the bottom of the
screen to choose the item you wish to set.
3. Use < 4 > < 4 > next to the display to make the
setting for the item.
If you want to cancel erasing the performance data, press
the [Exit] button.
This returns you to the Edit screen without erasing the
performance data.
4. When you're done making all the settings, press
<Execute>.
The specified passage is blanked out.
When the erasure is finished, you are returned to the
Edit screen.
Transposing Individual Parts
You can transpose specified parts and tracks individually.
1. Follow the steps in “Choosing an Editing
Function” (p. 119) to choose <Transpose>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Transrose
From: A Días: +0
For: ALL
Tr/Ft: All
4 Select » Execute
Display Description
From The first measure in the passage you want to
transpose
For The number of measures to transpose
Tr/Pt Track button or Part number to transpose e]
Choosing “All” transposes the same location in — ME:
all Parts. y
° N В Г DTS o
Bias The amount of transposition
You can choose a value from -24 (two octaves
lower) to +24 (two octaves higher), in semitone
increments.
2. Use Select < 4 > and < P > at the bottom of the
screen to choose the item you wish to set.
3. Use < 4 >< 4 > next to the display to make the
setting for the item.
If you want to cancel transposing, press the [Exit] button.
The transposition is canceled, you are returned to the
Edit screen.
4. When you're done making all the settings, press
<Execute>.
The passage you specified is transposed at the specified
value,
When transposition is finished, you are returned to the
Edit screen.
123
Chapter 6 Editing a Song
Exchanging Parts
You can exchange the notes recorded for a particular part
with the notes recorded for another part.
This process of swapping parts is called “Part Exchange.”
For instance, swapping the part you want to practice with
any onc of Parts 1, 3, and 4 lets you mute out (silence) the
part with the Track buttons while playing back the song,
which can be handy.
For more about assigning parts to Track buttons, take a look
at “16 Track Sequencer and Track Buttons” (p. 113).
1. Follow the steps in “Choosing an Editing
Function” (p. 119) to choose <Part Exchange>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
& Partbkxchange :}
| Part 2 «e» Part 3
Execute
2. Use < 4 >< 4 > next to the display to choose Parts
you want to exchange. В
If you want to cancel the Part exchange, press the [Exit]
button.
The exchange is canceled and the KR-377 goes back to
the Edit screen.
3. When you're done making all the settings, press
<Execute>.
When the part-exchanging process is finished, you are
returned to the Edit screen.
124
Correcting Notes One by CG
One
You can make corrections in a recorded performance one
note at a time. This process of making changes in individual
notes is called “Note Editing.”
You can make the corrections described below by using Note
Editing: 1.0000 ga NS
+ Delete mistaken notes
* Changing the scale of a single note
. Changing the key velocity of a single note es
1. Follow the steps in “Choosing an Editing
Function” (p. 119) to choose <Note Edit>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Location Pitch
Velocity
The note-location display uses “Measure:Beat: Tick” as
the format. A tick is a unit of time that's shorter than a
beat.
2. Use Part < 4 > and < y > at the bottom of the
screen to choose the Part you wish to correct.
“Part **” displays the number of the currently selected
Part.
3. Use < 4 >< 4 >at the left of the display to find
the note you want to change.
By using the Bwd | æ« ] and Fwd [ p» | buttons vou
can search for notes in units of a measure.
4. When you've found the note you want to modify,
press <Pitch/Velo> at the bottom of the display to
choose the item.
The cursor then moves.
5. Use < + > < 4 > at the right of the display to
modify “Pitch” and “Velocity.”
If you want to delete the note, press <Delete> at the
bottom of the display.
6. When you're done making all the settings, press
the [Exit] button.
You are returned to the Edit screen.
Modifying the Tone Changes
in a Song
hapter 6 Editing a Song
In some songs, the Tone changes during the course of the
song (thatis, the Tone changes in the middle of a Part). In
such songs, an instruction to switch the Tone is inserted at
the place where you want the sound to change.
This instruction is called a “Program Change” (PC), and
actions such as deleting program changes, or changing the
Tone that is selected by them are called “PC Editing.”
1.
Follow the steps in “Choosing an Editing
Function” (p. 119) to choose <PC Edit>. -
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Location Tone Name
PC > Edit_
HEAD
Event | 001:01:000 Acoustic Bs.
END
4 Part: + Delete
The PC-location display uses “Measure:Beat:Tick” as the
format. A tick is a unit of time that’s shorter than a beat.
Use Part < {4 > and <}+ > at the bottom of the
screen to choose the Part that contains the note
you want to change.
“Part **” displays the number of the currently selected
Part.
Use < 4 >< y > at the left of the display to find
the Program Change you want to modify.
By using the Bwd [ << | and Fwd | >» | buttons you
can search for program change in units of a measure.
Press the [Tone] button to choose the Tone group,
and use the button next to the display to choose
one of the tones.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous
screen.
If you want to delete the Program Change, press
<Delete> at the bottom of the display.
When you're done making all the settings, press
the [Exit] button.
You are returned to the Edit screen.
9 ETT Tie
125
Chapter 7 Using Other Functions
Creating an Original Style
(User Style)
The KR-377 has built-in Music Styles in a variety of genres,
but you can also create your own original styles.
The original style is called a “User Style.”
You can use either of the two methods described below to
create a User Style.
* Style Composer
This method combines the KR-377's onboard Music Styles to
create a new style. You can create a new style just by
selecting from among the Rhythm, Bass, Accompaniment 1,
Accompaniment 2, and Accompaniment 3 parts from
different styles.
e Style Converter (p. 128)
This method extracts the portions you need from songs
composed with the 16-track sequencer to create a new style.
When you're composing a song, there's no need to specity all
the chords. You can specify just some of the chords, and
working on that, the KR-377 automatically extrapolates the
other chords, and arranges the style.
The Style Converter has an “Auto Mode” for creating Music
Styles simply from a song with a single chord, and a
“Manual Mode” for creating a Style from a song of three
chords {major, minor, and diminished seventh).
126
HB Combining Styles to Create a
New Style (Style Composer)
You can create a new User Style by selecting the Rhythm,
Bass, Accompaniment 1, Accompaniment 2, and
Accompaniment 3 parts from different styles. This function is
called the “Style Composer.”
* You can only combine the KR-377's built-in styles.
1. Press the [Menu] button.
The Composer Menu screen appears.
| Song Edit
Page »
It <Create Style> doesn’t appear on screen, press Page
< 44 > < »} > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens,
2. Select <Create Style>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
* Lonposer Menu
Stule Composer
IStuleConuerter
3. Select <Style Composer>.
* If a User Style has already been recorded, a message like the
one shown below appears.
Delete Style UK?
Cancel ОК
* Press <Cancel> to return to the Composer Menu screen.
Please save the User Style on a floppy disk (p. 132) or in
the internal memory (p. 131).
* Press <OK> to erase the previous User Style.
Chapter 7 Using Other Functions
A Style Composer Screen like the one shown below
appears.
NF New Style 4/4 № 1
Display Part
Rec. Ry ml
8 Bass eee)
Al. Accompaniment 1 1111120
Az LL. Accompaniment 2 оо. ee | .
A3 Accompaniment 3 a
4. Press Select < 4 > and < P > at the left bottom of
the display to choose the Part whose style you
want to change.
5. Use the Style buttons to choose the Style.
6. When you select the Style, press the [Exit] button.
You are returned to the Style Composer screen.
If you press <Clear> at the right of the display, the
changes of the Style will be canceled.
7. Repeat steps 4, 5, and 6 to determine the style for
each Part.
8. When you have finished setting the Styles for all
Parts, press <Execute>.
You create a new Style.
The new User Style is stored to the [Disk /User] button
with the name of “New Style.” Try playing with the
created Style to play.
* If you turn off the power or record a new User Style, any User
Style you ve previously created is lost. If you don’t want to
delete the Style, store the Style to the [Disk/User] button or
save it on a floppy disk. For details, refer to “Storing User
Styles to the Button” (p. 131) or “Saving User Style Or User
Program on Floppy Disk” (p. 132).
Muting Parts for a Particular Division
You can mute the sound of particular Parts in specific
Divisions.
For instance, you carrsound all parts when in Variation (the
Variation accompaniment pattern), or mute out
Accompaniment 2 and Accompaniment 3 when in Original
(the Original accompaniment pattern). E.
This has the effect of making the accompaniment more lively
when you change the accompaniment pattern from Original
to Variation.
~ For more about Division, see “The Makeup of a Style” (p.
128).
1. From the Style Composer screen, choose the Part
you want to mute out.
2. Press the button to switch to the Division that you
want to silence.
For example, to mute the Variation accompaniment
pattern, press the Fill In [To Variation] button.
3. Press <Mute> at the right of the display.
The Part you chose is muted out in just the Division you
selected.
If you want to hear the muted-out Part, press <Mute>
again.
To mute out a Division that changes after a few seconds
(intro, ending, or fill-in), press <Mute> immediately after
switching to the Division.
Mm
=
Le,
UV
pr =
©
a
|
127
Chapter 7 Using Other Functions
Changing the Style Setting for
Individual Parts
1. From the Style Composer screen, press <Options>
at the bottom of the display.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
reverb | Lhorus | Panpot Ea
0 | oo o |
= O Pe Lo
€ Selert + < _R:POP | >
2. Press < 4 > < } > at the right bottom of the display
to choose the Part that contains the settings you
want to change.
3. Use Select < 4 > and < Y > at the bottom of the
screen to choose the item you wish to set.
Indication Description
Volume _Adjusts the volume level.
Reverb... Adjusts the depth of the reverb effect. ©
Chorus Adjustsiheamountofchorus. оон.
Panpot Shifts the direction the sound is heard from
to the left or right. When you press < 4 >,
the sound will move toward the right.
When you press < >, the sound will
move toward the left.
4. Use < 4 >< 4 >at the left of the display to change
the setting for each itern.
You can change the Tone for the selected Part by
pressing the [Tone] button to change the Tone.
5. When you're done making all the settings, press
the [Exit] button.
You are returned to the Style Composer screen.
128
E Creating a Style from a Song
You Recorded Yourself (Style
Converter)
You can take a song you've composed yourself and extract
the portions you need to create your own original Style.
Note that when you're composing a song, there's no need to
specify all the chords. You can specify just some of the
chords, and working on that, the KR-377 automatically
extrapolates the other chords, and arranges the style.
The Style Converter has an “Auto Mode” for creating Music
Styles simply from a song with a single chord, and a
“Manual Mode” for creating a Style from a song of three
chords (major, minor, and diminished seventh).
When you're creating a User Style, think about the structure
of the style.
The Makeup of a Style
A Music Style is made up of five performance parts:
“Rhythm,” “Bass,” "Accompaniment 1,” “Accompaniment
2,” and “Accompaniment 3.”
Also, a song progresses in a sequence, such as intro, melody
A, melody B, bridge, and ending,
With the KR-377, such changes in songs are allocated to the
following six performance states. The six performance states
are called “Divisions” for Style.
Division Performance division
intro The intro is played at the start of a song.
Ending This is played at the end of a song.
Original os This isa basic accompaniment pattern.
Variation This is a developmental
accompaniment pattern. It is a variation
on an Original.
BoM Mod Wm om A OE Om OM MB EE ee Tw mR Em mA WOW A Ww MW om om mom om om om
Fill In To Variation This is a one-measure phrase inserted
at a juncture where the mood changes.
Use this when you wish to create more
energy (shift to a variation) within the
mw We Ar WE ER Em WE EB WS mE OW OER GW Ww WM MW Sn A mm Wm Me Mow be
Fill In To Original This is a one-measure phrase inserted
at a juncture where the mood changes.
Use this when you wish to create more
sedate (shift to a original) within the
song.
You can make a song more lively or more restrained by
increasing or reducing played parts by Divisions. You can
also modify a song by changing the played parts by
Divisions.
Chapter 7 Using Other Functions
Creating a Style in Auto Mode
Tips on creating a song
* Use one of the major, minor, or diminished seventh
chords to create the song. We recommend using
diminished seventh chords to compose the song.
* [t can be convenient to record the sounds shown below
for the Parts of the 16-track sequencer.
Rhythm Bass Accomp 1. Accomp2 Accomp 3
D (10) 2 7 8 9
> If you want to extract the performance of a part other than
Part 2, 7,8, 9, or D, check out “Changing an Extracted Part”
(p. 130).
1. Use the 16-track sequencer to record the song.
Refer to “Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts (16-Track
Sequencer)” (p. 113) and the like and record the song.
2. Press the [Menu] button.
The Composer Menu screen appears.
IF <Create Style> doesn't appear on screen, press Page
< 44 > < ) > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens.
3. Press <Create Style>.
4. Select <Style Converter>.
* Ifa User Style has already been recorded, a message like the
one shown below appears.
Delete Stule OK?
Cancel OK
* Press <Cancel> to return to the Composer Menu screen.
Please save the User Style on a floppy disk (p. 132) or in
the internal memory (p. 131).
* Press <OK> to erase the previous User Style.
A Style Converter screen like the one shown below
appears,
4 Stule Conver ter
+ Cornu. Mode: EM Division:
ey: rom:
+ Src.Chord: Major For: -—- |
€ Select № Play Execute
Display Description
Conv. Mode Changes the Style Converter Mode (Auto/
Manual)
Key The basic key of the recorded performance
= = = # ME WM O RO Em WH Me A SM Mm Em Em wm mm dw FE eB WR BR OR OR OER OR OE OW OE WD om
Src. Chord The chord of the recorded performance
eens Major/munor/7th) Meno
Division Division 111111111110
From The first measure in the passage you want
- (o extract_ LL... 0000
For The number of measures to extract
5. Use Select < 4 > and < Y > at the bottom of the
display to choose <Conv.Mode>, then use < 4 >
< 4 > at the left of the display to choose “Auto.”
This makes the setting for the Auto mode.
6. Enter the basic key and chord for the recorded
song to the items <Key> and <Src.Chord>.
Use Select < 4 > and < I > at the bottom of the display
to choose the item, then use < 4 > < 4 > at the left of the
display to choose the value.
7. Make the settings for the value of <Division>.
Display Performance division
Intro Intro CL
Original... Original accompaniment pattern ооонее
Fill To Var Fill-in to Variation
variation оо. Variation accompaniment pattern оо
Fil ToOrg __ FilkintoOrginal ~ неенке о
Ending Ending
* If you select "Fill to Var” (Fill-in to Variation) or “Fill to
Org” (Fill-in to Original) as the Division, you can only
extract one measure. The number of measures may be limited
for other Divisions as well.
8. With the items <From> and <For>, choose the
measures you want to extract.
Pressing <Play> at the bottom of the screen, you can
listen to performance of the portion which you chose.
9. Repeat steps 6, 7 and 8 to make the settings for all
Divisions.
La,
-
Le)
ue,
ри
©
=
|
* If no setting is made for a Division, it uses a simple drum
pattern.
10.When you're done making all the Division
settings, press <Execute>.
The new User Style is stored to the [Disk/ User] button
with the name of “New Style.”
* If you turn off the power or record a new User Style, any User
Style you ve previously created 15 lost. Tf you don't want to
delete the Style, store the Style to the [Disk/User] button or
save it on a floppy disk. For details, “Storing User Styles to the
Button” (p. 131) or “Saving User Style Or User Program on
Floppy Disk” (p. 132).
129
Chapter 7 Using Other Functions
* The data described below is saved in a Style. If a song includes
data other than this, the results you get might not be what was
intended.
e Keyboard performance information
* Depth of Reverb
* Amountof Chorus
Creating a Style in Manual Mode
When you create a User Style in the Manual mode, you can
clearly point up the differences in accompaniment for each
individual chord.
Tips on creating a song
* Record your performance with the three chord types of
diminished seventh, major, and minor.
* lt can be convenient to record the sounds shown below
for the Parts of the 16-track sequencer.
Chords Rhythm Bass Accomp 1Accomp 2Accomp 3
Major D (10) 3 4 5 6
Seventh - 2 7 8 9
Minor - 12 13 14 15
+ The chords all share the same Rhythm Part,
> If you want to use the performance of other part, check out
“Specifying an Extracted Part.”
1. Use the 16-track sequencer to record the song.
Refer to “Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts (16-Track
Sequencer)” (p. 113) and the like and record the song.
2. Press the [Menu] button to choose <Create Style>.
3. Select <Style Converter>.
A Style Converter screen appears.
4. Use Select < 4 > and < Y > at the bottom of the
display to choose <Conv.Mode>, then use < + >
< 4 > at the left of the display to choose
“Manual.”
This makes the setting for the Manual mode.
+
You can listen to a performance of the part selected with
<Options> by pressing <Play> at the bottom of Hie screen.
130
Changing an Extracted Part
You can specify which part of the song created with 16-track
sequencer to extract the performance from.
1. Atthe Style Converter screen, press <Options> at
the right of the display.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
= Part Assign 38
Rhuthm Ch: Я Accomp ich: 4
Bass Ch: 3 Accomp 2ch: 5
| Accomp Ich:
€ Select » € Major»
Display Performance part
Rhythm Ch Rhythm os
BassCh Bass a ee rer e En
Accomp 1ch | _Accompaniment Yoo
Accomp2ch — Accompaniment2 11...
Accomp 3ch Accompaniment 3
wv
If you create a Style in Manual mode, use < 4> <p > at the
right bottom of this screen to choose the chord type. Make the
Part settings for each chord.
2, Use Select < 4 >and < Y > at the left bottom of
the display to choose the performance Part whose
settings you want to change.
3. Use < 4 >< $ > next to the display to specify
which 16-track Sequencer part has the
performance you want to extract.
4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Style
Converter screen.
Chapter 7 Using Other Functions
Storing User Styles to the Button
You can store User Styles you've created at the [Disk/ User]
button.
The Styles stored at the [Disk/User] button will not be lost
even if the power is turned off. You can choose the stored
User Style by pressing the [Disk/ User] button. You can store
up to three User Styles at the [Disk/User] button.
The process of storing data to the TDisk/ User] button i is
called “memorizing.”
1. Press the [Disk/User] button.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
User > tule
CETERA tty ERA LRT
« Page »
2. Press <Memorize> button at the bottom of the
display.
The screen changes as shown below.
Memorize User Stu:
Hew Stule
€ »
3. Use < 4 > < J > to scroll the cursor sideways, and
[+ Li: Simple Waltz |
Execute |
enter the name of the song by using < # >< 4 >at
the left of the display to choose the letters.
4. After you've entered the name of the Style, press
< 4 > < 4 > to choose the save destination.
If you press the [Exit] button, the User Style will be not
saved, and you are returned to the previous screen.
5. Press <Execute> at the bottom of the display.
The saving process starts.
* If you select a location where a User Style has already been
saved, the previously saved User Style is erased and the new
one is saved.
* Attempting to save a User Style containing a lof of
performance data to the [ Disk/User] button may cause another
User Style to be erased.
* Never try to switch off the power while this operation is in
progress. Doing so may damage the internal memory, making
it impossible to use this instrument.
* You can restore the settings stored at the [Disk/User] button
to their original factory-default values. To learn how, see
“Restoring the Factory Settings (Factory Reset)” (p. 149).
Storing the Panel Settings
(User Program)
You can store the presently selected buttons, feature settings,
and the like to the [User Program] button (internal memory).
You can then call up the stored settings by pressing the [User
Program] button. This is handy for storing often-used
combinations of styles, tone, and other settings. Such a set of
stored settings is called a “User Program.”
You can save up to 32 User Programs on the [User Program]
button.
1.
+
Press the [User Program] button.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
я User Program Е ETRE
DOS: Beach Girls
PREFIERAN TT RETINA IAE NIE III
2 Bisband ‚Pop de PopularPiano |
si Page m»
Press <Memorize> button at the bottom of the
display.
The screen changes as shown below.
Memorize User Program
MBER SET [+ 1: ClassicCntru |
< >
Execute
Use < 4 > < }+ > to scroll the cursor, and enter the
name of the song by using < 4 > < 4 > at the left
of the display to choose the letters.
After you've entered the name, press < # > < #4 >
to choose the save destination.
If you press the [Exit] button, the User Program will be
not saved, and you are returned to the previous screen.
[a]
-
0
VU
pe
o
ho
~
Press <Execute> at the bottom of the display. ~~
The present panel settings (User Program) are stored on
the KR-377's [User Program] button.
Never try to stwitch off the power while this operation is in
progress. Doing so may damage the internal memory, making
it impossible to use this instrument.
You can return the settings stored on the [User Pr ogram ]
button to the product's factory defaults. Check out “Restoring
the Factory Settings (Factory Reset)” (p. 149).
131
Chapter 7 Using Other Functions
Calling Up User Program
1. Press the [User Program] button.
2. Use Page < 44 > <> at the bottom of the display
to switch screens, then choose the User Program
name you wish to call up.
Choosing the User Program name changes the panel
settings to the stored values.
E Changing How Button Settings
Are Called Up
If you wish, for times when you call up a User Program, you
can set it so settings related to Automatic Accompaniment
aren't changed unless you continue pressing the button fora
certain period of time. o
1. Press the [User Program] button.
2. Press <Options> at the bottom of the display.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Mrranser Update:
LAI settings in the user
éprogram are changed bu
ztouching the screen briefly.
Indication
Description
Instant Thesettings related to Automatic
Accompaniment are also switched right away
SU when youpress thebutton. о наааанное
Delayed To change the settings related to Automatic
Accompaniment, continue pressing the button
for a short while.
3. Use the button at the left of the display to choose
<Instant> or <Delayed>.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen.
Saving User Style Or User
Program on Floppy Disk
« Storing a User Style
You can save a User Style you've created yourself on a
floppy disk.
When using the User Style saved on the floppy disk, refer to
“Choosing a Music Style from Data Disk” (p. 64).
* Saving a User Program
You can save all User Programs now stored on the [User
Program] button (internal memory) on floppy disk as a
single set.
When using the User Program set saved on the floppy disk,
refer to “Calling Up User Program” (p. 132).
132
E Saving User Style Or User
Program on Floppy Disk
1. Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.
Refer to “Inserting and Ejecting a Floppy Disk” (p. 38).
2. Press the [Disk] button.
The Disk Menu screen appears.
_ Disk Menu
Save User Program :
Huser Program Load |
¢ Page »
3. Choose <Style Save> or <User Program Save>.
A screen like the one shown below y appears e
Stule Save
b Save
4. Use <4> <p >to move the cursor, and enter the
name of the song by using < 4 > < 4 > at the left
of the display to choose the letters.
3. After you've entered the name, press < # > < 4 >
to choose the save destination.
Pressing the [Exit] button returns you to the previous
screen, without saving executed.
* Tf you select a location where data has already been saved, the
previously saved User Style or User Program is erased and the
new one is saved.
6. Press <Save> at the bottom of the display to start
saving the song.
вл
You can erase the Style or User Program saved on a floppy
disk. Take a look at “Erasing User Style Or User Program
Saved on Floppy Disk” (p. 133).
Chapter 7 Using Other Functions
HB Erasing User Style Or User
Program Saved on Floppy Disk
You can erase User Style or User Program set saved on the
floppy disk.
1. Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.
Refer to “Inserting and Ejecting a Floppy Disk” (p. 38)
2. Press the [Disk] button.
The Disk Menu screen appears.
3. Select <Disk File Del.>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
MN Disk File Delete Y
| 1: New Stule |
4. Use the button at the bottom of the display to
choose <Style> or <UserProg.>.
5. Use < 4 > < 4 > at the left of the display to choose
the file to be deleted.
6. Press <Execute> at the bottom of the display.
The confirmation screen appears.
Delete file ОК?
Are you sure ?
Cancel OK
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen.
7. Press <OK> at the bottom of the display.
The selected file is erased.
Choose <Cancel> to return to the previous screen,
without erasing the file.
Em Calling Up Saved User
Programs from Floppy Disk
You can call up an entire set of User Programs saved on
floppy disk to the [User Program] button.
* Please note that calling up User Programs from floppy disk
erases all User Programs stored at the [User Program] button.
1. Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.
Refer to “Inserting and Ejecting a Floppy Disk” (p. 38).
2. Press the [Disk] button.
The Disk Menu screen appears.
3. Select <User Program Load>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen.
4. Use Page < 44 > < pp > at the bottom of the display
to switch screens, then choose the User Program
set you wish to call up. . ; +,
3. Press <Load> at the bottom of the display.
The User Program saved on a floppy disk will be loaded
to the [User Program] button.
Disabling Everything Except
Piano Play (Panel Lock)
Making the setting for the panel lock enables a state where
only piano play is possible, and ail buttons are disabled.
Even if the buttons are pressed mistakenly, such as might be
the case with children, no unwanted settings or changes will
result.
* When the panel is locked, only Grand Piano sounds are played.
1. Turn down the volume all the way.
2. Press the [Power] switch to turn off the power.
3. While holding down the [Function] button, press
the [Power] switch to turn the power on.
Then, continue to hold down these two buttons for a few
seconds.
4. Adjust the volume.
All buttons except for piano play are disabled.
When you play the keyboard, “Grand Piano” tone is
played.
By turning the power off and then on once again, the
keyboard returns to its normal status with Panel Lock
cancelled.
133
Le]
=
Q
же!
pr
Le
Le |
si
Chapter 8 Changing Various Settings
Changing the Settings for
One-touch Piano
You can make a variety of settin gs related to the piano-play
settings made when you press the One Touch Program
[Piano] button. | |
These settings remains in effect until you turn off the power.
From the Piano screen (p. 42), press <Customize> to display
the screen shown below.
Ambience--———
ranspose
y Touch “E Padal Mode Resonance
This is called the Piano Customize screen.
You can make the settings for an item by choosing the
corresponding item.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Piano Customize
screen.
Indication Description
Ambience This lets you enjoy the atmosphere of
performance in a wide variety of different
Lean Lee 000 locations. a...
Transpose | Changes the pitch of the keyboard (p. 59). _
Key Touch, | Changes the touch of the keyboard.
Pedal Mode Adjusts the sensitivity ofthe pedals.
Resonance Adjusts the sympathetic resonance.
Tuning Changes the tuning of the piano,
Sound This lets you make more detailed
adjustments to the piano’s tone.
What's Sympathetic Resonance?
On acoustic pianos, when the damper pedal is depressed,
additional strings are released to resonate with the sound of
the keys that have been played, adding richness and breadth
to the sound. This resonance is called “Sympathetic
Resonance.”
134
EH Adding Ambience from
Different Venues to Songs
(Ambience)
You can savor the same atmosphere as experienced when
performing in a concert hall, studio and other venues.
1. From the Piano Customize screen, choose
<Ambience>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
2. Use Type < 4 > and < } > at the bottom of the
screen to choose the performance space.
Indication Description
Ground On a large open ground 1110
Room Inasmallroom 111111111100
Lounge À large room
Studio À recording studio I
Gymnasium Ina gymnasium
Hall Concert hall
Dome A domed ballpark
Cave In a cavern
3. Use <Std> or <Wide> at the right of the display to
select the size of the performance space.
Indication Description
Std This is the normal condition.
Wide Provides an effect simulating the sound as it
would be perceived in a larger, wider space.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Piano Customize
screen.
Chapter 8 Changing Various Settings
E Changing the Key Touch (Key
Touch)
The setting below allows you to adjust the response you get
from the keyboard when you finger the keys.
1. From the Piano Customize screen, choose <Key
Touch>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Key Touch
“Fixe HET Heavy
2. Make the desired selection at the bottom of the
display to set the key touch.
Indication Description
Fixed Notes are sounded at an unchanging
volume level, regardless of how lightly or
forcefully you finger the keyboard.
FEO we om O E mw we Mm EE fa Me Me wm wae me hy wm MW Mr aa EB A ae
Light This sets the keyboard to a light touch. You
can achieve fortissimo (ff) play with a less
forceful touch than usual, so the keyboard
feels lighter. This setting makes it easy to
play, even for children.
This sets the keyboard to the standard
touch. You can play with the most natural
touch. This is the closest to the touch of an
acoustic piano.
5 WM mm Wm Om Om Om OBR OW Om om Wm OW ow dr Mh MW MN OR SR OER RE OR OB mS OM oR om WE Ew
Heavy This sets the keyboard to a heavy touch.
You have to finger the keyboard more
forcefully than usual in order to play
fortissimo (ff), so the keyboard touch feels
heavier. Dynamic fingering adds even more
feeling to what you play.
3. To make fine adjustments, use < 4 > and < Pp > at
the upper left and upper right of the screen to
adjust the on-screen slider.
The on-screen slider shows the keyboard touch.
Move the slider toward the right to make the touch
heavier, or toward the left to make it lighter.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Piano Customize
screen.
BM Adjusting the Sensitivity of the
Pedals (Pedal Mode)
This adjusts the sensitivity of the damper pedal and the soft
pedal (p. 14).
Using fewer stages can reduce the amount of data, which is
effective at times such as when you record a lengthy song.
1. From the Piano Customize screen, choose <Pedal
Mode>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Pedal Mode
| Natural
2. Press < # > < 4 > next to the display to make the
setting.
Indication Description
Natural The KR-377 recognizes subtle changes in the
2220200000 amount of pedal depression. |
8 Steps The KR-377 recognizes eight stages of pedal
eae depression ian
Switch The KR-377 recognizes two stages of pedal
depression (on and off).
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Piano Customize
screen.
E Adjusting Resonance
You can adjust this resonance (Sympathetic Resonance)
when the damper pedal is depressed.
On acoustic pianos, when the damper pedal is depressed,
additional strings are released to resonate with the sound of
the keys that have been played, adding richness and breadth
to the sound. This resonance is called “Sympathetic
Resonance.”
1. From the Piano Customize screen, choose
<Resonance>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
a
=
Q
v
=
o
Бы
co
Resonance
64
2. Use < + > < 4 > next to the display to adjust the
amount of Resonance applied.
As the value increases, the effect becomes deeper.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Piano Customize
screon.
135
Chapter 8 Changing Various Settings
m Changing the Tuning
Choosing the Tuning
You can play classical music such as baroque pieces using
their original tuning.
Most modern songs are composed and played with the
assumption that equal temperament (the most common
tuning in use today) will be used, but when classical music
was composed, there were a wide variety of other tuning
systems in existence. Playing a composition with its original
tuning lets you enjoy the sonorities of the chords that the
composer originally intended.
1. From the Piano Customize screen, choose
<Tuning>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
2. Use < 4 ><+>attheleftof the display to choose
“Type” (the type of tuning).
You can choose from among the eight tunings described
below.
Tuning system Characteristics
Equal This tuning divides the octave equally into
12 intervals. Every interval produces about
the same amount of slight dissonance. This |
setting is in effect when you turn on the
power.
This scale eliminates dissonance in fifths
and thirds. It is unsuited to playing
melodies and cannot be transposed, but
produces beautiful chords.
= mm ur dk — om — ar mE hm Ju WW MR WR = Wi 0 = ER = mn Em = Wm ME WE A 4 a m = = A Ww mm an
Just Minor The scales of the major and minor just
intonations are different. You can get the
same effect with the minor scale as with the
major scale.
= = = = = = # 50% = OW ER OW OME Wm OW mM Me WW Mm Ww Ww lB Em Om A A OW mom = WwW Om m =
4 mom om = = mE mW Om = WOW WW Om Wm Om Ew Wd mW Em OW ME EE ME mW MW MM a a wom
This scale is a modification of the meantone
and just intonations that permits greater
freedom in transposition to other keys.
Performances are possible in all keys (III).
This scale makes some compromises in just
intonation, enabling transposition to other
woe de om a od ME Me MW RW HM WW a RW ER OW OE Om Om EB SS ma E Ww OR Wm = ow
136
TT NT ОВО НОАОООСОНОЛОАННООЛОННННЯХ
Pythagorean This scale devised by the philosopher
Pythagoras eliminates dissonance in fourths
and fifths. Dissonance is produced by third-
interval chords, but melodies are
euphonious.
5m wk dW Er Em Mm we mW Wm Om Om Om Wm OW WM OE WD EN OM OE om om ow oe mom Hm
Werckmeister This is a combination of the mean tone and
Pythagorean scales. Performances are
possible in all keys (first technique, III).
3. Press < 4 > < 4 > at the right of the display to
choose the keynote (Key).
When playing with tuning other than equal -
temperament, you need to specify the keynote for tuning
the song to be performed (that is, the note that
corresponds to C for a major key or to A for a minor
key).
If you choose an equal temperament, there's no need to
select a keynote.
Changing the Tuning Curve
A piano is generally tuned to a pitch with a lower bass range
and a higher treble range than equal temperament. This
special tuning method for pianos is called “Stretch Tuning.”
A graph that shows the changes in pitch of actual tuning
compared with the changes in equal temperament pitch is
called a tuning curve. Changing the tuning curve produces
subtle variations in the reverberations of the chords you play.
1. Press either <Stretch ON> or <Stretch OFF> to
choose the tuning curve.
Display Characteristics
Stretch ON This tuning curve expands the bass and
treble ends somewhat (Stretch Tuning). It is
suitable for performances such as piano
solos. This setting is in effect when you turn
on the power.
Yo A MW Ww mm um om
Stretch OFF This is the standard tuning curve. It is
suitable when playing layered tones, or for
playing in ensemble with other instruments.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Piano Customize
SCreen.
Chapter 8 Changing Various Settings
E Fine Adjustment of the Piano
Sound (Sound)
You can make more precise adjustments of the piano's tone.
1. From the Piano Customize screen, choose
<Sound>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
ETIENNE Drishtness| Release
Bright | Long
4 Select >
2. Use Select < 4 > and < P > at the bottom of the
screen to choose the item you wish to set.
Indication Description
Changing the Settings for
Automatic Accompaniment
Dynamic range Adjusts the extent of tonal change in
response to your playing strength. If you
sclect “Wide,” the maximum tonal change
will occur. If you select “Narrow,” less tonal
change will occur.
» de om a We BOT OW OW OM OW OW OE OR OW OW OW OW OW OW Wm Wo WW мо мо токо то mm EE WW ow oe ew
Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the piano sound. If
vou select “Bright” the sound will be
brighter, and if you select “Dark” the sound
enema will be more nene...
Release Adjusts the length of the decay that occurs
after you release your fingers from the keys.
Select “Long” for a longer decay, or
“Short” for a shorter decay.
3. Use < 4 >< 4 > next to the display to choose the
setting.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Piano Customize
screen.
You can change a variety of settings for Automatic
Accompaniment.
Pressing <Options> at the bottom of the Basic screen (p. 16)
displays the ment screen for the setting item.
“Ema Setting
One Touch Setting Arranger Config. |
“ _ Page »
This is called the “Arranger Option” screen.
E Changing the Keyboard's Split
Point
You can change the location where the keyboard is divided
(the split point).
The setting is at “F#3” when the piano is powered up.
Ft3 (Split Point)
wn ,
B1 BE
|
1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button
to display the basic screen.
2. Press <Options> at the bottom of the display.
3. The Arranger Option screen appears.
If <Split Point> doesn’t appear on screen, press Page
< 44 > < W > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens.
4. Press <Split Point> next to the display.
Spli t Point
HT ;
5. Choose <C3>, <F#3>, <C4>, or <F#4>.
The key you chose becomes the split point.
a
bu
Le
E
Lam
®
-
o
The key you chose for the split point belongs to the left-
hand section of the keyboard.
6. To make another key the split point, use < 4 >
and < Y > to select the key on screen.
You can set the split point within a range of B1 to B6.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Arranger Option
screen.
-
Sec "Playing Different Tones with the Left and Right Hands
(Split Play)” (p. 49).
137
Chapter 8 Changing Various Settings
E Changing How the Automatic
Accompaniment Plays
You can set it the setting so that instead of sounding all the
parts of a Music Style, only the Music Style’s rhythm part,
chord tone, and bass tone are played.
> For more on chord tones and bass tones, see “What Are the
Chord Tone and Bass Tone.”
1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button
to display the basic screen.
2. Press <Options> at the bottom of the display.
The Arranger Option screen appears.
If <Arranger Config.> doesn’t appear on screen, press
Page < 44 > < ) > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens.
3. Press <Arranger Config.> next to the display.
Chord Tone
4. Choose <Accomp>.
i Accomp
| Accomp
Indication Description
Accomp Sounds all Parts of the Music Style. This is
the usual setting.
Chord+Bs The Music Styles rhythm part, chord tone,
and bass tone are sounded.
Press the [Exit] button twice to return to the Arranger
Option screen. ВЕ ВО
138
VANO OT o O
E Changing the Sound for Chord
Tone and Bass Tone |
You can change the sound of the chord tone and bass tone.
What Are the Chord Tone and Bass Tone?
When Automatic Accompaniment is stopped and the [Sync/
Reset] button’s indicator is dark, fingering the left-hand
section of the keyboard causes a chord to be sounded. This is
called the "Chord Tone,” and the root of the chord that is
played at the same time is called the “Bass Tone.”
1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button
to display the basic screen.
2. Press <Options> at the bottom of the display.
The Arranger Option screen appears.
If <Arranger Config.> doesn’t appear on screen, press
Page < 44 > < pp > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens,
3. Press <Arranger Config.> next to the display.
4. To change the Bass Tone, choose <Bass Tone>. To
change the Chord Tone, choose <Chord Tone>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
a = Bass Tone
| Fretless Ds.
When “OFF” is selected, the bass tone or chord tone
sound is muted.
Tone Available tones
Bass Tone OFF, Acoustic Bs., A.Bass + Cymbal,
Fingered Bs., Picked Bs., Fretless Bs., Slap
Bass, Organ Bass, SynthBass101, Thum
Voice
Code Tone OFF, E.Piano 1, E.Piano 2, Soft E.Piano,
Hard E.Piano, Slow Strings, Strings, Choir,
Doos Voice
Press the [Exit] button twice to return to the Arranger
Option screen.
Chapter 8 Changing Various Settings
NM Canceling the Chord
Intelligence Function
The “Chord Intelligence function” (p. 61) is the function in
Automatic Accompaniment that instantly recognizes the
accompaniment chord that is to be played, merely when you
press some keys specifying the chord. Although the Chord
Intelligence function is normally turned on when you press
the One Touch Program [Arranger] button and have
Automatic Accompaniment play, you can turn off the Chord
Intelligence function.
1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button
to display the basic screen.
2. Press <Options> at the bottom of the display.
The Arranger Option screen appears.
If <Arranger Config.> doesn’t appear on screen, press
Page < 44 > < pp > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens.
3. Press <Arranger Config.> next to the display.
4. Select <Chord Intell.>.
5. Use < 4 > < § > next to the display to select “ON”
or “OFF.”
Indication Description
ON The Chord Intelligence function can be
И i.
OFF The Chord Intelligence function cannot be
used. You have to finger all the keys to
specify the chord.
Press the [Exit] button twice to return to the Arranger
Option screen.
HB Assigning a Function to Pad
Buttons or Pedals
You can assign a variety of different functions to the soft
pedal and the sostenuto pedal or the Pad Buttons.
You can then call up the assigned feature simply by pressing
the corresponding pedal.
* When you press the One Touch Program [Piano] button, the
functioning of the pedals returns the pedals to their usual
functions (p. 14).
Assigning a Function to a Pad Button
1. Press the [Style Orchestrator/User] button,
extinguishing the button’s indicator.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Pad 1 Pad 2
| Break | Fade In/Out |
2. Use < 4 > < 4 > next to the display to choose the
function assigned to the pad.
The buttons at the left of the display will change the
function of Pad [1]. The buttons at the right of the
display will change the function of Pad [2].
For details on the functions that can be assigned, refer to
“Functions that can be assigned,” below.
3. Press the [Exit] button.
You are returned to the previous screen. Now, you can
press the Pad [1] or [2] button to use the assigned
function.
* When the [Style Orchestrator/User] button's indicator 15 lit,
the Pad buttons are used to make changes for the style
orchestrator (p. 71).
To use the assigned functions, get the indicator for the [Style
Orchestrator/User] button to light.
* Any function assignments that you've made for the Pad
buttons will be discarded as soon as you switch off the power.
Assigning Functions to Pedals
1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button
to display the basic screen.
2. Press <Options> at the bottom of the display.
The Arranger Option screen appears.
If <Pedal Setting> doesn’t appear on screen, press Page
< 44 > < bb > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens.
3. Press <Pedal Setting> to display a screen like the
one shown below.
SEN Left Pedal SE Lenter Pedal <<
| Glide | Fill in |
4. Press < + > < 4 > next to the display to assign the
function to each pedal.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Arranger Option
screen.
139
Al
+
2
же!
Laca
D
Le à
с
Chapter 8 Changing Various Settings
O The Functions You Can Assign to the Pad
Buttons
Indication Description
Leading Bass Toggles the Leading Bass function on
or off.
rom WoW RU ES E EEES
Break | During a performance with
Automatic Accompaniment, you can
stop the accompaniment for exactly
one measure.
CE" CTE ck Rw RW
This does the same thing as the [To
Variation] button (p. 70).
PE om OW Em OE EW mom om WM WM OW ROW WOR OE Ww OW ody BOE OW Om OW Om Wm oD FM DoW Mow ow oe m
This does the same thing as the [To
Original] button (p. 70).
. Wm om om Eom Em om om Ww A EN OW OW A OW OR Wm om Ee WE WE ow " m0 = un 4 m
Fill in A fill-in is inserted, but the
accompaniment pattern after that
doesn’t change.
: Mm om om Bom = = wm Wm om mM OE BM 4 BW WB MoE Eom MH EE om E мо то то [7 = = Y
Half Fill in Variation This play a fill-in half a measure long,
then switches to the Variation
accompaniment pattern.
Half Fill In Original This plays a fill-in half a measure
long, then switches to the Original
accompaniment pattern.
AoE Wm om MS Em de dW om EW WW WM A Ww BR OW NOR ER WWW SS SR OD Om A mR om mR oo
This changes the accompaniment
pattern without inserting a fill-in.
A Wm Om Om a We] Hm Wom om ow EW во ко = ож ен“ о
Using this function while Automatic
Accompaniment is in use returns the
accompaniment to the start of the
Division.
= = Wm NW Om OW OW OW OW OW OE Wm WM SA U an OE mE EE = = = = = с = = NE WW m =
This does the same thing as the
[Intro/ Ending] button (p. 67).
: = E E EE
Arranger Start/Stop This does the same thing as the [Start/
Stop] button (p. 67).
=... = = md 0H Eu = 8 = Em Om Em a EE WE ROR mM OE Rm Ws Hm mow
This changes the Automatic
Accompaniment to a more florid
arrangement.
:s = = Em Om EE Em ER OE OE Om MOE Em WOW Mm eR MN As WN Em iE ow om OSA OO
Orchestrator Down This changes the Automatic
Accompaniment to a simpler
arrangement.
TEE Ww ar a wm od fe om Rm OW mm Ci mm Kk od dm ow mow Om A om ow ow =
Melody Intelligence This toggles the Melody Intelligence
| function on and off (p. 61).
EL AA Tr. EN E OA O AO A OHNE UÚ—;];];—]—U—; =
Fade In/Out This starts Automatic
Accompaniment with a fade-in
— (where the volume gets progressively
louder), ends it with a fade-out (Where
the volume gets progressively softer),
then stops.
4 om om = Wm OB OB OW OW OW om ow Md ow or fw Om Om Om OR OM MOB O O OA
This switches the speed of the rotary
effect (p. 43).
mE mm oa Wa EB MW a a Mr WF ae U kn Ms om Bm eB dr wm WW Raw © om
140
Ma Oo ОНА ООН ОЛАЛЕРНОУОЛООАООЛАААНОИНОНАОООААЕННННЫ
Glide The sound's pitch is temporarily
lowered while the Glide pedal is
pressed; when the pedal is released,
the pitch gradually returns to normal.
This can be effective for simulating
the performance of instruments like a
Hawaiian guitar.
Composer Play/Stop This does the same thing as the Play
[ » } button and the Stop [ M ] button.
ON lO OOOO EEC Nt Em бы A EB Om Wm Om Om ow Om EH O O CEE CE AA Wm moa = = oo»
During Punch-in Recording, this starts
and stops recording (p. 112).
A mM OW Mm E a Dr WM Wm Me SB MN NW OW OE Em Om OE Wm WW Wm Om ow me Wk Em Mm Ww ow ow om WW om a ow
Tap Tempo This sets the tempo according to the
timing with which you tap the button
(p. 82).
What is the leading bass function?
The function that sounds the lowest note of a fingered chord
as the bass tone is called “Leading Bass.” When set to “ON,”
the bass tone changes when an inverted chord is used.
Usually the tonic of the fingered chord is sounded as the bass
fone.
> you ve assigned “Leading Bass” to a pedal, the Leading Bass
function is active while you depress the pedal.
2 Functions Assignable Only to Pedals
Indication Description
The pedal in the left functions the Soft
pedal (p. 14).
LE
Upper Sostenuto The pedal in the middle functions the
Sostenuto pedal (p. 14).
4 = = ld Wr 0 6 0 Wd wr ow O OOO OA SO O O A O AO AAA AA OE a
Lower Damper This applies lingering reverberations to
notes played with the left-hand section of
the keyboard while the damper pedal is
Upper Soft
depressed.
Bend Up This raises the pitch of notes you play on
the keyboard.
Bend Down This lowers the pitch of notes you play on
the keyboard.
> When the “Bend Up” or “Bend Down” function is used twith
Split (p. 49) selected, the pitch of the sounds played in the
right hand are then altered. Additionally, the maximum degree
of change in the pitch when the Bender effect is used is called
the “bend range.” Take a look at “Changing the Bend Range”
(p. 147).
What's the Bend Range?
The effect of smoothly raising or lowering the pitch of a
played note is known as the “Bender Effect,” and the pitch's
range of change is called the “Bend Range.” With the KR-377,
you can apply the bender effect by depressing and releasing
a pedal.
* Pressing the One Touch Program [Piano] button returns the
pedals to their original functions (p. 14).
NM Keeping the Same Tone and
Tempo When the Music Style
Changes
Normally, when you select a music Style, the default setting
has the tone in the right hand and the tempo selected
automatically. This setting prevents the tempo and tone from
changing, even when the music Style is changed.
Al! items are set to ON when you-turn on the power.
1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button
to display the basic screen.
2. From the basic screen, press <Options> at the
bottom right of the screen.
The Arranger Option screen appears.
If <One Touch Setting> doesn’t appear on screen, press
Page < 44> < Mp > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens.
3. Choose <One Touch Setting> next to the display.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
4 — Tone Tempo | Uther
| On OM | ОН
é Select >
4. Press Select < 4 > and < Y > at the bottom of the
display to choose the item you wish to set.
5. Use < 4 >< § > next to the display to select On or
Off.
Indication Description
Tone The suitable tone for a Music Style will be
selected automatically.
Tempo The suitable tempo for a Music Style will be
selected automatically.
Other Other settings (Style Orchestrator settings,
etc.) are changed automatically.
The parameters that are turned Off do not change, even
when the Music Style is changed.
Chapter 8 Changing Various Settings
Changing the Settings for
One-touch Organ
You can change a variety of settings for organ performance.
Pressing <Options> at the bottom of the Organ screen (p. 43)
displays the menu screen for the setting item.
U Organ Ortions à
oda Setting
. Lower /Arranger
¢¢ Page №
This is called the Organ Option screen.
Indication Description
Split Point When you've selected Jazz Organ, the
| right- and left-hand sections of the
keyboard play different Tones. You can
change the location where the keyboard is
divided (the split point).
Please refer to p. 49.
=" 4% x #% # WM om WW EW EW BM Mm WE mr dr ME Mm Wm Wm om Es mB x AN WF RR OW BR = ow
Arranger Config. You can modify the settings of the
arranger (p. 138-p. 139).
Pow UT] Om Om = ss Mr wh WW ME Wm Em om om dW EE wm om or Ww во мо = = = = ом о+
You can change the function assigned to
the pedal (p. 139).
FW Om om Wm EE ow om ow WwW WoW OW ORO ROO що Wm oAow ow om oa os koe
Lower/Arranger You can change the ways in which the
automatic accompaniment and the left-
hand section of the keyboard sounds. See
“Changing How the Automatic
Accompaniment Plays While Playing the
Organ” and “Changing How the Left-
hand Keyboard Section Plays” on the next
page.
Transpose You can transpose the keyboard or the
song that you play back (p. 89-p. 90).
141
Mn
=
D
v
=
(D
me
[ae]
Chapter 8 Changing Various Settings
E Changing How the Automatic
Accompaniment Plays While
Playing the Organ
You can play only the Rhythm Pattern of the Automatic
Accompaniment.
1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] | button
to display the Organ screen.
2. From the Organ screen, press <Options> at the
bottom of the display.
The Organ Option screen appears.
if <Lower/Arranger> doesn’t appear on screen, press
Page < 44 > < pp > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens.
3. Press <Lower/Arranger> to display the following
screen.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Arranger
4. Use <Arranger> 4 4 at the right of the display
to select “ON” or “OFF.”
Indication Description
ON All Automatic Accompaniment in the
cena nee Music Style ls used. eee
OFF Only the Rhythm Patterns are selected.
Press the [Exit] button twice to return to the Organ
screen.
142
EE RS НААНН
E Changing How the Left-hand
Keyboard Section Plays
You can change how the left-hand section of the keyboard
sounds when you ve used the Automatic Accompaniment.
1. From the Organ screen, press <Options> at the
bottom of the display.
The Organ Option screen appears.
If <Lower/ Arranger> doesn't appear on screen, press
Page < 44 > < pp > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens.
2. Press <Lower/Arranger> to display the following
Screen.
Lower Arranger
| ON | OFF
3. Use <Lower> 4 4 at the right of the display to
select “ON” or “OFF.”
Indication Description
ON Accompaniment and all sounds played in
the Lower section of the keyboard are
een. sounded. lL.
OFF Accompaniment sounds. The notes played
in the Lower section of the keyboard are not
sounded.
Press the [Exit] button twice to return to the Organ
screen.
— For more on chord tones and bass tones, see “What Are the
Chord Tone and Bass Tone?” (p. 138).
Chapter 8 Changing Various Settings
mM Adjusting the Footage 5. Use the buttons at the right of the display to
If you have selected “Jazz Organ,” you can adjust the switch the selected icon on/off. |
“footage” to create different timbres by combining various
elements of sound. An icon with a white background, such a is
sounded; an icon with a black background, such as 16
What" s Footage? в is not sounded.
A device for combining different frequencies to create * If all icons are off (black background), there will be no sound
the sound you want is called “Footage.” when you play the keyboard.
The numbers that are displayed originally referred to the
lengths of the pipes on a pipe organ. Reducing the pipe 6. You can also use the icons in the “Percussion
length by half produces a note an octave higher, and column to add accents to the onset of the note.
doubling the length produces a sound an octave lower.
You can use Perc. [4] or [2%] to change the Tone at
This means that with <8> as the base value, <16> ; , - A
the time of its onset. You can't set both to “On” at the
produces a note one octave lower, and <2> produces a
‚ same time.
note two octaves higher. |
= À Switching N on makes the accent time shorter.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Organ screen.
1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button
+
For more about Fa tor „al ), take a look at “Changing
to display the Organ screen. © - =
EE the Rotary Effect” (p. 43).
2. Choose “Jazz Organ” as the organ type. —
3. From the Organ screen, press <Footage> at the
right of the screen.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Lower Footage
4 Select >»
In this screen, you can change the Tone of the left-hand
section of the keyboard.
Urrer Footage
f Percussion Ele E
> Lower Upper
ipa
*
HI
4 Select
In this screen, you can change the Tone of the right-hand
section of the keyboard.
You can use <Upper> and <Lower> at the bottom of the
display to switch between these two screens.
4. Use Select < 4 > and < }+ > at the bottom of the
display to select the icon to be switched on/off.
Larger numbers indicate lower-frequency portions;
smaller numbers indicate higher-frequency portions.
143
Chapter 8 Changing Various Settings
Changing the Settings for
Score Screen
re a АНАЛ ООН НОННА
Changing the Tone Set To Be
Used for Playback
You can set which parts are displayed, and how the scores
are to be displayed.
1. Press the [Score] button.
A Score screen appears.
2. Press <Options> at the right of the display.
The following screens appears.
This screen consists of two pages. Use Page < 44 > and
< H > to change pages.
les 7 Key
4 Select ¢ Page »
Auto
Display Value Description
Pitches Off No pitches displayed
C,D,E Letter names (fixed do) are
displayed in the detailed score.
Do,Re,Mi Solmization syllables (movable
do) are displayed in the detailed
score.
Clef Auto Changes the clef automatically
G Clef Display the G-clef staff
F Clef Display the F-clef staff
Key Auto Display automaticaliy
b x 5-0-# x6 Display the score in the selected
key
User
Part 1
¢ Celect + + Раде >
Display Value Description
Left Hand 1-16 Select the part to be displayed as the
left-hand part.
The power-up default is “3.”
Bowe dm a Ee EW ER Ww Be fe dr Br WW WB Wr Br ww MM WU MF ME A Em BoB oa Ww = = = = = = =
Select the part to be displayed as the
right-hand part.
The power-up default is “4.”
: = x = = = ow = = % om a a de то токо що що
Select the part used for recording
your performance. The power-up
default is “1.”
3. Press Select < 4 > and < P > at the bottom of the
display to choose an item.
4. Use < 4 > and < 4 > next to the display to choose
the setting.
- » Refer to "Displaying the Score” (p. 79).
144
With the normal setting, the tones that are compatible with
other GS instruments will normally be used to play back
song data. By changing this setting, you can have the song be
played back using specific tones, for certain portions of the
data.
1. Press the [Menu] button.
The Composer Menu screen appears.
2. Press <Play Mode> next to the display.
If <Play Mode> doesn't appear on screen, press Page
< 44 > < pp > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
> Play Mode <<
65-compliant tones used for
playback. Result is same as that
from any other GS instrument.
3. Press the button at the left of the display to select
the setting.
Icon Description
GS Playback: uses GS-compatible tones. Result
| is same as that from any other GS
eaten ct e E ED
KR Playback w All use KR tones for some tones.
This will make the performance more
expressive,
However when the data is played back on
non-KR models, the nuances of the
performance may be different.
Press the [Exit] button to return to the Composer Menu
SC reen:
Chapter 8 Changing Various Settings
Changing the Settings for the
Marker and the Count Sound
1. Press the [Marker/Count In] button.
The Marker screen appears.
2. Press <Options> at the bottom of the display.
A Marker Option screen like the one shown below
appears.
The Marker Option screen is made up of two pages.
Count In Settings
Repeat/Marker Settings
Repeat Resolution
Rad EN
PP
Tome | Measure |
Count In HE
T
a
E Changing the Number of
Measures Counted and the
Count Sound
When you ve made the setting for sounding an audible count
(p. 84), you can change the number of measures that are
counted, as well as the type of counting sound.
1. Display the Marker Option screen.
2. Press <CountIn> at the bottom of the display.
3. Use < 4 > < + > at the left of the display to choose
the number of measures to count.
Indication Description
1 The one-bar count will sound.
2 The two-bar count will sound.
4. Use < 4 > < 4 > at the right of the display to
choose the count sound.
Indication Description
Sticks LL... Sound of tapping with astick ~~
Chick 1110. А Бей апа а clicking sound ~~~
Electronic Electroni c sou nd o
Voice(JP) | A voice counting “1, 2” in Japanese
Voice(ENG) A voice counting “1, 2" in English
Wood Block Wood Block
4 BoE Em Wm Em a ET. Er = = = = = ето о= оное о
ir ue a me din dk Me Wr A WE Me ak We Wd BE OW OM Wm Om Mm BM RR Wm BR Om Om OM Om OW о = ото о= о ow wom
Handclap Clapping
+ Ww mW mE Wm om Em mw Me MW mW Wm Wm mM Mm Wm om om om om ow od MoE mom ow dow om oe ow =
Animal Animal Voice .
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Marker screen.
> Take a look at “Counting Doum Before a Performance Starts”
(p. 84).
E Playing the Count Sound at
Each Repetition
You can choose whether the count is sounded at every
repetition when you repeat playback of a song ora particular
passage.
1. Display the Marker Option screen.
2. Press <Repeat> at the bottom of the display.
3. Use <4 >< § >atthe left of the display | to select
the way to be played. a
Indication Description - a
First Times —. Thecountis sounded only before the first
playback.
11 WW m m a A] NY N N WW Om = Boa =
Every Times The count is sounded each time the song is
played.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Marker screen.
> Take a look at “Counting Down Before a Performance Starts"
(р. 84).
m Placing a Marker i in the Middle
of a Measure
A marker is normally placed at the start of the selected
measure, but you can also set it so a marker is placed ata
position partway through a measure.
1. Display the Marker Option screen.
2. Press <Repeat> at the bottom of the display.
3. Press < 4 > < 4 > at the right of the display to
choose the Marker setting.
Display Description
Measure This lets you place a marker at the
beginning of the measure. <<...
Beat This lets you place a marker at the
beginning of the beat.
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Marker screen.
> When “Beat” 1s selected for this setting, place the markers
while the song is played back. For information about placing
markers, take a look at “Setting Markers in the Song/Erasing
Markers” (p. 86).
145
Chapter 8 Changing Various Settings
Adjusting the Standard Pitch Changing the Type of Reverb
(Master Tuning) Effect
The standard pitch generally refers to the pitch of the note By changing the reverberations of the notes, you can enjoy
that's played when you finger the middle A key. For a the atmosphere of performance in a wide variety of different
cleaner ensemble sound while performing With one or more. locations.
other instruments, ensure that each instrument 5 basic itch , , LL.
Р 1. Press the [Function] button, getting the indicator
to light.
The Function Menu screen appears.
is in tune with that of the other instruments. This tuning of
all the instruments to a standard pitch is called “master
tuning.”
If <Reverb/Chorus Type> doesn’t appear on screen,
1. Press the [Function] button, getting its indicator press Page < 44 > < pp > at the bottom of the display to
to light. switch screens.
The Function Menu screen appears.
PP 2. Press <Reverb/Chorus 1s Type> next to the display.
>. Reverb Tore Ze Chorus Type Ss
| | Hall 2 = Chorus 3 |
3. Use < 4 >and < 4 > at the left of the display to
_és Page №
If <Master Tune> doesn’t appear on screen, press Page
< 44 > < pp > at the bottom of the display to switch AT
change the Reverb effect type.
screens.
2. Press <Master Tune> next to the display. Display Description | |
Room 1 Simulates the reverb of a conference room
Master Tune Под UTN
— | a Room 2 Simulates the reverb of a performance
0 486.0 HE IM lounge
E. | o
| Room 3 Simulates the reverb of a large, open room
3. Use < + > < # > next to the display to choose the Hal (A manana. Simulates the reve rb of a large £ oncert hall
standard pitch. Hallz Simulates the reverb of a small concert hall
The standard pitch can be set to any value from 415.3- Plate unam App lies bright, n лена с rey eb...
166.2 Hz. Delay Repeats the sound many times, like an echo
The setting is at “440.0 Hz” when the piano is powered Panning Delay Makes the sound jump back and forth
ЧР. between the left and right speakers
Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Functio en. . ,
[Exit] £0 bac € Funcuon screen Press the [Exit] button several times to go back to the
previous screen.
* Changing the type of Reverb effect may also change the setting
for “Adding Ambience from Different Venues to Songs
(Ambience)” (p. 134).
> Check out “Adding Reverberation to Sounds (The Reverb
Effect)” (p. 52).
146
Changing the Type of Chorus
Effect
* When the chorus effect is applied (p. 55, p. 176), you can
change the chorus effect type.
1. Press the [Function] button, getting its indicator
to light.
The Function Menu screen appears:
If <Reverb/Chorus Type> doesn’t appear on screen,
press Page < #4 > < ) > at the bottom of the display to
switch screens.
2. Press <Reverb/Chorus Type> next to the display.
3. Use < 4 > and < 4 > at the right of the display to
change the Chorus effect type.
Display Description
Chorus 1 Applies a light chorus effect
ea... Withslowundulations
Chorus 2 Applies a light chorus effect
eee. ith quick undulations.
Chorus 3 Applies a deep chorus effect
ieee... Wwithslow undulations ____.
Chorus 4 Applies a deep chorus effect
Beeren... ih quick undulations
Feedback A soft sound with a flanger
cc can 0000 BE een
Flanger An effect that sounds like a jet
Luc c.2020000000 Plane s ascent/ descent оо
ShortDelay______..._fAshortechoelled LL.
Short Delay (FeedBack) A short echo with man
repetitions
Press the [Exit] button several times to go back to the
prev ious screen.
Chapter 8 Changing Various Settings
ERE A TEE
Changing the Bend Range
The effect of smoothly raising or lowering the pitch of a
played note is called the “Bender Effect.”
With the KR-377, you can assign the bender function to a
pedal, then apply the bender effect by depressing and
releasing the pedal (p. 139).
You can also make a setting that determines how much the
pitch of the note changes when you apply the bender. The
maximum range of change in pitch is called the “bend
range.”
1.
2.
i
+
Press the [Function] button, getting its indicator
to light.
The Function Menu screen appears.
If <Bend Range> doesn't appear on screen, ‚ press Page
< 44 > < pp > at the bottom of the display to switch
Screens.
Press <Bend Range> next to the display.
Bend Range
Use < 4 > < 4 > nextto the display to choose the
bend range.
You can set this to any value within a range of 1 to 12 (in
half-tone steps, up to one octave).
Press the [Exit] button several times to go back to the
previous screen.
+ Take a look at “Assigning a Function to Pad Buttons or
Pedals” (p. 139).
га)
=
Q
v
P=
Le;
-
o
147
Chapter 8 Changing Various Settings
Changing the Screen Settings
Some Karaoke Music Files contain lyrics data. You can hide
the on-screen lyrics displayed by such Music Files. With the
KR-377, you can also change the language and vary the
contrast of the screen.
1. Press the [Function] button, getting its indicator
to light.
The Function Menu screen appears.
If <Display> doesn’t appear on screen, press Page < 44 >
< pp > at the bottom of the display to switch screens.
2. Press <Display> next to the display.
Language | Lontrast E
Ae Ue
| ON | English
4 Select >
Э
Press the [Exit] button several times to go back to the
previous screen.
m Hiding the On-screen Lyrics
1. Press Select < 4 > and < P > at the bottom of the
display to choose “Lyric.”
2. Use < 4 >< 4 > next to the display to choose the
setting.
Indication Description
ON Lyrics are displayed (when performance
eae data containing lyrics is played back).
OFF Lyrics are not displayed.
E Changing the Language
l. Press Select < 4 > and < Y > at the bottom of the
display to choose “Language.”
2. Use < 4 >< 4 > next to the display to choose the
language.
Indication: English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish
* German, Spanish, and French are displayed only when some
functions are used. In other situations, English is used.
148
MO o
BH Adjusting the Contrast of the
Screen
1. Press Select < 4 > and < Y > at the bottom of the
display to choose “Contrast.”
2. Use < + > < + > next to the display to adjust the
contrast of the screen.
You can adjust the contrast level along a ten-stage range.
The higher the value set, the brighter it is displayed.
Displaying the Screen Message
When the Power Is Turned On
(Opening Message)
You can select the words and messages you want to have
displayed on the KR-377's screen when the power is turned
On.
1. Press the [Function] button, getting its indicator
to light.
The Function Menu screen appears.
If <Opening Message> doesn't appear on screen, press
Page < 44 > < pp > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens.
2. Press <Opening Message> next to the display.
3 Opening Message %
> All Clear Execute |
3. Use < 4> and < } > to move the cursor, and enter
the name of the song by using < # > < 4 > to
choose the letters.
Press <A-a-0-!> at the bottom of the display to change
the type of script.
4. When you're done entering the text, press
<Execute>.
Press the [Exit] button several times to go back to the
previous screen.
> Press <All Clear> at Hie bottom of the display to clear all of
your message. Then pressing <Execute> will disappear your
opening message.
* Never switch off the power while this operation is in progress!
Doing so may damage the infernal memory, making it
impossible to use this instrument.
Maintaining Settings After
the Power Is Turned Off
(Memory Backup)
Ordinarily, when you turn off the power, settings return to
their default values. However, some settings can be stored,
so they won't be discarded when you turn off the power.
This function is called “Memory Backup.”
1. Press the [Function] button, getting the indicator
to light.
The Function Menu screen appears.
If <Memory Backup> doesn’t appear on screen, press
Page < 44 > and < pp > at the bottom of the display to
switch screens.
2. Press <Memory Backup> next to the display.
2 Memory Backup $
Stores settings in internal memory.
Execute |
3. Press <Execute> at the bottom of the display.
The confirmation message appears on screen.
4. Press <OK> to store the settings in memory. |
When the setting has been stored in memory, the
Function Menu screen will reappear.
* Never switch off the power while a Memory Backup operation
is in progress. Doing so can damage the internal memory,
making it impossible to use this instrument.
“Chapter 8 Changing Various Settings
Restoring the Factory
Settings (Factory Reset)
You can restore the settings stored in memory with “Memory
Backup” to these original factory-default values. This
function is called “Factory Reset.”
* When you perform a Factory Preset, all settings that have been
stored in memory up to then are erased and reset to their
factory defaults.
1. Press the [Function] button, getting its indicator
to light.
The Function Menu screen appears.
If <Factory Reset> doesn’t appear on screen, press Page
< 44 > and< pp > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens. -
2. Press <Factory Reset> next to the display.
Factory Reset |
This will restore all the internal
memory contents to Factory Reset.
Execute |
3. Press <Execute> at the bottom of the display.
The confirmation message appears on screen.
4. Press <OK> to restore the settings to their factory
defaults. |
When the setting is changed, the Function Menu screen —
returns.
Press <Cancel> to make the message disappear without
changing the settings.
* Never switch off the power while this operation is in progress!
Doing so may damage the internal memory, making it
impossible to use this instrument.
149
MN
-
a]
"|
=
o
=
co
Chapter 9 Connecting External Devices
By connecting the KR-377 to external devices such as audio
equipment and MIDI instruments, you can enjoying in the
following ways. |
Connecting MIDI Devices (p. 151)
You can connect a MIDI sequencer and record performance
data from the KR-377 or play performance data from the KR-
377 on the sequencer. Also, when you connect a MIDI sound
module, you can perform on the KR-377 and hear the sounds
played through the MIDI sound module.
Connecting Audio Equipment (p. 154)
The KR-377 has high-quality built-in stereo speakers, but you
can also hook up a sterco system, and enjoy performances
that are even more impressive.
You can also connect it to a tape recorder or other recording
equipment and record your performances.
Connecting a Computer (p. 156)
With the KR-377 connected to a computer, you can use
sequencer software (such as Roland’s Visual-MT or other
software) to record and save KR-377 performances.
Performances recorded to such software can also be played
back on the KR-377. Furthermore, you can also enjoy the
Minus One Play function to play along with commercially
available music data in a variety of musical genres.
With Roland’s Visual-MT, you can also display a score of the
recorded performance.
Names and Functions of
Jacks and Connectors
The functions of the jacks on the rear panel and underside
are described below.
Rear Panel
1 2 3 4
|
| | | |
Di
pe
Э © ес LíMono) R LiMuno)
star LaSioreo—
1 MIDI Out/In Connectors
You can connect external MIDI devices to the KR-377 and
exchange performance data between them (p. 151).
+
There's also a MIDI Inn connector on the bottom panel of the
unit, You can’t use both MIDI In connectors at the same time.
2 Pedal Jack
This is for connecting the separate stand pedal cord.
150
3 Input Jacks
Using this jack, you. can connect other sound gener ating ВЕ
devices or audio equipment and play sounds from other
devices through the KR-377's speaker (p. 154). |
4 Output Jacks
Allow you to output the piano’s sound to sound
reinforcement equipment to obtain a more powerful sound.
Additionally, by connecting the keyboard to a tape recorder,
you can record your performances on cassette tapes (p. 154).
Underside
fpr men
1—@
Computer
{PC 2
РС-3
—i— Mac
MIDI
MID: in
1 Computer Connector
You can connect a computer to the KR-377 and exchange
performance data between the two (p. 156).
2 Computer Switch
Set this switch to Mac, PC-1, or PC-2 according to the type
computer that's connected. Additionally, this switches
between MIDI In connector and the Computer connector (p.
156).
* The MIDI Out/Int connector amd the computer connector
cannot be used at the same time,
3 MIDI IN Connector
* There's also a MIDI In connector on the rear panel of the unit.
You can’t use both MIDI In connectors at the same time.
4 Phones Jacks
For more information about the Phones jack, please refer to
“Connecting Headphones” (p. 15).
Chapter 9 Connecting External Devices
Connecting MIDI Devices
By connecting an external MIDI device and exchanging
performance data, you can control the performances on one
device from the other. For instance, you can output sound
from the other instrument or switch Tones on the other
instrument.
About MIDI |
MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, an
international standard which allows performance
information to be communicated among electronic musical
instruments and computers.
The KR-377 is equipped with MIDI connectors and a
Computer connector to let it exchange performance data
with external devices. These connectors can be used to
connect the KR-377 to an external device for even greater
versatility.
* A separate publication titled “MIDI Implementation” is also
available. It provides complete details concerning the way
MIDI has been implemented on this unit. If you should require
this publication (such as when you intend to carry out byte-
level programming), please contact the nearest Roland Service
Center or authorized Roland distributor.
BM Connectors
MIDI
Out
MIDI Out Connector |
Connect this to the MIDI In connector on an external MIDI
device using a MIDI cable (sold separately). -
Performance data when you finger the keyboard or depress a
pedal is sent from this connector to the external MIDI
connector.
MIDI In Connector
Connect this to the MID] Out connector on an external MIDI
device using a MIDI cable (sold separately).
This receives MIDI messages that are sent from external
MIDI devices. The KR-377 that receives MIDI messages can
output sounds, exchange tones, and perform other
operations.
* The KR-377 has two MIDI In Connectors on the rear and the
bottom panels of the unit. You can’t use both MIDI In
Comnectors at the same time.
EN Making the Connections
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR-377
and on the device you're about to connect.
2. Turn off the power to the KR-377 and other
connected equipment.
3. Set the Computer switch at the bottom of the unit
to “MIDI”
4, Use a MIDI cable (sold separately) to connect the
MIDI connectors to each other.
Please refer to the connection examples below.
5. Switch on the power to the KR-377 and the
connected device.
6. Adjust the volume level on the KR-377 and the
connected device.
7. You should also set the MIDI settings as needed.
For details on the MIDI-related settings, refer to p. 152.
Connection examples:
Setup with a MIDI Sequencer
Roland MT Series
e e
I
KR-377
@® ®0000
* When the KR-377 is connected to a MIDI sequencer, set it to
Local OFF. Refer to “Disconnecting the Internal Sound
Generator and Keyboard (Local Control)” (p. 153).
Connecting to a MIDI Sound Module
Sound Module
KR-377
Y
MIE,
——— Ema LANE aaa
86 ® 0000
оба Ste
151
a)
-
Q
v
в
©
hn
he
Chapter 9 Connecting External Devices
MN A CE
Playing in Ensemble with
Other MIDI Instruments
(MIDI Ensemble)
You can connect this instrument's MIDI connector to an
electronic percussion instrument or ather such outboard
instrument, allowing you to play ensemble performances.
You can easily make the MIDI settings for the MIDI
instrument connected to the MIDI In connector. The sounds
of the connected MID! instrument are output from the KR-
377's speaker.
1. Press the [Function] button.
The Function Menu screen appears.
If <MIDI Ensemble> doesn’t appear on screen, press
Page < 44 > < pp > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens,
2. Press <MIDI Ensemble> next to the display.
MIDI Ensemble
Ae Pad Keuboard —— |
3. Use the button at the bottom of the display to
choose <Normal> or <Keyboard>.
Indication Description
Normal This is the usual setting. When changing MIDI-
related settings, see “MIDI Settings.”
LJ... EE A 6
Pad Choose this when a percussion pad (such as
the Roland SPD-20 Total Percussion Pad) is
connected to the MIDI In connector on the KR-
377. You don't need to make any MID] settings
on the KR-377. Make the settings for the pad
sounds or others on the pad. (For more
information, refer to the pad's manual.)
= = ODE OBR OE ON OW TER N O UN NO E om Wm mm
Keyboard Choose this when a keyboard (such as the
Roland PC-180 or AX-1 MIDI Keyboard
Controller) is connected to the MIDI In
connector on the KR-377. You can choose the
tones played with the connected keyboard on
the KR-377.
4. 1f you selected <Keyboard> in step 3, use < 4 >
and < 4 > next to the display to choose the Tone.
You can play the connected keyboard with the selected
Tone.
Press the [Exit] button several times to go back to the
previous screen.
152
MIDI Settings
With the KR-377, you can make MIDI settings like those
described below.
<MIDI Settings>
Indication Description
TX. Channel Chooses the MIDI send channel. (p. 153)
«5 = = fr u = 8% MB Em = Wm Mm A A 4 Bom A om mom MOK OW OE mom om EE SW RW Wm u
= 2% ME WM OM WM OW 3} WW om om wm wm oY dm ow BH a om om Wm om om om ow A MOE NR OW Om om AW a amon
Composer Out Determines whether a recorded
performance is sent to the MIDI instrument.
(р. 153)
<Program Change>
Indication Description
Program Change Sends Program Change messages
(Program Numbers). (p. 153)
EC CCE A
+ 6 8 mW Mm MW Wm Om mom om ow ow kW > = = = =
Bankselect LSB Sends Bank Select LSB messages. (p. 153)
Making the Settings
1. Press the [Function] button.
The Function Menu screen appears.
2. Choose <MIDI Setting> or <Program Change>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Local | Lonmposer Ki
ON | OFF
“ Select >»
SET CEC | Cc20
nn PC No. a
0 (00h) | { <oûh)
3. Use Select < 4 > and < } > at the bottom of the
screen to choose the item you wish to set.
о (005)
4 Select +
4. Use < 4 >< $ > next to the display to make the
setting.
Press the [Exit] button several times to go back to the
previous screen.
Chapter 9 Connecting External Devices
Selecting the Transmit Channel (Tx.
Channel)
MIDI features sixteen MIDI channels, numbered 1-16.
Simply connecting a cable is not enough for communication
to take place. The connected devices must be set to use the
same MIDI channels. Otherwise, no sound will be produced,
and no sounds can be selected.
Select the transmit channel (1-16) of the KR-377.
When the piano is turned on, Channel “1” is selected.
If the keyboard has been split into right-hand and left-hand
sections, messages from the left-hand section are not sent.
The KR-377 receives messages on all channels from 1
through 16.
Disconnecting the Internal Sound
Generator and Keyboard (Local
Control) Е |
When connecting a MIDI sequencer, set Local Control to
“off.”
The setting is at “Local Control ON” when the KR-377 is
powered up. a | ВЕ
As illustrated, information describing what has been played
on the keyboard is passed to the sound module over two
different routes, (1) and (2). As a result, you hear overlapping
or intermittent sounds. To prevent this from happening,
route (1) must be severed, by setting the unit to what is
known as “Local Off.”
(1) Local On
Sequencer
20, MIDI MIDI
: | Sound IN OUT
Generator
“т Memory
"од ‚ .
MIDI MIDI
OUT IN
As (2) Soft Tru On
Each note played is sounded twice
Local Control ON: The keyboard and the internal sound
generator are in a linked state.
Sound is emitted
mie
| Sound Generalor
Loca] On
=="
С
Local Control OFF: The keyboard and the internal sound
generator are in an unlinked state. No sound will be
produced by the keyboard when it is played.
No sound produced
F
Sound Generator
Hd
> When comecting a unit in the Roland MT series, you don't
need to switch off Local Control. The KR-377 transmit Local
Off messages when their power is switched on. | If you first
switch on the KR-377, then the MT-series device, Local
Control is automatically switched off on the KR-377.
Local Off
Sending Recorded Performance Data
to a MIDI Device (Composer Out)
When Composer Out is active, you can send performance
data recorded with the KR-377 to a connected MIDI device or
computer.
When you turn on the power, this is set to “OFF” (data is not
sent). a
Sending Tone Change Messages
(Program Change/Bank Select MSB/
Bank Select LSB)
A Program Change is a message that means “change to the
tone of the specified number.” The device that receives this
changes to the tone of the corresponding number.
When you choose a Program Change message (Program
Number), the Program Number will be transmitted to the
MIDI device connected to the KR-377. The MIDI device that
receives the Program Number changes the tone to the
corresponding Program Number. |
Normally, the Tone is selected from the 128 Tones available.
Some MIDI devices, however, have more than 128 Tones.
With such devices, the Tone is selected through a
combination of Program Change messages and Bank Select
messages. There are two parts of a Bank Select message: the
MSB (Controller 0, with a value of 0~127) and the LSB
(Controller 32, with a value of 0-127).
* Some MIDI instruments can't handle Bank Select messages.
Also, there are some that do handle Bank Select messages, but
don't recognize the LSB.
6 4o1dpy5
— If you want to know more about how sounds are changed upon
reception of Program Change messages, please sce “MIDI
Implementation” (sold separately). If you should require the
“MIDI Implementation,” please contact the nearest Roland
Service Center or authorized Roland distributor.
153
Chapter 9 Connecting External Devices
Connecting to Audio Equipment
When you connect the KR-377 to audio equipment, you can
play the sounds from the KR-377 through the speakers on the
audio equipment or record your performances on a tape
recorder or other recording device.
When connecting, please use an audio cable with a standard
phone plug (sold separately).
EN Connectors
R LiMono) KR LtiMono)
ImSierec= E Pero
Output Jacks
You can connect audio equipment using audio cables (sold
separately) and play the sounds from the KR-377 through the
speakers on the connected equipment or record your
performances on a tape recorder or other recording device.
If the input of the connected device is monaural, you must
use the L (Mono) jack.
Input Jacks
You can connect another sound source, such as audio
equipment or an electronic instrument using audio cables
(sold separately) and play the sounds from the mena В
device through the speakers on the KR-377. | ;
If the output of the connected device is monaural, you must
use the L (Mono) jack.
. в
E Making the Connections
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
Playing Sounds from the KR-377 Through the
Speakers on Audio Equipment or Recording
Your Performances on a Recording Device
Input R/L
> In, Aux In)
KR-377 |
—— МОЙ ое т’
00 60506
1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR-377
and on the device you're about to connect.
154
2. Turn off the power to the KR-377 and other
connected equipment.
3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the
connection.
4. Turn on the power of the KR-377.
5. Switch on the connected device.
6. Adjust the volume level on the KR-377 and the
connected device.
When Recording KR-377 Performances on a Recording
Device
7. Start recording with the connected device.
8. Play the keyboard. |
9. When the performance ends, stop recording o on
the connected equipment.
Playing Audio Equipment Sounds Through the
Speakers on the KR-377
Output RL
5 Jo 51 (Line Out)
a o
KR-377
JAY Y Ÿ
ee HON ains ne CRE pips
ее ® 6606
1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR-377
and on the device you're about to connect.
2. Turn off the power to the KR-377 and other
connected equipment.
3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the
connection.
4. Turn on the connected equipment.
5. Turn on the KR-377.
6. Adjust the volume level on the KR-377 and the
connected device.
After use, follow the steps below to switch off the power.
1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR-377
and on the device you're about to connect.
2. Turn off the KR-377.
3. Turn off the connected equipment.
Chapter 9 Connecting External Devices
EH Optimizing the sound for
connected external speakers
(Sound Mode)
The sound of the KR-377 can be optimized for playback from
a connected set of external speakers, although this function is
normally set to “Internal.”
1.
3.
Press the [Function] button, getting the indicator
to light.
The Function Menu screen appears.
If <Sound Mode> doesn’t appear on screen, press Page
< 44 > and < pp > at the bottom of the display to switch
screens,
Press <Sound Mode> next to the display.
Sound Mode
| internal
Use < 4 > < 4 > next to the display to choose
<Output> or <Internal>.
Indication Description.
Internal The sound will be optimized for playback
from the built-in speakers of the KR-377.
=" "ww = =" ===". --#“" mW Wm m m
Output “The sound will be optimized for playback
from external speakers connected to the
Qutput jacks.
Press the [Exit] button several times to go back to the
previous screen.
155
6 191doy>
Chapter 9 Connecting External Devices
Connecting to a Computer
You can connect a computer on which a sequencing program
such as Roland Visual MT is installed and play sounds from
the software sound generator through the KR-377's speakers
or save songs recorded on the KR-377 on the computer.
E Connectors
Computer
Computer Connector
You can connect a computer to this connector to exchange
performance information.
Use a computer cable (sold separately) to make the
connection.
The type of cable required will depend on your computer.
Computer Switch
The setting for this switch is made depending on the
computer connected— Mac/PC-1/PC-2.
When this switch is set to MIDI, this connector cannot be
used.
. *
E Making the Connections
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
1. Turn off the power to the KR-377 and the
computer.
2. Using a compatible computer cable (sold
separately), connect the Computer connector on
the bottom of the piano with the computer's serial
port.
3. Set the computer switch on the bottom of the
keyboard to match the type of computer
connected.
Please refer to the connection examples below.
4. Turn on the power to the computer.
5. Turn on the KR-377.
156
TT RRA PES
6. Set the computer's and software’s baud rates to
match each other. For more information on this
procedure, please refer to the owner's manual for
your computer.
7. You should also make the settings for the MIDI
send channel (p. 153) and Local Control on or off
(p. 153) as needed.
* Change the setting of the Computer switch only after the
power to the unit is off.
Connection Examples:
* Connection with an Apple Macintosh computer
Use a computer cable (sold separately) to connect the
Computer connector on the KR-377 to the modem port (or
printer port) on the Apple Macintosh. Set the Computer
switch to “Mac.”
When using the Macintosh “Patch Bay” utility, specify 1
MHz as the Interface Type (MIDI Interface Clock).
Apple Macintosh
Modem Port
7 Je
Computer cable (sold seperately)
a
|
©
Computer
Ren
* Connection with an IBM PC
Use a computer cable (sold separately) to connect the
Computer connector on the KR-377 to the COM! or COM2
serial port on the IBM PC. Set the Computer switch to “PC-
2.”
IBM PC/AT
TTT] ms-23c |
|
| } Compuler
PC-2
PC-t
Mac
a MIDI
Computer cable (sole separately)
MEMO
157
6 1asdpy”
Trouble Shooting
If you think there's a problem, read this first.
The power doesn't come on.
© Is the power cord connected and plugged in correctiy?
(р. 13)
The button doesn’t work.
@® Is the panel locked? (p. 133)
Turn the power off, then back on.
No sound is heard.
@ Has the [Volume] knob been moved all the way to the left?
(p. 13)
@® Are headphones plugged in? (p. 15)
e Has the [Balance] knob been moved all the way to the right
or left? (p. 75)
® Has the volume been set to “0” using the [Part Balance]
buttons? (p. 75)
e Has the footage been adjusted so that all frequency
components aren’t sounded? (p. 143)
No sound is heard (when a MIDI instrument is
connected).
® Have all devices been switched on? (p. 151)
€ Is the Computer switch on the bottom of the KR-377 set to
“MIDI”? (p. 151)
No sound is heard when the keyboard is
played.
® Has Local Control been set to “off”? (p. 153).
Sounds are heard twice (doubled) when the
keyboard is played.
@ Has the Layer Play mode been enabled? (p. 47)
@ When the KR-377 is connected to an external sequencer, set
it to the Local OFF mode. Alternatively, the sequencer
could be set so its Soft Thru feature is OFF
(p. 153).
Not all played notes are sounded.
® The maximum number of notes that the KR-377 can play
simultaneously is 64 (stereo). Frequent use of the damper
pedal during automatic accompaniment or when playing
along with a song on floppy disk may result in
performance data with too many notes, causing some notes
to drop out.
The tuning or pitch of the keyboard or song is
off.
e Has the setting for transposition been made? (p. 89, 90)
O Are the settings for the Temperament and tuning curve
correct? (p. 136)
O is the setting for Master Tune correct? (p. 146)
Effects cannot be applied to Tones.
e It's not possible to apply more than one effect at the same
time, so when a performance has been recorded on
multiple tracks or when playing along with a song as it's
played back, the desired effect may not be applied.
158
-— Automatic accompaniment is not heard.
elas the [Balance] knob been moved all the way to the
“Keyboard”? (p. 75)
6 Have you pressed the One Touch Program [Arranger]
button?
If the One Touch Program [Arranger] button has not been
pressed, only the rhythm pattern is played (p. 66).
® Is the 16-track Sequencer screen displayed (p. 113)?
Certain instruments are not heard while
playing a song.
@ Have song settings been changed for each Part (p. 115)?
O Is the light for the Track button extinguished?
If the button light is out, the music on that track is not
heard. Press the track button so the light is illuminated.
A Tone or Music Style cannot be selected.
@ Press the [Exit] button several times to display the Basic
screen (p. 16), then choose the Tone or Music Style.
There is a slight delay before playback of a
song on floppy disk starts.
€ There are two types of SMF Music Files: format 0 and
format 1. If the song uses SMF format 1 data, there will be a
slight delay until playback starts. Refer to the booklet that
came with the Music Files you're using to determine the
format type.
When song playback starts, the on-screen
measure number reads “PU” (pickup).
O if the song starts in the middle of a measure, the display
shows “PU” (pickup) at the beginning of the song. After
that, the measure number is displayed.
The Fwd [ »» ] and Bwd [ «« ] buttons don't
work.
O The fast-forward and reverse buttons are ignored while
Music Files is being read in. Wait until processing finishes.
Pressing the Reset [ |< ] button doesn't return
to the beginning of the song.
e Some Music Files may contain settings that stop play ata
point partway through the song. When playing such songs,
pressing the Reset [ Ha ] button moves the song to the
point that has been set. Press the button several times more
to return to the beginning of the tune.
The Tone has changed.
e During automatic accompaniment, changing the Music
Style automatically changes the Tones and tempo of the
upper part of the keyboard to match the new Music Style.
If you want to change only the Music Style without also
altering the tempo and Tone, check out “Keeping the Same
Tone and Tempo When the Music Style Changes” (p. 141).
e When a performance made along with a Music Files tune
has been recorded, recording the performance to button [1]
may make the Tones for buttons [3] and [4] change as well.
Chord Intelligence can’t be used.
® Has Chord Intelligence been switched off? (p. 139)
O [s the setting for “Piano Style Arranger” active? (p. 74)
A note doesn’t stop playing
e Have the Chord Tone and Bass Tone been changed
(p. 138)?
Some Chord Tone and Bass Tone notes may be sounded
continuously.
Recording is not possible.
e Has one of the track buttons for recording been selected (p.
96)?
e Has the setting for “Punch-in Recording” (p. 112) or
“Tempo Recording” (p. 117) been made?
Select the “Replace Recording” (p, 110).
The recorded performance has disappeared.
® Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when
the power to the KR-377 is turned off or a song is selected.
A performance cannot be restored once it's been deleted,
so be sure to save it on a floppy disk before you turn off the
power (p. 104).
Nothing appears on screen.
® The KR-377 uses a liquid-crystal screen, so text may not be
displayed when the ambient temperature is below
freezing.
Lyrics are not indicated properly in the
display.
® With some music files, the lyrics cannot be displayed
correctly.
@ Lyrics data can not be saved on a floppy disk.
@ If you press a button while the lyrics are being shown in
the display, the lyrics will disappear. To recall them, press
the Play [ »> ] button.
Score is not indicated properly in the display.
e In the Score screen, some lyrics or notes could extend
beyond the edges of the screen, and not be displayed.
@ The score display feature is particularly unsuitable for the
display of difficult, complex musical works that demand
accurate notation.
Refer to “Some notes on a Score Screen” (p. 79).
O If you select a part that does not contain performance data,
notes will not be displaved in the score.
Change the part that is displayed (p. 144).
Depressing a pedal has no effect, or the pedal
effect doesn't stop.
O ls the pedal connected correctly?
Make sure the pedal cord extending from the stand is
securely connected to the pedal jack on the rear of the unit
(p. 150).
e Has a different function been assigned to the pedal? See
“Assigning a Function to Pad Buttons or Pedals” (p. 139).
€ Normal pedal operation is automatically enabled when the
One Touch Program [Piano] button is pressed.
A High-pitched whine is produced
6 When listening through headphones:
Some of the more flamboyant and effervescent piano tones
feature an ample high-end component, which may make
the sound appear to have metallic reverberation added.
Since this reverberation becomes particularly audible
when supplemented by heavy reverb, you may be able to
diminish the problem by reducing the amount of reverb
applied to the sound.
When listening through speakers:
Here, a different cause (such as resonance produced by the
KR-377) would be suspect. Consult your Roland dealer or
nearest Roland Service Center.
The bass range sounds odd, or there is a
vibrating resonance
e When listening through speakers: |
Playing at loud volumes may cause instruments near the
KR-377 to resonate. Resonation can also occur with
fluorescent light tubes, glass doors, and other objects, In
particular, this problem occurs more easily when the bass
component is increased, and when the sound is played at
higher volumes. Use the following measures to suppress
such resonance.
* Place speakers so they are 10-15 cm from walls and other
surfaces.
* Reduce the volume. o
* Move the speakers away from any resonating objects.
When listening through headphones:
Here, a different cause (such as resonance produced by the
KR-377) would be suspect. Consult your Roland dealer or
nearest Roland Service Center.
Reverberation still audible even with Reverb
turned off
O Since the KR-377’s piano sounds faithfully reproduce the
sense of spaciousness and reverberation of an actual
acoustic piano's sound, a certain amount of reverberation
is still perceptible, even with the reverb effect deactivated.
The volume level of the instrument connected
to KR-377 is too low.
e Could you be using a connection cable that contains a
resistor?
Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor.
159
>
Ke)
o
o
3
a
m
©
n
If this Message Appears on Screen
Indication: PU
Meaning: When a song with a pickup (a song that does
not start on the first beat) is played back, the
measure numbers will be indicated in the
display as PU, 1, 2, and so forth.
Indication:Érror.00
Meaning: To protect the copyright, this music file
cannot be saved as an SMF. Also, the music
file can not be saved. If you want to save it,
please save on the same floppy disk.
Indication:Error.01
Meaning: You can only read the music file or Music
Style. It can not be saved on a floppy disk or
internal memory. —
Indication:Error.02
Meaning: The protect tab on the floppy disk is set to the
Protect position. Change it to the Write
position. Repeat the procedure.
Indication:Error.03
Meaning: This floppy disk cannot store the format or
save any data. Insert a different disk and
repeat the procedure.
Indication:Error.04
Meaning: The data cannot be saved onto this floppy
disk because the format is different. Use the
floppy disk in the same format.
Indication:Error.05
Meaning: A new song cannot be written on this song.
Select a different song number or use a
different floppy disk, and repeat the
procedure.
Indication:Error.10
Meaning: No floppy disk is connected to the disk drive.
Insert the disk correctly, and repeat the
procedure.
indication:Error. 11
There is not sufficient space left on the floppy
disk for the data to be saved. Save the data
onto a different floppy disk.
Meaning:
160
Indication:Error. 12
The floppy disk inserted into the disk drive
can't be read. Be sure you're using Roland
Meaning:
SMF Music Files or other music files
compatible with Roland digital pianos (p.
178). Also, if you want to save your work on
floppy disk, you need to format the floppy
disk first (p. 104).
Indication:Error.13
Meaning: The floppy disk was removed from the disk
drive while reading or writing was in
progress. Insert the floppy disk and repeat
the procedure.
Indication:Error.14
Meaning: This floppy disk is damaged and cannot be
used. Insert a different disk and repeat the
procedure.
Indication:Error.15
Meaning: This song or Music Style cannot be read.
Also, you can only use User Programs that
have been saved with the KR-377 (p. 132).
Indication:Error.16
Meaning: The KR-377 cannot read the floppy disk
quickly enough. Press the Stop | M | button,
then press the Reset [ ta | button and Play
[ > ] button to play the song.
Indicated:Error. 17
Meaning: The music files cannot be edited on the KR-
377. Please use these music files only for
playback.
Indication:Error.30
Meaning: The internal memory capacity of the KR-377
is full. Save the song or Music Style data on a
floppy disk (p. 104) to delete the song data or
the User style stored on the KR-377 memory.
Indication:Error.40
The KR-377 cannot deal with the excessive
MIDI data sent from the external MIDI
device. Reduce the amount of MIDI data sent
to the KR-377.
Meaning:
Indication:Error.41
Meaning:
A MIDI cable or computer cable has been
disconnected. Connect it properly and
securely.
Indication:Error.42
Meaning:
An excessive amount of performance data
has been sent to KR-377 in one time and
therefore could not be recorded. Change the
tempo more slowly to record the
performance again.
Indication: Error.43
Meaning:
The Computer Switch is set to a wrong
position or the computer is set wrongly.
Switch off the KR-377 then set the Computer
Switch to the correct position and set the
computer correctly (p. 156). After that, switch
on the KR-377 again.
Indication:Error.51
Meaning:
There is something wrong with the system.
Repeat the procedure from the beginning.
Ifitis not solved after you have tried several
times, contact the Roland service center.
161
>
KA
©
©
3
a.
La]
©
m
[Piano] Group
[E.Piano] Group
Grand Pianol
Ballad Piano
Bright Piano
Rock Piano
Piano Choir
PianoStrings
Harpsi.Singl
Harpsi.Doubl
Air Grand
Bell Piano
Harpsichord
Synth Harpsi
Honky-tonk
Honky-tonk 2
Harpsi.o
Coupled Hps.
Grand Piano2
Piano Oohs
MIDI Piano!
MIDI Piano2
UprightPiano
Piano 1
Piano 2
Piano 3
162
E.Piano 1
E.Piano 2
Dyno Rhodes
Stage Rhodes
Suitcase
Wurly
Vibraphone
Celesta
FM+5A EP
St.FM EP
Marimba
Soft Marimba
E.Piano 3
Hard FM EP
Glockenspiel
Xylophone
EG+Rhodes 1
EG+Rhodes 2
Vibra Bells
Music Box
Detuned EP 1
Detuned EP 2
Pop Vibe.
Pop Celesta
Hard Rhodes
Hard E.Piano
Clav.
Hard Clav.
Soft Clav.
Analog Clav.
SynRingClav.
Phase Clav.
Soft E.Piano
60's E.Piano
Balafon
Tubular-bell
Carillon
Santur
Steel Drums
Kalimba
[Organ] Group
Jazz Organl —
Full Organ 1
Nason fit 8
Diapason 8
Jazz Organ?
Full Organ 2
Lower Organi
Lower Organ?
Rock Organi
Rock Organ2
L-Organ
Pop Organ
Jazz Organ3
Jazz Organ4
Full Organ 3
Full Organ 4
Accordion
Hard Accord
Church Organ
Theater Org.
Organ Flute
Trem.Flute
Harmonica
Metalic Org.
Rotary Org.5
Rotary Org.F
CheeseOrgan
VS Organ
Organ 1
Organ 2
Pipe Org. Bs
Organ Bass
Digi Church
Tone List
LC TT AT een
[Guitar/Bass] Group
[Strings] Group
Nylon Guitar
Steel Guitar
lazz Guitar
jC E.Guitar
Nylon+Steel
Nylon Gt.o
Mandolin
Gut Guitar
Rock Rhythm
Rock Rhythm?
Power Guitar
Power Gt.2
DistortionGt
Overdrive Gt
Feedback Gt2
Gt.Harmonics
12str Guitar
Steel Vox
Acoustic Bs.
A.Bass+Cymbl
Muted Dis.Gt
Muted Gt.
Fingered Bs.
Picked Bs.
Mellow Gt.
5th Dist.
Fretless Bs.
Slap Bass
Mute PickBs.
Mr.Smooth
Jungle Bass
Modular Bass
WireStr Bass
SynthBass101
Synth Bass 1
SH101 Bass
ResoSH Bass
Acid Guitar
Dazed Guitar
Hawalian Gt.
Ukulele
Banjo
Koto
Shamisen
Strings
Slow Strings
Violin
Harp
Tremolo Str
Suspense Str
Velo Strings
EX Orchestra
SlowStrings2
Legato Str
PizzicatoStr
Meilow Pizz.
Oct Strings
Choir Str
Harp Strings
Bell Strings
Strings 2
Warm Strings
Cello
Timpani
Orchestra
OrchestraHit
Syn.Strings1
Syn.Strings2
Syn.Slow Str
Warm JP Str
Slow Violin
Contrabass
OB Strings
Euro Hit
6th Hit
Bass Hit
[Sax] Group
Blow Sax
AltoSax + Tp
Flute
Oboe
Soprano Sax
Grow Sax
English Horn
Bs Clarinet
AltoSax Soft
Tenor Sax f
Pan Flute
Piccolo
Baritone Sax
GS Bari Sax
Clarinet
GS Pan Flute
Alto Sax
Tenor Sax
Bottle Blow
Bassoon
Recorder
Blow Pipe
Ocarina
Shakuhachi
[Brass] Group
Power Brass
Bright Brass
Flugel Horn
SuperF.Horns
St. Brass ff
Brass ff
Trumpet
Trombone
BrassSection
OrchestraBrs
TromboneSoft
Fr.Horn Solo
Soft Brass
DeepSynBrass
Oct SynBrass
Tuba
Brass 1
Brass 2
Trombone 2
MutedTrumpet
Synth Brass1
Synth Brass2
French Horn
>
x
но!
®
=
a
mn
©
wn
163
Tone List
mu
[Voice / GS] ~~ JP8Sgr Pad — Rock Organ? Pop Voice
Gr oup Sweep Pad 2 Reed Organ SynVox
Converge Accordion Fr OrchestraHit
Jazz Scat Big Panner Accordion It G5 Trumpet
Humming Ai-yai-a GS Harmonica GS Trombone
Rich Choir Echo Pan 2 Bandoneon Trombone 2
Dreamy Choir Falling Down GS Nylon Gt. GS Tuba
Doos Voice Poly King Nylon Guitar Muted Trumpet
Doot Accent Octave Stack Nylon Gt.o French Horn
Holy Voices Warm Pad Ukulele Fr.Horn 2
HollowReleas Steel-str.Gt Brass 1
Dat Accent Piano 1 12-str.Gt Brass 2
Bop Accent Piano 1w GS Mandolin Synth Brass]
New Age Pad Piano 1d Jazz Guitar Synth Brass2
Sugar Key Piano 2 GS Hawaiian Synth Brass3
Thum Voice Piano 2w Clean Gt. Synth Brass4
Pop Voice Piano 3 Chorus Gt. AnalogBrassli
Warm SquPad Piano 3w Muted Gt. AnalogBrass2
Natural Lead GS Honkytonk Funk Gt. GS Sop.Sax
Choir Oohs Honky-tonk 2 Funk Gt.2 Alto Sax
Choir GS E.Pianol Overdrive Gt Tenor Sax
LM Square GS E.Piano2 GS Dist.Gt GS Bari Sax
2600 SubOsc 60's E.Piano Feedback Gt. GS Oboe
SynVox E.Piano iv Gt.Harmonics GS Eng.Horn
SquareWave2 E.Piano 2v Gt. Feedback Bassoon
Org Bells Detuned EP 1 GS Ac.Bass Clarinet
Fantasia Detuned EP 2 GS Fing.Bass Piccolo
Crystal ~~. GS Harpsi. GS Picked Bs GS Flute
Harpvox | Е Coupled Hps. Fretless Bs. Recorder
Brightness Harpsi.w Slap Bass GS Pan Flute
Clear Bells Harpsi.o Slap Bass 2 Bottle Blow
Soft Crystal Soft Clav. SynthBass101 Shakuhachi
Digi Bells Celesta Synth Bass 1 Whistle
Dual Sqré&Saw GS Glocken Synth Bass 2 Ocarina
P5 Saw Lead GS Music Box Synth Bass 3 Square Wave
Rhythmic Saw GS Vibe Synth Bass 4 Square
Waspy Synth Vibe.w Rubber Bass Sine Wave
Syn.Square GS Marimba GS Violin Saw Wave
JP8 Square Marimba Slow Violin Saw
FM Lead 1 Xylophone Viola Doctor Solo
FM Lead 2 Tubular-bell GS Cello Syn.Calliope
CC Solo Church Bell Contrabass Chiffer Lead
Mg Lead Carillon GS Trem.Str Charang
TP8 Pulse GS Santur PizzicatoStr Solo Vox
Cheese Saw Organ 1 GS Harp Sth Saw Wave
Nylon Harp Organ 2 Timpani Bass & Lead
Nylon+Rhodes Pop Organ 1 GS Strings Fantasia
Fantasia 2 Detuned Or.1 Orchestra Warm Pad
Soft Pad Detuned Or.2 GS SLStr Polysynth
P5 Poly Church Org.1 Syn.Strings1 Space Voice
Reso Saw Church Org.2 Syn.Strings2 Bowed Glass
RAVE Vox Church Org.3 Syn.Strings3 Metal Pad
Fat & Perky Full Organ 4 Choir Aahs Halo Pad
Heaven II Jazz Organ! Choir Sweep Pad
164
Ice Rain
Soundtrack
Crystal
Syn Mallet
Atmosphere
Brightness
Goblin
Echo Drops
Echo Bell
Echo Pan
Star Theme
Sitar
Sitar 2
Banjo
GS Shamisen
Koto
Taisho Koto
Kalimba
Bagpipe
Fiddle
Shanai
Tinkle Bell
Agogo
Steel Drums
Woodblock
Castanets
Taiko
Concert BD
Melo. Tom 1
Melo. Tom 2
Synth Drum
808 Tom
Elec Perc.
Reverse Cym.
Gt.FretNoise
Gt.Cut Noise
String Slap
Breath Noise
Fl. Key Click
Seashore
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Bird
Dog
Horse-Gallop
Bird 2
Telephone 1
Telephone 2
DoorCreaking
Door
Scratch
Windchime
Helicopter
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
Train
Jetplane
Starship
Burst Noise
Applause
Laughing
Screaming
Punch
Heart Beat
Footsteps
Gun Shot
Machine Gun
Lasergun
Explosion
Piano 1*
Piano 2*
Piano 3*
Honky-tonk*
E.Piano 1*
tE.Piano 2*
Harpsichord*
Clav.*
Celesta*
Glocken*
Music Box*
Vibraphone*
Marimba*
Xylophone*
Tubularbell*
Santur*
Organ 1*
Organ 2*
Pop Organ 1*
Rock Organ2*
ChurchOrg.1*
Reed Organ*
AccordionFr*
Harmonica*
Bandoneon”
Nylon-strGt*
Steel-strGt*
Jazz Guitar*
Clean Gt.*
Muted Gt.*
Funk Gt.*
OverdriveGt*
Dist.Guitar*
Gt.Harmo*
Acoustic Bs*
Fingered Bs*
Picked Bs.*
Fretless Bs*
Slap Bass 1”
Slap Bass 2*
Synth Bass1*
Synth Bass2*
Rubber Bass*
Violin*
Viola*
Cello"
Contrabass*
Tremolo Str*
Pizzicato*
Harp*
Timpani*
Strings*
SlowStrings*
Syn.Str 1*
Syn.Str 2*
Choir Aahs*
Pop Voice*
SynVox*
Orche.Hit*
Trumpet*
Trombone*
Tuba*
M.Trumpet*
FrenchHorns*
Brass 1*
SynthBrass1*
SynthBrass2*
A.Brass 1*
Soprano Sax*
Alto Sax*
Tenor Sax*
BaritoneSax*
Oboe*
EnglishHorn*
Bassoon*
Clarinet*
Piccolo*
Flute*
Recorder”
Pan Flute*
Bottle Blow*
Shakuhachi*
Whistle”
Ocarina*
Square Wave*
Saw Wave*
— Doctor Solo*
SynCalliope*
ChifferLead*
Charang*
Solo Vox*
Sth SawWave*
Bass & Lead*
Fantasia®
Warm Pad*
Polysynth*
Space Voice*
Bowed Glass*
Metal Pad"
Halo Pad*
Sweep Pad*
Ice Rain*
Soundtrack"
Crystal*
Syn Mallet*
Atmosphere* |
Brightness*
Goblin* ©
Echo Drops*
Star Theme*
— Sitar*
Banjo*
Shamisen*
Koto*
Kalimba*
Bagpipe*
Fiddle*
Shanai*
Tinkle Bell*
Agogo”
Steel Drums*
Woodblock*
Taiko*
Melo.Tom 1*
Synth Drum*
ReverseCym.*
Fret Noise*
BredthNoise*
Seashore”
Bird*
Telephone 1*
Helicopter*
Applause*
Gun Shot”
* Tone witha
yt
symbol
appended to their name
may not play back‘:
satisfactorily on other GS
sound generating devices.
165
saunpuaddıy
Drum/SFX Set List
POP ROCK JAZZ BRUSH VOX DRUM
R&B Snare R&B Snare R&B Snare R&B Snare
Rock Snare Pop Snare m Pop Snare m Rock Snare
Rock Snare Pop Snare m Pop Snare m Rock Snare
Pop Snare m Pop Snare m Pop Snare m Pop Snare m
Pop Snare Ghost Pop Snare Ghost Pop Snare Ghost Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m Pop Snare m Pop Snare m Pop Snare m
Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap
707 Claps 707 Claps 707 Claps 707 Claps
Hand Clap [EXC7] Hand Clap [EXC7] Hand Clap [EXC7] Hand Clap [EXC7]
Hand Clap2 [EXC7] Hand Clap2 [EXC7] Hand Clap2 [ЕХС7] Hand Clap2 [EXC7]
Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH [ЕХС1] Pop Pedal HH [EXC1] Pop Pedal HH [EXC1] Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap Gospel Hand Clap Gospel Hand Clap Gospel Hand Clap
Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Vox Dut
Pop Kick Rock Kick Pop Kick Vox Dom
Pop Kick Rock Kick Pop Kick Vox Tuush
Pop Side Stick Rock Side Stick Jazz Snare Swing Vox Hehho
Pop Sanre s Rock Sanre s Jazz Sanre Vox Doyear
Pop Snare Ghost Rock Snare Ghost Pop Snare Swing Vox Thu!
Pop Snare s Rock Snare s Jazz Sanre Vox That
Pop Low Tom f Rock Low Tom f Jazz Low Tom f Vox Aahhh
Pop CHH 1 (EXC1] Rock CHH 1 [EXC1] Pop CHH 1 [EXC1] Vox Tu
Pop Low Tom Rock Low Tom Jazz Low Tom Vox Dooh
Pop CHH 2 [EXC1] Rock CHH 2 [EXC1] Pop CHH 2 [EXC] Vox Ptu
Pop Mid Tom f Rock Mid Tom f Jazz Mid Tom f | Vox Down
Pop OHH [EXC1] Rock OHH [EXC1] Pop OHH [EXC1] Vox Pa
Pop Mid Tom Rock Mid Tom Jazz Mid Tom Vox Bom
Pop High Tom f Rock High Tom f Jazz High Tom f Vox Toear
Pop Crash Cymbal 1 Rock Crash Cymbal Jazz Crash Cymbal 1 Vox Aahhu
50 Pop High Tom Rock High Tom Jazz High Tom Vox Toya
Pop Ride Cymbal 1 Rock Ride Cymbal 1 Jazz Ride Cymbal 1 Vox Thu
52 Pop Chinees Cymbal Pop Chinees Cymbal Jazz Chinees Cymbal Vox Cheey
Pop Ride Bell Pop Ride Beli Jazz Ride Cymbal 2 Vox Cymm
Tambourine 2 Tambourine 2 Tambourine 2 Vox Tub
Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Vox Pruru
Cha Cha Cowbell Cha Cha Cowbell Cha Cha Cowbell Vox Tut
Pop Crash Cymbal 2 Chinees Cymbal Jazz Crash Cymbal 2 Vox Tyun
Vibra-slap 2 Vibra-slap 2 Vibra-slap 2 Vox Tdum
Pop Ride Cymbal 2 Pop Ride Cymbal 3 Pop Ride Cymbal 2 Vox Afahhhh
C4 High Bongo 2 High Bongo 2 High Bongo 2 High Bongo 2
Low Bongo 2 Low Bongo 2 Low Bongo 2 Low Bongo 2
Mute Conga Mute Conga Mute Conga Mute Conga
High Conga 2 High Conga 2 High Conga 2 High Conga 2
Low Conga 2 Low Conga 2 Low Conga 2 Low Conga 2
High Timbale 2 High Timbale 2 High Timbale 2 High Timbale 2
Low Timbale 2 Low Timbale 2 Low Timbale 2 Low Timbale 2
High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo
Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo
Shaker 3 Shaker 3 Shaker 3 Shaker 3
Shaker 4 Shaker 4 Shaker 4 Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle __[EXC2] Short Hi Whistle __{EXC2] Short Hi Whistle [EXC2] Short Hi Whistle ¡EXC2]
cs Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves Claves Claves Claves
High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block
Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica [EXC4] Mute Cuica [EXCA] Mute Cuica [ЕХС4] Mute Cuica [EXC4]
Open Cuica [EXCA] Open Cuica [EXCA] Open Cuica [EXC4] Open Cuica [EXC4]
Mute Triangle [EXC5] Mute Triangle [EXC5] Mute Triangle [EXCS] Mute Triangle [EXC]
Open Triangle [EXC5] Open Triangle [EXC5] Open Triangle [EXC5] Open Triangle [EXCS5]
Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker
ingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell
ce Bell Tree Beil Tree Beli Tree Bell Tree
Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo (EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo {EXC6] Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXCH]
88 Cana Cana Cana Cana
* ---_-: No sound.
* [EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
166
POP
ROCK
JAZZ BRUSH
Drum/SFX Set List
VOX DRUM
Falamenco Hi-Timbale
Falamenco Lo-Timbale
Falamenco Tmbl Flam
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
Falamenco Hi-Timbale
Falamenco Lo-Timbale
Falamenco Tmbi Flam
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
Falamenco Hi-Timbale
Falamenco Lo-Timbale
Falamenco Tmbl Fiam
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
Falamenco Hi-Timbale
Falamenco Lo-Timbale:
Falamenco Tmb! Flam
Shekere 1
Shekere 2
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
me par te a
— ть
al ¡e de BE
чье
Falamenco HC
Falamenco HC
Bongo Cowbell
a
-————
Falamenco HC
Falamenco HC
Bongo Cowbel!
me ré
-—._
——
= вонь тень
а о им
Falamenco HC
Falamenco HC
Bongo Cowbell
Bongo Cowbell
a i
не a
i ee
_—
Falamenco HC
Falamenco HC
Bongo Cowbell
dd e
Bongo Cowbell
.—
167
>
ке
©
E
3
oh
La
o
La
Drum/SFX Set List
эн
* [EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
168
STANDARD ROOM POWER ELECTRONIC
21 ee eee eee
Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime
Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll
Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap
High Q High Q | High Q High Q
Slap Slap Slap Slap : N
Scratch Push [EXC7] Scratch Push [EXC7] Scratch Push [EXC7] Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7] Scratch Pull [EXC7] Scratch Pull [EXC7] Scratch Pull [EXC7]
Sticks Sticks Sticks | Sticks a
Square Click Square Click Square Click Square Click
Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click
Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell
Std Kick 2' Kick! Std Kick 2 Std Kick 2
Kick 1 Room Kick MONDO Kick Elec BD
Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick
Std Snr 1 Room Snr 1 Gated SD Elec SD
Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap
Std Snr 2 Std Snr 1 Snare Drum 2 Gated SD
Low Tom 2 Room Low Tom 2’ Room Low Tom 2 Elec Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 1' [EXC1] Closed Hi-hat 1' [EXCH] Closed Hi-hat 1 [EXCH] Closed Hi-hat 1 [ЕХС1]
Low Tom 1 Room Low Tom 4 Room Low Tom 1 Elec Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 1' [EXC] Pedal Hi-hat 1' [EXC1] Pedal Hi-hat 1 [EXC 1] Pedal Hi-hat 1 [EXC1]
Mid Tom 2 Room Mid Tom 2’ Room Mid Tom 2 Elec Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 1’ [EXC1] Open Hi-hat 1’ [EXC1] Open Hi-hat 1 [EXC1] Open Hi-hat 1 [EXC1]
Mid Tom 1 Room Mid Tom 1’ Room Mid Tom 1 Elec Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2 Room Hi Tom 2’ Room Hi Tom 2 Elec Hi Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1 Room Hi Tom 1' Room Hi Tom 1 Elec Hi Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbai 1 Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Reverse Cymbal
Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell
Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine
Splash Cymbai Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal
Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap Vibra-slap Vibra-siap Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo High Bongo High Bongo High Bongo
Low Bongo Low Bongo Low Bongo Low Bongo
Mute High Conga Mute High Conga Mute High Conga Mute High Conga
Open High Conga Open High Conga Open High Conga Open High Conga
Low Conga Low Conga Low Conga Low Conga
High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale
Low Timbale L.ow Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale
High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo
Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo
Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa
Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas
Short Hi Whistle. [EXC2] Short Hi Whistle _ [EXC2] Short Hi Whistle [EXC2] Short Hi Whistle _ [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3]
Claves Ciaves Claves Claves
High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block
Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica [EXC4] Mute Cuica [EXC4] Mute Cuica [EXC4] Mute Cuica TEXCA]
Open Cuica [EXCA] Open Cuica [EXCA] Open Cuica [EXC4] Open Cuica [EXC4]
Mute Triangle [ЕХС5] Mute Triangle [ЕХС5] Mute Triangle [EXC5] Mute Triangle {EXC5]
Open Triangle [EXC5} Open Triangle [ЕХС5] Open Triangle [ЕХС5] Open Triangle [ЕХС5]
Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker
Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell
Bell Tree Beil Tree Bell Tree Beli Tree
Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets
Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXCH]
Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXCH]
: No sound.
Drum/SFX Set List
C4
C5
C6/84
JAZZ
TR-808 DANCE GS STANDARD BRUSH
21 | ..... нор
Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime
Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll
Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap
High Q High Q High Q High Q a
Slap Slap Slap Slap Fao
Scratch Push [EXC?7] Scratch Push [EXC7] Scratch Push [EXC7] | Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull [EXC7] Scratch Pull [EXC7] Scratch Pull [EXC7] Scratch Pull JEXC7]
Sticks Dance Snr 1 Sticks Sticks Ps
Square Click Square Click Square Click Square Click
Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click
Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell - Metronome Bell
Std Kick 2 Kick 1 Std Kick 2 Kick 2
808 Bass Drum 1 808 Bass Drum 2 Std Kick 1 Kick 1
808 Rim Shot 808 Rim Shot Side Stick Side Stick
808 Snare Drum TR-809 Snr Snare Drum 1 Brush Tap
Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Brush Slap
Snare Drum 2 Dance Snr 2 Snare Drum 2 Brush Swirl
808 Low Tom 2 808 Low Tom 2 Low Tom 2 Brush Low Tom 2
808 CHH [EXC1] 808 CHH [EXC1] Closed Hi-hat 1 [EXC1] Closed Hi-hat2 [EXC1]
808 Low Tom 1 808 Low Tom 1 Low Tom 1 Brush Low Tom 1 ее
808 CHH [EXC1] 808 CHH [EXC1] Pedal Hi-hat 1 [EXC1] Pedal Hi-hat 2 [EXC1]
808 Mid Tom 2 808 Mid Tom 2 Mid Tom 2 Brush Mid Tom2 -—.
808 OHH [EXC1] 808 OHH [EXC1] Open Hi-hat 1 [EXC1] Open Hi-hat 2 [EXC1]
808 Mid Tom 1 808 Mid Tom 1 Mid Tom 1 Brush Mid Tom 1 a.
808 Hi Tom 2 808 Hi Tom 2 High Tom 2 Brush Hi Tom 2
808 Cymbal 808 Cymbal Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1
808 Hi Tom 1 808 Hi Tom 1 High Tom 1 Brush Hi Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Beli Ride Bell
Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine
Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal
808 Cowbell 808 Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-siap Vibra-slap Vibra-siap Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo High Bongo High Bongo High Bongo
Low Bongo Low Bongo Low Bongo Low Bongo a
808 High Conga 808 High Conga Mute High Conga Mute High Conga ~~ +
808 Mid Conga 808 Mid Conga Open High Conga Open High Conga .
808 Low Conga 808 Low Conga Low Conga Low Conga ER
High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale
Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale
High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo
Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo
Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa
808 Maracas 808 Maracas Maracas | Maracas — os
Short Hi Whistle [EXCZ] Short Hi Whistle fEXC2] Short Hi Whistle [EXC2] Short Hi Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3]
Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro TEXC3]
808 Claves 808 Claves Claves Ciaves
High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block
Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica IEXC4] Mute Cuica [EXCA] Mute Cuica [EXCA] Mute Cuica [EXCA]
Open Cuica [EXC4] Open Cuica [EXC4] Open Cuica [ЕХС4] Open Cuica [EXC4]
Mute Triangle [ЕХС5] Mute Triangle [ЕХС5] Mute Triangle [EXC5] Mute Triangle [ЕХС5]
Open Triangle [EXC5] Open Triangle [EXCS] Open Triangle [ЕХС5] Open Triangle [EXCS]
Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker o
ingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell LE
Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree
Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets o
Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXC6]
Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXCH]
= ter
чо нь нь
a
saexpuaddy
169
Drum/SFX Set List
(UT TT TT AAC TT TN A АОН
E SFX
ORCHESTRA GS ROOM GS BRUSH SOUND EFFECTS
A E e mem.
Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime | --—--
Snare Roll Snare Roll SnareRoli | -----
Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap | =
Close Hi-hat [EXCH] High Q HighQ | ee
Pedal Hi-hat [EXC1] Slap Slap ~~ À A
Open Hi-hat [EXC1] Scratch Push [EXC7] Scratch Push [EXC7] | -----
Ride Cymbal Scratch Pull [EXC7] Scratch Pull [EXC7] | ——
Sticks Sticks Sticks 1 meee
Square Click Square Click Square Click à —
Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click |
Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Belt 1
Concert BD 2 Sid Kick 2 Std Kick 2 ==
C2136 Concert BD 1 Std Kick 1 Std Kick1 eee
Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick fe
38 Concert SD Snare Drum 1 Brush Tap | ==
Castanets Hand Clap Brush Slap High Q
40 Concert SD Snare Drum 2 Brush Swirl Slap
41 Timpani F Room Low Tom 2 Low Tom 2 Scratch Push [EXC7]
Timpani F# Closed Hi-hat 1 [EXCH] Closed Hi-hat 1 [EXC1] Scratch Pull [EXC7]
43 TimpaniG Room Low Tom 1 Low Tom 1 Sticks Cn
Timpani G# Pedal Hi-hat 1 [EXC1] Pedal Hi-hat 1 [EXC1] Square Click
45 Timpani A Room Mid Tom 2 Mid Tom 2 Metronome Click
47 Timpani A# Open Hi-hat 1 [EXC1] Open Hi-hat 1 [EXC1] Metronome Bell
Timpani B Room Mid Tom 1 MidTom 1 Guitar sliding Finger
calas Timpani c Room Hi Tom 2 High Tom 2 Guitar cutting noise (up).
Timpani c# Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Guitar cutting noise (down)
50 Timpani d Room Hi Tom 1 High Tom 1 String slap of double bass
Timpani d# Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Fl.Key Click oo
52 Timpani e Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Laughing
53 Timpani f Ride Bell Ride Beli Screaming
Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Punch
55 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Heart Beat
Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Footsteps
57 Concert Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Footsteps?
Vibra-slap Vibra-slap Vibra-siap Applause
Concert Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Door Creaking
High Bongo High Bongo High Bongo Door
Low Bongo Low Bongo Low Bongo Scratch
Mute High Conga Mute High Conga Mute High Conga Wind Chimes
Open High Conga Open High Conga Open High Conga Car-Engine
Low Conga Low Conga Low Conga Car-Stop
High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale Car-Pass
Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Car-Crash
High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo Siren
Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Train
Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Jetplane
Maracas Maracas Maracas Helicopter
Short Hi Whistle [EXC2] Short Hi Whistle [EXC2] Short Hi Whistle [EXC2] Starship
Long Low Whistie [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Long Low Whistle [EXC2] Gun Shot
Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3] Short Guiro [EXC3] Machine Gun
Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3] Long Guiro [EXC3] Lasergun
Claves Claves Claves Explosion
High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block Dog
Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Horse-Gallop
Mute Cuica [EXC4] Mute Cuica [EXC4] Mute Cuica [ЕХС4] Birds
Open Cuica [EXCA] Open Cuica [EXCA] Open Cuica [ЕХС4] Rain
Mute Triangle [ЕХС5] Mute Triangle [ЕХС5) Mute Triangle [ЕХС5] Thunder
Open Triangle [ЕХС5] Open Triangle [ЕХС5] Open Triangle [EXCH] Wind
Shaker Shaker Shaker Seashore
Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bel! Stream
Ce|g4 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bubble
Castanets Castanets Castanets Cat
Mute Surdo [EXCH] Mute Surdo [EXC6] Mute Surdo [EXC6] | -----
Open Surdo [EXCH] Open Surdo [EXC6] Open Surdo [EXCB] | -----
Applause E] ee mm
an : No sound.
* [EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
170
Pop
Music Style
Cool Al
Michael'sPop
Light Pop
Latin Pop
Power Pop
16Beat Pop 1
West Coast
MorningLight
Rollin’
8Beat Pop 1
Swing Pop
Rock'n Pop
Euro Dance
Light Fusion
Mersey Beat
Acoustic Pop
Acoustic
Piano Pop
Guitar Waltz
Piano Latin
PianoRagtime
Piano Night
Piano Waltz
Piano Jazz
PianoShuffle
Pf Concerto
PianoBoogie
PianoClasicl
StridePiano
Gtr.FastPop2
P.Slow Waltz
Strings
Piano Gospel
P.Country
P.Bossa Nova
P.Pop2
P.Ragtime
P.Stride
P.Concerto 1
P.Ballad 1
P.Swing Pop
P.Rock'nRoll
P.Concerto 2
P.Swing
P.Slow Swing
P.Latin
Ballad
Pop Ballad
Swing Ballad
70's 8beat
12/8 Ballad
6/8 Ballad
Soulful Sax
MediumBallad
Love Romance
Gt.Arpeggio
70's Ballad
Chapel
PianoBallad
Rock
70's 1
Easy Rock
80's Rock
16Beat Rock
Rock 1
Rock 2
AcousticRekl
Early Rock
Oldies
Country
Lets Twist
Cntry Pickin
Honky Tonkin'
Country Song
Cntry Rockin
Tejano
Walkn
Bluegrass
Western
CountryWaltz
Country Rock
Twostep
Country Tune
Big Band/ Swing
BigBand Pop
A Cappella
Big Serenade
Organ Swing
Fast BigBand
BigBandBlues
Scat Swing
Slow Swing
Swing in
Latin
JB Soul
The Blues
Rock n Roll
50's R&B
Beach Sound
Cute Pop
Dreamin’
50's Pop 1
Slow Dance
Rock'n Cntry
P.50's Rock
P.Boogie
60's R&B
Enka 1
Enka 2
Bossa Nova 1
Bossa Nova 2
Latin
Mambo
Salsa
Samba
Rhumba
Beguine
Chacha
Tango
Slow Bossa
sasnpuaddy
171
Music Style List
Waltz
ViennaWaltz2
Fast Waltz
Screen 1
Raindrops
Balloon Trip
StringsWaltz
Slow Waltz
Last Dance
Screen 2
Cinema
Festival
Waltzing
Vienna Waltz
Musette
SEX Movie
Western Movie
Little Steps
DeutschWalzr
Summer Days
Black& White
Simple Waltz
March/Kids
March
Parade
Kids
Circus
Fanfare
Kids Pop
Kids 4/4
Kids Dance
SimpleMarch1
SimpleMarch2
Lullaby 4/4
Music Box
Kids 6/8
172
Trad
Gospel Shout
Gospel Piano
Foxtrot
Foxtrot 2
Gospel Pop
Anthem
Dixieland
Charleston
Gospel
Schlager
Polka
Ireland
Scotland
Hawaiian
Japan
Data Disk Style
01 Ocean Side
02 16Beat Pop
03 70s Disco
04 Popn Rol
05 16BeatBallad
06 60's Ballad
07 Swayin
08 Contemporary *
09 Club Piano
10 G.Pop
11 Twist
12 Shuffle
13 PianoBoogie2
14 CountryRoads
15 CtrySerenade
16 CountryPiano
7 Easy Country
18 Hoedown
19 Cajun
20 CountryBlues
21 BigBandSwing
22 BigBndBallad
23 Slow Swing *
24 Blues
25 Combo
26 Mambo *
27 Merengue
28 Calypso
29 New BossaNova
30 Broadway
31 Jazz Waltz *
32 March *
33 Habanera
34 Sevilla
* A Music Style indicated by *" has the
same name as a built-in Music Style,
but its contents are different.
Prythm Pattern
(Measure)
16Beat2
= = uv 1 dW WW OW OW OW Om Ee WE
Stick 6/8
ee ow =
LA am AA m
CEC CL
TL. —
Wa WoW om Ee a = m om om ow wm ow
= = = = ы = =] AE EEE A ¡AAA E OO OU] =
о шото о=омотон ово о= = = ое о= = = ном оео=о= от ое ое ое ом ®ое
(2)
к. =. == = = = я = = мот от оо ое оно“ ow mT Nx RoW om os
PE mM Wm Om Em Om Om dW Wh WW Mm Wm Em mm ME de WW mom om om or wa
BOW OM OW Om ON Wm Om om WE MOM A MR Wm ww
= + Wr Wm Wm mm i mW + #4 = = = = dr Ww бобы WM BM mR mm ww BW
E wm ow mW OM ER OM Om om om oR WM AR Om ORE ER BR oF RR NR aw *
EE Om Om OM Om Om Em om om om ow om ANO Wow ow WW
A EB se Mm Wm om om od WW WW Em im dE WW Ww ae Ww mm mE AW
"EEE CE re un wm ow ow
naar m
xo.“ m Wm Em = = RM mW mh a de Em Mm WW Wr mE ae mE mm ee Wm ow
WOM MW Wr Em om om om we MW WW mm om Mr ow WR WE Ww om WW 8
„ =. WwW Om = mom WE om = de au mom om om woe
mm ow A MOM OW Om ES AA WwW mom Om Om om wm om m ow ow
EA mm mk WE MR WW WE WE Em om om od Me MW We A a om de Wr WW
mow Ww Em OE WM Aa Em OE Om OW OW OW ON EB Wm Om BOW OE Om WWW OE Wm ow a
*#* m Wm Om OW Om Om OW os "= =."
dl dM MW FE Om WM Om WB MM a ME WW BN Wm = om ER EROS RR NM Na
mow Mr WH BM Em a om om om Re EW OW OR a mR ME KR OR Om Wm mow Bow
EM lm mW WOW WoW A NE Mo A AE OW OW A WW
mmm Om Om A m = m =
- w = % WM = = = de EEE tn om EWE
===" = "=" "" "="...
mM Ee MOE A BOA OE Wm Om OW oem BR BNW OW Om MEBs ROB NW
“+= - We Wm OE Mm Ww WW om wow WM Em ER Em OB OB Ww OW WM 7” = = Wm ow
Wm WOW OW om OW OW OW WW Wm mow ow OW or ME FER BRN OE “ое "ое
lu # Om Om Wm Om Om om Om Ww WOR OW WF Om OW OE oN FW WR Ow ow ow ow о+
= he ME EE EW we MW A Em Mm We Me A Rm a mW We mom >
= = = = we de MM wh oak de Em om WE ow ow ow MoM a wom EB WW Noa
ow We Me ME MR MW TM mW Wa ER We Me a BM ww a Ra ow om
PU AE A A CR A LE I EE m
173
sasipuaddy
® symbol : Indicates the constituent note of chords.
* symbol : Chord shown with an “*”can be played by pressing just the key marked with the “x” (p. 61).
JI ill ММ) АЗ EE
C#M7 Eb M7
C7 C#7 D7 Eb 7 E7 F7
Cm C#m Dm Ebm Em Fm
Cm7 C#m7 Dm7 Eb m7 Em7 Fm7
Cdim C#dim Ddim Eb dim Edim Fdim
Cm7 (b5) C#m7 (b5) Dm7 (b5) Eb m7 (b5) Em7 (b5) Fm7 (b5)
Caug C#aug Daug Eb aug Eaug Faug
Csus4 C#sus4 Dsus4 Eb sus4 Esus4 Fsus4
C7sus4 C#7sus4 D7sus4 Eb 7sus4 E7sus4 F7sus4
. о |2 НИ . ole! ¡e EY . ele LEHR
Сб C#6 D6 Eb6 E6 F6
C#m6
Eb m6
ETT Eee Error) Terre) (JU Era
174
om "(ТАТУ ни "(РТА ни УТ СТАТ
iy Fe ve va ee TO mm
ТАН) [ИИ [РРР [ААА [РИ ГА
ПАРА) [РЕ (РЕНИ АВИА [ААА (РА
Ao Ce ET A e
Asus4 Bbsus4 Bsus4 .. . —.
175
Effects List
Display
Description
Chorus
Makes sounds broader and fatter.
Stereo Chorus :
À stereo chorus.
Hexa Chorus
A multilayer chorus.
Tremolo Chorus
A chorus with a tremolo effect. ;
Space D _
“| Aclearchorus. ——
Rotary
Adds a rotary-speaker effect.
“| Delays the sound with a stereo effect.
Modulation Delay
Adds a wavering effect to the delayed sound.
Triple Tap Delay | Athree-way delay.
Quadruple Tap Delay A four-way delay. |
Phaser Adds undulations to the sound.
Stereo Flanger
Adds metallic reverberations.
Step Flanger
A flanger that varies the pitch in a stepwise fashion.
Enhancer | Adds modulation to thesound.
Overdrive Applies soft distortion to the sound.
Distortion Applies hard distortion to the sound.
Auto Wah “| Changes the tone in a cyclical manner. —
Compressor Suppresses fluctuations in volume.
Gate Reverb
| Cuts off the reverberations before they fade away completely.
2V Pitch Shifter
Adds two pitch-shifted sounds to the original sound (two-voice pitch shifter).
FB Pitch Shifter
Adds a single pitch-shifted sound to the original sound (feedback pitch shifter).
Enhancer->Chorus Applies both enhancer and chorus effects.
Enhancer->Flanger Applies both enhancer and flanger effects.
Enhancer->Delay | Applies both enhancer and delay effects.
Chorus->Delay Applies both chorus and delay effects.
Flanger->Delay | Applies both flanger and delay effects. |
Overdrive->Chorus Applies both overdrive and chorus effects. |
Overdrive->Flanger Applies both overdrive and flanger effects.
Overdrive->Delay a Applies both overdrive and delay effects. -
Distortion->Chorus Applies both distortion and chorus effects.
Distortion->Flanger Applies both distortion and flanger effects.
Distortion->Delay Applies both distortion and delay effects.
Sympathetic Resonance
Applies a resonance effect when the damper pedal is depressed.
176
No. Title | Composer Copyright
1 Anna Map A Anh. 114 from “Notebook Of J. S. Bach © 1992 Roland Corporation
2 | Gymnopedie No. 1 oo E. Satie © 1997 Roland Corporation
3 | Piano Sonata No. 15'in C Major, ist Movement W. A. Mozart © 1996 Roland Corporation
4 omen Landmann” from “Album Fiir Die Jugend” R. Schumann | ©1996 Roland Corporation |
5 | Londonderry Air Irish Folksong © 1993 Roland Corporation
6 | A Maiden's Prayer a El T. Badarzewska | © 1996 Roland Corporation
7 | Ave Maria C. Gounod E 1993 Roland Corporation
8 | The Entertainer ‚$. ор © 1994 Roland Corporation -
9 | Air from Ouvertüre No.3 BWV.1068 J. 3 Bach Е | | © 1996 Roland Corporation
10 | Etude No. 74 from “Beyer Piano Textbook” F. Beyer © 1996 Roland Corporation
11 | Etude No. 78 from “Beyer Piano Textbook” F. Beyer © 1996 Roland Corporation
12 | Etude No. 90 from “Beyer Piano Textbook” F. Beyer © 1996 Roland Corporation
13 | No.2" Arabesque” from 25 Easy Studies Op. 100 F. Burgmiiller O 1999 Roland Corporation
14 | No.5 “Innocence” from 25 Easy Studies Op. 100 F. Burgmiiller | © 1999 Roland Corporation
15 | No. 6 “Progrès” from 25 Easy Studies Op. 100 | F. Burgmüller © 1999 Roland Corporation
16 | No. 11 “La Bergeronnette” from 25 Easy Studies Op. 100 F. Burgmiiller © 1999 Roland Corporation
17 | No. 17 “La Babillarde” from 25 Easy Studies Op. 100 F. Burgmiiller O 1999 Roland Corporation
* Use of the song data and music style data supplied with this product for any purpose other than private, personal enjoyment without the
permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law. Additionally, this data must not be copied, nor used in a secondary copyrighted
work without the permission of the copyright holder.
>
T
v
®
3
o:
a
©
Lu
177
What Are Music Files?
Music Files contain information describing the details of a
musical performance, such as “the C3 key on a keyboard was
pressed for this amount of time, using this amount of
force.”By inserting the floppy disk into the disk drive on the
KR-377, the performance information is sent from the floppy
disk to the piano, and played faithfully by the piano. This is
different than a CD, since the music file does not contain a
recording of the sound itself. This makes it possible to erase
certain parts, or to change instruments, tempos and keys
freely, allowing you to use it in many different ways.
Regarding Copyright
Use of the song data supplied with the Data Disk attached to
this product for any purpose other than private, personal
enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder is
prohibited by law. Additionally, this data must not be
copied, nor used in a secondary copyrighted work without
the permission of the copyright holder.
E The KR-377 allows you to use
the following music files
Floppy disks saved on a Roland MT Series, or Roland
Piano Digital HP-G/KR Series instrument
e Roland Digital Piano Compatible Music Files
Roland's original music file is made specifically for
practicing the piano. Some follow an instructional
curriculum, allowing for a complete range of lessons, such as
“practicing each hand separately” or “listening to only the
accompaniment.”
e SMF Music Files (720KB/1.44MB format)
SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) use a standard format for music
file that was formulated so that files containing music file
could be widely compatible, regardless of the manufacturer
of the listening device. An enormous variety of musicis
available, whether it be for listening, for practicing musical
instruments, for Karaoke, etc.
If you wish to purchase SMF Music Files, please consult the
retailer where you purchased your KR-377.
SMF with Lyrics SME
“SMF with Lyrics” refers to SMF (Standard MIDI File) that
contains the lyrics. When Music Files carrying the “SMF with
Lyrics” logo are played back on a compatible device (one
bearing the same logo), the lyrics will appear in its display.
178
E About the KR-377 Sound
Generator
The KR-377 come equipped with GM 2/GS sound
generators.
GENERAL
General MIDI MIDI
SERRA
The General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks
to provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary
designs, and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound
generating devices. Sound generating devices and music files
that meets the General MIDI standard bears the General
MIDI logo. Music files bearing the General MIDI logo can be
played back using any General MIDI sound generating unit
to produce essentially the same musical performance.
GENERAL
General MIDI 2 2
ST ne
The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 recommendations
pick up where the original General MIDI left off, offering
enhanced expressive capabilities, and even greater
compatibility.
Issues that were not covered by the original General MIDI
recommendations, such as how sounds are to be edited, and
how effects should be handled, have now been precisely
defined. Moreover, the available sounds have been
expanded.
General MIDI 2 compliant sound generators are capable of
reliably playing back music files that carry either the General
MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo.
In some cases, the conventional form of General MIDI, which
does not include the new enhancements, is referred to as
“General MIDI 1” as a way of distinguishing it from General
MIDI 2.
GS Format >
The GS Format is Roland's set of specifications for
standardizing the performance of sound generating devices.
In addition to including support for everything defined by
the General MIDI, the highly compatible GS Format
additionally offers an expanded number of sounds, provides
for the editing of sounds, and spells out many details for a
wide range of extra features, including effects such as reverb
and chorus.
Designed with the future in mind, the GS Format can readily
include new sounds and support new hardware features
when they arrive.
Since it is upwardly compatible with the General MIDI,
Roland's GS Format is capable of reliably playing back GM
Scores equally as well as it performs GS music files (music
files that have been created with the G5 Format in mind).
This product supports both the General MIDI 2 and the G5
Format, and can be used to play back music data carrying
either of these logos.
Grossary
Arrange
This is an abbreviation of “Arrangement.” lt refers to
changes that have been made in an original tune, by adding a
new accompaniment or by changing the instruments used.
Automatic Accompaniment
The KR-377 automatically plays accompaniment when just a
few keys in the lower section of the keyboard are pressed to
specify the chord. This is called the “One Touch Arranger”
(p. 30).
Bouncing Ball
The flashing dot that moves in a semicircular pattern across
the screen of the KR-377 is called a “Bouncing Ball” (p. 57).
Chord
Two or more notes sounding at the same time (p. 61).
Division
The six performance states that make up a Music Style are
called “Divisions” (p. 60).
Drum Set
A Drum Set is a collection of percussive instrument sounds.
With drum sets, a different sound can be heard for each key
on the keyboard. The special effects sound set is called the
“SFX Set” (p. 44).
Edit
Editing is to change the song you have recorded, such as by
erasing part of the song, or copying a measure (p. 119).
Ending
This is the last part of the accompaniment. When you stop
playing the automatic accompaniment, the KR-377 plays an
ending appropriate for the style (p. 67).
Ensemble
A combined performance of two or more instruments is
called an “Ensemble.”
icon
The on-screen graphics that appear three dimensional work
like buttons. These are called “Icons.”
Intro
This is the introductory portion of an automatic
accompaniment performance. The KR-377 plays an intro
ideally suited to each style when it starts playing the
automatic accompaniment (p. 67).
Key Touch
This is the sensation of heaviness—the “touch” —of the keys
when the keyboard is played (p. 135).
Layer Play
Playing with two different tones on a key simultaneously is
called “Layer Play” (p. 47).
Music Style
Music Styles are performance patterns in various musical
genres. A Music Style is played automatically in accord with
the specified chord using the KR-377's One-touch Arranger
Function (p. 63).
Part
On the KR-377, “Part” can have two different meanings. One
meaning refers to a performance part (p. 60), such as the
right-hand part of a piano song. The other refers to the 16
parts in the 16-track sequencer (p. 113).
Pickup
A song with a pickup does not start on the first beat (p. 99).
PU (Pickup)
A song that does not start on the first beat starts with what is
called a pickup. When playing a pickup song, the measures
will be shown in the display as “PU, 1, 2...".
Save
Saving is storing the recorded performance data onto a
floppy disk (p. 104).
Sound Generator
The sound generator of the KR-377 supports GM2/GS, and
can play 589 different sounds (p. 178).
Split Play
The division of the keyboard into upper and lower zones is
referred to as “Split,” and different tones can be played in the
keys on different sides of the key that acts as the boundary
between the upper part and lower part (p. 49).
Standard Pitch
The pitch of the sound created by playing the middle A on
the keyboard is called the “Standard Pitch.” Changing the
standard pitch of the KR-377 is called “Master Tune,” and
tuning to other musical instrument is called “Tuning” (p.
146).
Tone
Tones are the musical instruments or effect sounds stored in
the internal memory of the KR-377. The display shows
“TONE.”
Tuning Curves
Graphic representations of the changes in pitch of the
equally-tempered tuning versus those of actual tunings are
called “Tuning Curves” (p. 136).
>
"В
Ще,
©
3
BE
m
®
th
179
DIGITAL PIANO Date : May. 1, 2000
Model KR-377 MIDI Implementation Chart Version : 1.00
, Transmitted Recognized | Remarks
Function... a
Basic Default 1 1-16
Channel Changed 1-16 1-16
Default Mode 3 Mode 3
Mode Messages X Mode 3, 4(M=1) 2
Altered Jed ST de MR de NE AO
Note 15-113 0-127
Number . True Voice Wk hhh hd kd kw 0-1 27
, Note ON O O
Velocity Note OFF x 8nv=64 x
After Key's X O *1
Touch Ch's x O "1
Pitch Bend e O
0,32 | O O *1 Bank select
11 0 *4 O *1 Modulation
51 O *4 O *q Portamento time
6, 38 | О *1 O *1 Data entry
710 O “1 Volume
10| O *1 O *1 Panpot
Control 111 0 *1 O “1 Expression
Change 64 | O О 1 Hold 1
g 65 | © q O “1 Portamento
66 | O O *1 Sostenuto
67 | O O *1 Soft
84} O *1 O *1 Portamento control
9110 O (Reverb) *1 Effecti depth
93; O O (Chorus} *1 Effect3 depth
98,99 | О * | O *1 NRPN LSB, MSB
100, 1011 O “q O 1 RPN LSB, MSB
Prog 0 0-127 O
Change : True # ETT 0-127 Program number 1-128
System Exclusive O O
: Song Pos X X
System : Song Sel X X
ommon
: TUNE X X
System : Clock O X
Real Time :Commands X X
: All sound off X O (120, 126, 127)
: Reset all controllers| X O
Aux : Local Control X O
Message : Ali Notes OFF X O (123-125)
: Active Sense O O
: Reset X X
Notes * 1 Ox is selectable by SysEx.
* 2 Recognized as M=1 even if M=1.
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO O : Yes
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO X: No
180
Main Specifications
<Keyboard>
Keyboard
88 keys Progressive Hammer Action mechanism
Touch Sensitivity
100 Levels
Keyboard Mode
Whole
Split (adjustable Split Point)
Layer
Arranger
Piano Style Arranger
Manual Drum/SFX
<Sound Source>
Conforms to GM2/GS
Max. Polyphony
Stereo 64 voices
Tones
8 groups 589 variations (including 16 drum sets, 1 SFX set)
Temperament
8 types, selectable tonic
Stretched Tuning
2 types
Master Tunings
415.3 Hz to 466.2 Hz (0.1 Hz steps)
Transpose
Key Transpose (-6 to +5 half-steps)
Playback Transpose (-24 to +24 half-steps)
Effects
Reverb (8 types, stepless level adjustable)
Chorus (8 types, 127 levels)
Sympathetic Resonance, Rotary and 32 other types
Advanced 3D
<Arranger>
Music Style
Internal: 11 groups 162 styles x 4 types (Style Orchestrator)
Data Disk: 34 styles
Programmable Music Styles
Style Converter
Style Composer
Melody intelligence
24 types
User Programs
Internal: 32
Disk: Max. 99 sets
Control
Start/Stop, Intro/Ending, Sync. Start,
Fill-In (Variation /Original), Arranger Reset, Count Down,
Melody Intelligence, Break, Leading Bass,
Half Fill-In (Variation/ Original)
<Composer>
Metronome
Beat: 2/2, 0/4,2/4,3/4,4/4,5/4,0/4,7/4,3/8,6/8,9/8,12/8
Volume: 10 levels
Pattern: 11 patterns
Sounds: 8 types
Track
5/16 tracks
Song
1 song
Note Storage
Approx. 30,000 notes
Tempo
Quarter note = 20 to 250
Resolution
120 ticks per quarter note
Recording Method
Realtime (Replace, Mix, Auto Punch In,
Manual Punch In, Loop, Tempo)
Step (on Chord Sequence Mode)
Beat Map
Edit
Copy, Quantize, Delete, Insert, Erase, Transpose,
Part Exchange, Note Edit, PC Edit
Rhythm Pattern
40 types
Control
Song Select, Reset, Stop, Play, Rec, Bwd, Fwd,
All Song Play, Track Select, Count In, Playback Balance,
Marker Set, Repeat, Tempo Mute
>
©
м
®
3
o
nm
®
Lal
181
<Disk Drive/Disk Storage»
Disk Drive / Disk Storage
3.5 inch micro floppy disk
Disk Format
20 K bytes (2DD)
1.44 M bytes (2HD)
Songs
Max. 99 songs
Note Storage
Approx. 120,000 notes (2DD)
Approx. 240,000 notes (2HD)
Playable Software
Standard MIDI Files (format 0/1)
Roland Original Format (i-format)
Save
Standard MIDI Files (format 0)
Roland Original Format (i-format)
<Others>
Rated Power Output
30Wx2
Speakers
20 emx2
Display
Beat Indicator
240 x 64 dots Graphic LCD with backlighting
Language: English/German/French/Spanish/ Japanese
Score
G Clef staff, F Clef staff
With pitches, with lyrics
Lyrics
Yes (Built-in Display, MIDI Out)
Control
Volume, Brilliance, Reverb, Balance, Microphone Volume,
Microphone Echo
One Touch Play
One Touch Piano, One Touch Organ, One Touch Arranger
Pedals
Damper (half-pedal recognition)
Soft (half-pedal recognition, Function assignable)
Sostenuto (Function assignable)
182
Other Functions
EZ Arranger, EZ Player, EZ Recorder, Tone Finder,
Games, On-screen Help, Audition, Panel Lock
Connectors
Output jacks (L./ Mono, R)
input jacks (L/ Mono, К)
Microphone jack
Headphone jack (stereo) x 2
MIDI In connector x 2
MIDI Out connector
Computer connector
Pedal Connector (8 pin DIN type)
Power supply
AC 117 V/ 230 V/ 240 V
Power Consumption
69 W
Cabinet Finish
Satin Mahogany
Dimensions (including Piano Stand)
1,449 (W) x 528 (D) x 911 (H) mm
57-1/16 (W) x 20-13/16 (D) x 35-7/8 (H) inches
Weights (including Piano Stand)
63.3 kg / 139 Ibs 9 oz
Accessories
Owner's manttal
Power Cord
Data Disk
* In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/
or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior
notice.
Numerics
16 Track Sequencer ...............e...e reee eens 114
5 Track Buttons ....................e.eeee K BERKER 85, 91, 94
А
Advanced 3D oe, 33, 53-54
Al Song Play .…...….……ucccrresssrarerereaneorareseonersenrarserencnneee 78
AINDIBIICE eerie eterna ace erre 134
Arrangement o.oo ene 71
Audio Equipment ..................e. eee 154
Sound Mode en 155
Automatic Accompaniment .................em..... 29, 60, 137
B
BankseleCt essen e De e e e DD 152
Basic Sereen .................ienrice enero ener nee. 16
Basic Tempo ………ererenenennennennsmnennnennnnnennnnn 117
Bass TONE coor ee 68, 138
BEAL …….…......…rserssnrenisenrereranrennunasrenrensancererracererensrarencenvens 56
Beat Map cocci 116
Bend oor erat reenter asa ane 140
Bend Range ................22eeme iii es 140, 147
BreaK N 140
Brilliance ..............e...eeercaricer ercer ae ee renreee encarar ce ere nen 52
C
Check It Out! ………crcrrccsevasrarsansensensarsrarearenesnanensrsennanese 27
Chord ….......rrccenrccorereeranenenenen sans sa nearac anses 61, 174, 177
Chord Finder ....................e.. reee ce ene rene ere reee 62
Chord Intelligence ........................ ie 61, 139
Chord Sequencer ……….….…………eeeenenenesnnnennnnnnnnnn 100
Chord Tone Œ….……..crreeesererencersreus ren enaararesecnnane ne 68, 138
Chord TYPE eerie 61
Chorus Effect cones 147
COMputer oii reas 156
Copy
Measure ….....…..…….irrrcencesarsnencrencasraasenenranaraccerr sa eue 120
Rhythm Pattern essen rer AREA KA E RE 121
Count DOWN ….…...….……cucrcrecserssonassesrencascansasnams sen sacre cannes 69
Count Sound ….….....errrererssarererenenenrerenrenans sans are amas cnnnes 69
Count-I1n ....... eee neeenen concen ener ro raoneere reee ener 84, 145
D
Damper Pedal... nenes 14
Data Disk …...….....rrerecrerersansrrsrreressacececersessa nerveuse 64, 172
Delete
Measure ...........eeeereecercecee e ee eee aereo reeranee nenes 122
User Program essen rer ELEKTR EEE EHE 133
User Style ooo, 133
SON ...........eieieine ener ene nene rear enes 97
DEMO A 21
DEDO 38
Display Settirng ……………erescerenesnençäntneneensnnnennn 148
DIVISION ………rcerreuressesnsensercansensanass rave cevapernaanerar ser ccranranaaune 60
Drum Sets _..……rrererererssessensassersesaesnencaannensanenaa ne 44, 166
Drum Sounds coors 44
E
ECO ee eer ere nns 15
Edit .......e.eeeeeennen ener recaen eace racer ranenerenecer ren er nrecene enero 119
Effect Sound ............. ee... e.ineneear a ener erorenrenene ear ener ea 45, 170
Effects .......... ..eecemnmnen rece er ere ee ercer ne er eraD ee 55,176
Ending ooo eee rene rre ene. 60, 68
Erase ............eeeccccrr ere ee recen e eee eri onarraoee acer cavarroeneaneces 123
EX TODE eeee er eee esse R RR RER RRRR REES BEER REES 26, 46
EZ Árranger cocci EEE e 29
EZ Player ccna, 39
EZ Recorder ovine eee sees 34
F
Factory Reset …..…..ceserneseeemesesnansçnsnntmnnennnnnnn 149
Fade In/Out eee raros 140
Fill In To Original cocoon, 60
Fill In To Variation ……..…...…..…errrercecrcrereacrasesernnessa ITZIAR 60
Filb-In L....….ccrsvarrarecreressenrrssranerareresrarsanenaeenrrerresran sec ceur es 70
Find Suitabl® ……........…..ersesrerrrscennererenensaannnereeresascenaenennes 27
Floppy Disk... reee 38
FOrmat …...….rrererrareasssenventencacrenverrrnnenersessecrerrename 104
Write-Protect Tab ….....……rrrerrerrrerrensensersenterensernses 104
Footage ..............menie cierren. 143
Format ...............eecermie cenicero een rece ene ener nene een ee 104
G
Game ....e..e.nereononeoe ran ee ecc nee nene ner nenenarneceneereerrencenere 22
General MIDI eects areas arenes 178
Glide ….........éccreccecrercecrarererercersansrsenaperene case cerner ren cannes 140
Graph Screen cc. EEE REE REES EEE EAU 80
CE 178
H
Headphone ................... R eee eee 15
Help oe, 23
|
i-format ee rrr eee ae reese see eres ereanns 106
Ind@Ex ….......ncrcrrrrnserenaransenrarecrencenversaserraarenvarssnensen eme venues 27
Inputting ChOrÀ ….….…cescerirenseresençnntennnnennnnnnnnne 102
Insert ……..nrrrrrrrnerrennensrrneersenenrrnaesenansaneararanen cancer an aanenee 122
ÍNtro rene ccracsroncrscarerarsannerverenvavnensrevaces caves cannes cannes 60, 67
K
КагаоКе EN 41
Key Touch ...............eeierneren anne nenarn ere enteren 135
Key Transpose ..............eeneeeeeer tse nesses 89
Keyboard SCr@en ….………….…snseresseresseserseseesenseensensranse 80
|
Language iis 148
Layer PlAY .………urseareenrestensernennsensesenrensereserenresaenesceseneute 47
Leading Bass... ren e 140
Local Control ooo eee eevee serene 152
Fe). TOO 65
LYTIC coins 148
M
Marker ...............enceninanicie aceros teen eceoee en iereececan ener. 86, 145
N 86
Moving... nene nee eee 87
SEHING «cover eran ce ce eee 86
Master TUNiNg ….….……euerrreressenseeneasensecssracesenennracreuse 146
Melody Intelligence …….…………sienesenmensenennneanennnn 73
Мегпоту ВасКир ......нннннннененненнненненненннннннненеененненнннннне 149
183
Metronome ................eereiiiciiioncarineocoreneeereatacee cero ennene 28, 56
Animation ...................eirerecec ere e e A 57
Beat EAS 56
Pattern .............e..me..ecrre erroneo e De 57
бощл@ „шиннненнннееененеенннсееннсеннннененнннненннесеенненнееннннйо) 58
Tempo... rene een KENEG 56
Volume ..............icimreren rene enenee nen er nenercarercenere ens 59
Microphone ……….…iesermnenennmnnnennnsnennnnnmnennbnn 15
МО! seras ce nasn nee 151
MIDI Ensemble ………….....……rrerreresrereascenvessenannae se esesnes 152
Music File ceric eerste sven sine 38, 178
Music Style ...............eeeveineneoe ein 60, 63, 171
Multe .......ereemneemercen er eeronacenacerreneezarererrcaneremecarerraneerennnacaene 85
N
Note Edit ……..…ccrrmmererenerreseneacerserenenaseancas esse rever en anees 124
O
Octave Shift .……..……….…rrescrrnererrennesrensersrnanecenrecrenscccn DÍ
One-touch Arranger coo. EEE KE EEE EEE 30
One-touch Organ ass. rer ner EEE EEE 25, 43, 141
One-touch PianO essen en EEE RT see 24, 42, 134
Opening Message «u... EEE EEE 148
Original ……………svercersensesesestererenene es 60
P
Pane] LOCK ..............neeceniicerer ene nene rece erenenecen ane 133
Panpot ..............ememenicereere ee es 115
Part Exchange .………ecrrisrereremetenennennnennennnnnnnnnnnnne 124
PC L........crecrccerecrerernenencensrcen era ranasernasensencarasenana nes a tem 0e 119
PC Edit ............e.eieeaicec ce reeeeeo er enero recen ecoc enanos 125
Pedal ................eiceacececcae venere ee one re renace 14, 139
Pedal Mode eccentrics ae 135
Performance Part ................evcererienmen re EUER 60
Piano Style Arranger ..............e..ermeneene cen EE 74
Pickup ......... mencionen rare iones 99
Play Mode corn 144
Playing Back Songs ooo e 77
POWET O 13
Preset .................emimiecenirce ee ener one ecananernen er oeecenen nene. 63
Program Change …………seenneensnennnnnnn 125, 152
PU (Pickup) N 99
Q
Quantize ...............m.i.emeeeern in ne ee RD eee eee 121
Quick Tour …......……rrarorescravesecrensranranssssen rares ee 21
R
REC SLOP ocr ec 98
Recording «cocci AK KERN 34,91, 94
16 Track Sequencer ……………rescesereeanensmennnnnn 114
Erasing a Recorded SOng eee 97
Redoing a Recording .………rerenenenennnnennnenn 96
TEMPO iirc ee 117
REpeat overcentre 88
RESEt ….......ccrsroseresanenrarrasranerananeevennrecrasanmnena acer sen ner se 68
Resonance .............-....eeemeceriereceranereee reee creen ena crue 135
Reverb Effect ....................m0enmcoareneeeecrc eee A 52, 146
Rhythm Pattern ausser Er 66, 103, 173
Root Note ….….…...errrrrerecennrserrnraenencen rase ener ee 61
Rotary Effect ………………eennnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnnn 25, 43
184
S
Save
Compatibility coon rene EHEN 107
Save As SMF oie recen rene 106
User Program... eine 132
User Style ooo een EEE 131-132
Song oot Dee 104
SCOTÉ TT 79, 144
Screen SetNE «ovine, 148
SEX E 45,170
SMF Music files ......................ereeeenmece erre 178
Soft Pedal ces Lescreneeerereseaerencenta casernes 14
Song
Playback «coos 77
Record TO 34,91,94,114
Save ..eÑeireescnieeene rene careo eee racer Decre ce near tenen. 104
D/A E EEE 97
Song Edit ………………serserseensenmennennenentnnnnçnnnnnennnnnnn 119
Sostenuto Pedal .….….….….……serreessiensenianencennssnetsssennsnnncens 14
Sound ern ranean ss 137
Sound Generator .….……..……………srersesenenmentennsnennmnnnnn 178
Sound Mode .….….…..…..…rerevesceniensentsenentsensesereesseenensee 155
Split Play .…………nreansrenmen essecererensenaceraene acensrerenenranaeees 49
Split POINt ..……uesesesresnennencenennnnenensnensnnnnnn 137
Stretch TUning «ooo, 136
Style COMposer .………………ceeeneenmennennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 126
Style Converter ………….….…emscemsnannennnnnnnnnnnnmnnn 128
Style Orchestrator .................2e=2ee eee EE REG 71
SYNC SLATE octets cess 67
T
Tap Tempo .…….….…seeeneennennnnennnsnnnnnnnnnmnnn 82
Tempo
Automatic Accompaniment rennt 66
Metronome ...............e.reeimmin ree ene 56
Song ............meenereecerern eee reee eee reee eee ene 82
Tempo Muting ............. einaninnen ere nnne re Deeener een nenes 83
Tempo Recording ….……..………emennnnnnnnennnnnn 117
Tone ...........eercercimoresonenoreacece re neeecane o racarere can eerecenenaneene 26, 46
Tone Finder .…….…...…...….….riraerserarnensentenençnsnnnnçenñsennûnennnn 27
Track button …….….…..…..….…..rerrenrssserencecererrerces 85,91, 94,96
Transpose
Individual Part ass een EEE EEE KEREETK EEE 123
KeyDoOar] …..……sverssenseseencennencentantemmeressrsreserramenss caen 89
SOME viii sere nese nas 90
TURING «ovine 136
Tuning CUIVE .…….…ssrecseriscerenceentenmenenensensennenesmnenencre 136
TX. Channel... eens 152
U
UNO cients cerns 119
User Program essen nA ERRANG DEE 131-132
User Style o.oo eee 64, 126
V
Vanation iii ere 60
VElOCItY .…...….ccrsccscrancancance cenreremancsensenacenrneenene canards 124
Volume
Master .….……....……ecrenmresersesrensnesnesmnersansacsnarena rene neenes 13
Metronome .................. 20020 core 59
Microphone ….……..………cerermenensrennnsnnnnnnnnnn 15
MEMO
185
Information
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as
shown below.
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
PO. Box 2904,
El Horrieh Helioputos, Cairo,
EGYPT
TEL: (02) 4185531
REUNION
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules MermanZl.
Chaudron - BP79 9749 j
Ste Clotilde REUNION
TEL: 28 29 16
SOUTH AFRICA
That Other Music Shop
(PTY) Ltd.
H Melfe Street (Cnr Melle and
futa Street)
Braamfontein 2001
Republic of SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (011) 403 4105
Paul Bothner (PTY) Lid.
17 Werdmuller Centre Claremont
7700
Republic of SOUTH AFRICA
РО. Вох 23032
Claremont, Cape Town
SOUTH AFRICA, 7735
TEL: (021) 64 4030
CHINA
Beijing Xinghai Musica!
Instruments Co, Ltd.
6 Huangmuchang Chao Yang
District, Beijing, CHINA
TEL: (010) 6774 7491
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co, Ltd.
Service Division
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen
Wan, New Territories,
HONG KONG
TEL: 2415 0911
INDIA
Rivera Digitec (india) Pvt. Ltd.
309, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi
Flats Compound Off. Dr. Edwin
Moses Road, AMumbai-400011t,
INDIA
TEL: (072) 498 3074
INDONESIA
PT Citra Inti Rama
H.Cideng Timur No. 15150
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
KOREA
Cosmos Corporation
Service Station
261 2nd Floor Nak-Won Arcade
long-Ro ky, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: {02) 742 8844
MALAYSIA
Bentley Music SDN BHD
140 & 142, Jalan Bukit Bintang
55100 Kuala Lumpur, MALAYSIA
TEL: {03) 2443333
PHILIPPINES
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil |. Puyvat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
TEL: (02) 899 9801
SINGAPORE
Swee Lee Company
150 Sims Drive,
SINGAPORE 387381
TEL: 748-1669
CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE
LTD
Bik 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E,
402-2148, SINGAPORE 169980)
TEL: 243 9555
TAIWAN
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO, LTD.
Room 3, 911. No. 112 Chung Shan
N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN,
ROC.
TEL: (02) 2561 3334
THAILAND
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
333 Verng Nakormkasem, Soi 2,
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 2248621
VIETNAM
Saigon Music
138 Tran Quang Khai St,
District 1
Ho Chi Minh City
VIETNAM
TEL: (08) 614-4068
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
AUSTRALIA
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty., Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West NSW 2098
AUSTRALIA
TEL: (023 9982 B266
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Corporation (NZ) Ltd.
97 Mt. Eden Road, Mt. Eden,
Auckland 3, NEW ZEALAND
TEL: (09) 3096 715
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
ARGENTINA
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Florida 656 2nd Flour
Office Number 206A
Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA, CPIOS
TÉL: (54-11) 4- 393-6057
BRAZIL
Roland Brasil Lida.
R. Coronel Octaviano da Silveira
203 05522-016
Sao Paulo BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 3743 9377
CHILE
Comercial Fancy 5.A.
Avenida Rancagua 40330
Providencia Santiago, CHILE
TEL: 56-2-372-9100
EL SALVADOR
OMNI MUSIC
75 Avenida Notre y Alameda
Juan Pablo 7 No. JUL
San Salvador, EL SALVADOR
TEL: (503) 262-0788
MEXICO
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Av. Toluca No. 323 Col. Olivar de
los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F.
MEXICO
ТЕМ: (525) 666 04 80
La Casa Wagner de
Guadalajara s.a. de c.v.
Av. Corona No. 202 5.1.
Guadalajara, jalisco Mexico
C.P. 44106 MEXICO
TEL: (3) 613 1414
PANAMA |
Productos Superiores, S.A.
Apartado 655 - Panama 1
REP. DE PANAMA
TEL: (507) 270-2200
URUGUAY
Todo Musica
Cuareim 1488, Montevideo,
URUGUAY
TEL: 5982-974-2335
VENEZUELA
Musicland Digital C.A,
Av. Francisco de Miranda,
Centro Parque de Cristal, Nivel
C2 Loa 20 Caracas
VENEZUELA
TEL: (02) 285 9218
AUSTRIA
Roland Austria GES.M.B.H.
Stemensstrasse 4, RO. Box 74,
A-6063 RUM, AUSTRIA
TEL: (1512) 26 44 200
BELGIUM/HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG
Roland Benelux N. Y.
Houtstraat 3 B-2260 Oevel
{Westerlo) BELGIUM
TEL: (014) 575811
DENMARK
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
TEL: (039)16 6200
FRANCE
Roland France SA
4, Rue Paul Henri SPAAK
Pare de Esplanade F 77 462 51,
Thibault Lagny Cedex FRANCE
TEL: (1 600 73 500
FINLAND
Roland Scandinavia As,
Filial Finland
Lauttasaarentic 54 В
Fin-0U201 Helsinki, FINLAND
TEL: (9) 657 4020
GERMANY
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente
Handelsgeselischaft mbH.
Oststrasse 96, 22844 Norderstedt,
GERMANY
TEL: (040) 52 60090
GREECE
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
26422 Patras, GREECE
TEL: 061-435400)
HUNGARY
Intermusica Lid.
Warehouse Area "DEO PERS
H-2046 Torokbatint, HUNGARY
TEL: (23) 511011
IRELAND
Roland Ireland
Audio House, Belmont Court,
Donnybrook, Dublin 4.
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 2603501
ITALY
Roland Italy S. p. À.
Viale delle Industrie, 8
20020 Arese Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 93778300
NORWAY
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Kontor Norge
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 05
LiHeaker N-U2 16 Oslo
NORWAY
TEL: 273 0074
POLAND
P. Y. H. Brzostowicz
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
PL-D3664 Warszawa FOLAND
TEL: (022) 679 41 19
PORTUGAL
Tecnologías Musica e Audio,
Roland Portugal, S.A.
RUA SANTA CATARINA
131 - 4000 Porto PORTUGAL
TEL: (02) 208 44 56
ROMANIA
FBS LINES
Plata Libertatii 1.
RO-4200 Cheorgheni
TEL: (066) 164-509
RUSSIA
Slami Music Company
Sadojava-Triumfalnaja st., 16
100006 Mascow, RUSSTA
TEL: 095 209 2193
SPAIN
Roland Electronics
de Espana, 5. A.
Calle Bolivia 239 USO} Barcelona,
SPAIN
TEL: (93) 3058 1000
SWEDEN
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28,2 tr.
5-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (06) 707 0020
SWITZERLAND
Roland (Switzerland) AG
Musitronic AG
Gerberstrasse 5, CH-H10 Liestal,
SWITZERLAND
TEL: (0613921 1615
UKRAINE
TIC-TAC
Mira Str. 19/108
FC, Вох 180
295400 Munkachevo, UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 314-40
UNITED KINGDOM
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park SWANSEA
SA7 YF],
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 700139
(MIDDLE EAST)
BAHRAIN
Moon Stores
Bab Al Bahrain Road,
Р.О, Вох 20077
State of BAHRAIN
TEL: 211 005
CYPRUS
Radex Sound Equipment Lid.
17 Diagorou St, PO. Box 2046,
Nicosia CYPRUS
TEL: (02) 453 426
ISRAEL
Halilit P. Greenspoon &
Sons Ltd.
5 Retzif Fo'ativa Hashaya St
Tel-Aviv-Yaho ISRALL
TEL: (03) 6823666
JORDAN
AMMAN Trading Agency
Prince Mohammed St P.O. Box
825 Amman 11115 JORDAN
TEL: (06) 4641200
KUWAIT
Easa Husain Al-Yousifi
PO. Box 126 Safat 13002
KUWAIT
TEL: 5710409
LEBANON
A. Chahine & Fils
PO. Box 16-5857 Gergi Zeidan St.
Chahine Building, Achrafieh
Beirut, LEBANON
TEL: (07) 335794
OMAN
OHI Electronics & Trading
Co. LLC
POC Box 889 Muscat
Sultanate of OMAN
TEL: 459145
QATAR
Badie Studio & Stores
PO, Box 62,
DOHA QATAR
TEL: 423554
SAUDI ARABIA
aDawiiah Universal
Electronics APL
PO Box 2154 ALKHOBAR 31952,
SAUDE ARABIA
TEL: (03) 698 2081
SYRIA
Technical Light & Sound
Center
Khaled Ibn Al Walid St.
PO Box 13520
Damascus - SYRIA
TEL: (011) 2235 384
TURKEY
Barkat Muzik aletleri ithalat
ve ihracat limited ireketi
Siraselviler Cad. Billurcu Sok.
Mucadelle Cikmeze No. 11-13
Taksim, Istanbul, TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 74993234
U.A.E.
Zak Electronics & Musical
Instruments Co.
Zabeel Road, Al Sheroog Bldg,
No. H, Grand Floor DUBAI
U AE.
MO. Box 8050 DUBAI LLA.E.
TEL: (04} 3607 T5
(NORTH AMERICA)
CANADA
Roland Canada Music Lid.
{Head Office)
5480 Parkwood Way Richmond
B.C. VaVv 2M4 CANADA
TEL: {06043 276 6626
Roland Canada Music Lid.
(Toronto Office)
Unit 7, HR Woodbine Downs
Blvd, Etobicoke, ON
M9W 6Y1 CANADA
TEL: (0416) 213 9707
U. 5. A.
Roland Corporation U.S.
5146 S. Eastern Avenue
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2038,
{Ls A
TEL: (323) 890 3700
As of June 11, 1999
For EU Countries
N
( € This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.
f
For the USA —
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been lested and found to comply with the límits for a Class B digita! device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful intederence in a residential
installation. This equipment generales, uses, and can radiale radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmiul interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. if this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
lelevision reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
— increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected,
— Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
J
For Canada —
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur-du Canada.
rr Roland*
71675745
NINO
Roland Corporation

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

advertisement